<!entity % versiondata SYSTEM "version.ent"> %versiondata;
]>
<debiandoc>
- <!--
- Debian GNU/Linux Policy Manual.
- Copyright (C)1996,1997,1998 Ian Jackson and Christian Schwarz;
- released under the terms of the GNU
- General Public License, version 2 or (at your option) any later.
- Initial version 1996, Ian Jackson, ijackson@gnu.ai.mit.edu
- Revised November 27, 1996, David A. Morris, bweaver@debian.org
- New sections March 15, 1997, Christian Schwarz, schwarz@debian.org
- Reworked/Restructured April-July 1997, Christian Schwarz, schwarz@debian.org
- Maintainer since 1997, Christian Schwarz, schwarz@debian.org
- Christoph Lameter contributed the "Web Standard"
- The debian-policy mailing list has taken responsibility for the
- contents of this document since September 1998, with the package
- maintainers responsible for packaging adminstrivia only.
- -->
-
+
<book>
<titlepag>
<title>Debian Policy Manual</title>
- <author>
- <name>Ian Jackson </name>
- <email>ijackson@gnu.ai.mit.edu</email>
- </author>
- <author>
- <name>Christian Schwarz</name>
- <email>schwarz@debian.org</email>
- </author>
- <author>
- <name>revised: David A. Morris</name>
- <email>bweaver@debian.org</email>
- </author>
- <author>
- <name>The Debian Policy mailing List</name>
- <email>debian-policy@lists.debian.org</email>
- </author>
+ <author><qref id="authors">The Debian Policy Mailing List</qref></author>
<version>version &version;, &date;</version>
<abstract>
This manual describes the policy requirements for the Debian
- GNU/Linux distribution. This includes the structure and
- contents of the Debian archive, several design issues of the
- operating system, as well as technical requirements that each
- package must satisfy to be included in the distribution. The
- policy package itself is maintained by a group of maintainers
- that have no editorial powers. At the moment, the list of
- maintainers is:
- <enumlist>
- <item>
- <p>Michael Alan Dorman <email>mdorman@debian.org</email></p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>Richard Braakman <email>dark@xs4all.nl</email></p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>Philip Hands <email>phil@hands.com</email></p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>Manoj Srivastava <email>srivasta@debian.org</email></p>
- </item>
- </enumlist>
+ GNU/Linux distribution. This includes the structure and
+ contents of the Debian archive and several design issues of
+ the operating system, as well as technical requirements that
+ each package must satisfy to be included in the distribution.
</abstract>
-
<copyright>
<copyrightsummary>
- Copyright ©1996,1997,1998 Ian Jackson
+ Copyright © 1996,1997,1998 Ian Jackson
and Christian Schwarz.
</copyrightsummary>
<p>
<p>
A copy of the GNU General Public License is available as
- <tt>/usr/share/common-licences/GPL</tt> in the Debian GNU/Linux
- distribution or on the World Wide Web at
- <url id="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html"
- name="The GNU Public Licence">. You can also obtain it by writing to the
- Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
- Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+ <file>/usr/share/common-licenses/GPL</file> in the Debian GNU/Linux
+ distribution or on the World Wide Web at
+ <url id="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html"
+ name="the GNU General Public Licence">. You can also
+ obtain it by writing to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
</p>
</copyright>
</titlepag>
- <toc detail="sect">
-
+ <toc detail="sect1">
+
<chapt id="scope">
<heading>About this manual</heading>
<sect>
<p>
This manual describes the policy requirements for the Debian
GNU/Linux distribution. This includes the structure and
- contents of the Debian archive, several design issues of the
+ contents of the Debian archive and several design issues of the
operating system, as well as technical requirements that
each package must satisfy to be included in the
distribution.
- </p>
+ </p>
+
<p>
- This manual does <em>not</em> describe the technical
- mechanisms involved in package creation, installation, and
- removal. This information can be found in the <em>Debian
- Packaging Manual</em> and the <em>Debian System
- Administrators' Manual</em>. Please note that the
- footnotes present in this manual are merely informative,
- and are not part of Debian policy itself.
- </p>
+ This manual also describes Debian policy as it relates to
+ creating Debian packages. It is not a tutorial on how to build
+ packages, nor is it exhaustive where it comes to describing
+ the behavior of the packaging system. Instead, this manual
+ attempts to define the interface to the package management
+ system that the developers have to be conversant with.<footnote>
+ Informally, the criteria used for inclusion is that the
+ material meet one of the following requirements:
+ <taglist compact="compact">
+ <tag>Standard interfaces</tag>
+ <item>
+ The material presented represents an interface to
+ the packaging system that is mandated for use, and
+ is used by, a significant number of packages, and
+ therefore should not be changed without peer
+ review. Package maintainers can then rely on this
+ interfaces not changing, and the package
+ management software authors need to ensure
+ compatibility with these interface
+ definitions. (Control file and changelog file
+ formats are examples.)
+ </item>
+ <tag>Chosen Convention</tag>
+ <item>
+ If there are a number of technically viable choices
+ that can be made, but one needs to select one of
+ these options for inter-operability. The version
+ number format is one example.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ Please note that these are not mutually exclusive;
+ selected conventions often become parts of standard
+ interfaces.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The footnotes present in this manual are
+ merely informative, and are not part of Debian policy itself.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The appendices to this manual are not necessarily normative,
+ either. Please see <ref id="pkg-scope"> for more information.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the normative part of this manual,
+ the words <em>must</em>, <em>should</em> and
+ <em>may</em>, and the adjectives <em>required</em>,
+ <em>recommended</em> and <em>optional</em>, are used to
+ distinguish the significance of the various guidelines in
+ this policy document. Packages that do not conform to the
+ guidelines denoted by <em>must</em> (or <em>required</em>)
+ will generally not be considered acceptable for the Debian
+ distribution. Non-conformance with guidelines denoted by
+ <em>should</em> (or <em>recommended</em>) will generally be
+ considered a bug, but will not necessarily render a package
+ unsuitable for distribution. Guidelines denoted by
+ <em>may</em> (or <em>optional</em>) are truly optional and
+ adherence is left to the maintainer's discretion.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- This document assumes familiarity with these other two
- manuals. Unfortunately, the <em>System Administrators'
- Manual</em> does not exist yet.
+ These classifications are roughly equivalent to the bug
+ severities <em>serious</em> (for <em>must</em> or
+ <em>required</em> directive violations), <em>minor</em>,
+ <em>normal</em> or <em>important</em>
+ (for <em>should</em> or <em>recommended</em> directive
+ violations) and <em>wishlist</em> (for <em>optional</em>
+ items).
+ <footnote>
+ Compare RFC 2119. Note, however, that these words are
+ used in a different way in this document.
+ </footnote>
</p>
+
<p>
Much of the information presented in this manual will be
useful even when building a package which is to be
- distributed in some other way or is for local use.
+ distributed in some other way or is intended for local use
+ only.
</p>
</sect>
+
<sect>
<heading>New versions of this document</heading>
+
<p>
- The current version of this document is always accessible from the
- Debian FTP server <ftpsite>ftp.debian.org</ftpsite> at
- <ftppath>/debian/doc/package-developer/debian-policy.html.tar.gz</ftppath>
- or from the Debian WWW server at
- <url id="http://www.debian.org/doc/debian-policy/"
- name="The Debian Policy Manual">.</p>
+ This manual is distributed via the Debian package
+ <package>debian-policy</package>.
+ </p>
<p>
- In addition, this manual is distributed via the Debian package
- <tt>debian-policy</tt>.
+ The current version of this document is also available from
+ the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/debian-policy/"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/debian-policy/"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/policy.txt.gz"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/policy.txt.gz"></tt>.
+ Also available from the same directory are several other
+ formats: <file>policy.html.tar.gz</file>, <file>policy.pdf.gz</file>
+ and <file>policy.ps.gz</file>.
</p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <package>debian-policy</package> package also includes the file
+ <file>upgrading-checklist.txt</file> which indicates policy
+ changes between versions of this document.
+ </p>
</sect>
- <sect>
- <heading>Feedback</heading>
+
+ <sect id="authors">
+ <heading>Authors and Maintainers</heading>
<p>
- As the Debian GNU/Linux system is continuously evolving this
- manual is changed from time to time.
- </p>
+ Originally called "Debian GNU/Linux Policy Manual", this
+ manual was initially written in 1996 by Ian Jackson.
+ It was revised on November 27th, 1996 by David A. Morris.
+ Christian Schwarz added new sections on March 15th, 1997,
+ and reworked/restructured it in April-July 1997.
+ Christoph Lameter contributed the "Web Standard".
+ Julian Gilbey largely restructured it in 2001.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Since September 1998, the responsibility for the contents of
+ this document lies on the <url name="debian-policy mailing list"
+ id="mailto:debian-policy@lists.debian.org">. Proposals
+ are discussed there and inserted into policy after a certain
+ consensus is established.
+ <!-- insert shameless policy-process plug here eventually -->
+ The actual editing is done by a group of maintainers that have
+ no editorial powers. These are the current maintainers:
+
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>Julian Gilbey</item>
+ <item>Branden Robinson</item>
+ <item>Josip Rodin</item>
+ <item>Manoj Srivastava</item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+
<p>
- While the authors of this document tried hard not to include
- any typos or other errors these still occur. If you discover
- an error in this manual or if you want to tell us any
- comments, suggestions, or critics please send an email to
+ While the authors of this document have tried hard to avoid
+ typos and other errors, these do still occur. If you discover
+ an error in this manual or if you want to give any
+ comments, suggestions, or criticisms please send an email to
the Debian Policy List,
<email>debian-policy@lists.debian.org</email>, or submit a
bug report against the <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Please do not try to reach the individual authors or maintainers
+ of the Policy Manual regarding changes to the Policy.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="related">
+ <heading>Related documents</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ There are several other documents other than this Policy Manual
+ that are necessary to fully understand some Debian policies and
+ procedures.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The external "sub-policy" documents are referred to in:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item><ref id="fhs"></item>
+ <item><ref id="virtual_pkg"></item>
+ <item><ref id="menus"></item>
+ <item><ref id="mime"></item>
+ <item><ref id="perl"></item>
+ <item><ref id="maintscriptprompt"></item>
+ <item><ref id="emacs"></item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition to those, which carry the weight of policy, there
+ is the Debian Developer's Reference. This document describes
+ procedures and resources for Debian developers, but it is
+ <em>not</em> normative; rather, it includes things that don't
+ belong into the Policy, such as best practices for developers.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Developer's Reference is available in the
+ <package>developers-reference</package> package.
+ It's also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/developers-reference/"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/developers-reference/"></tt>.
+ </p>
</sect>
+
</chapt>
- <chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="archive">
<heading>The Debian Archive</heading>
+
<p>
The Debian GNU/Linux system is maintained and distributed as a
- collection of <em>packages</em>. Since there are so many of them (over
- 2600) they are split into <em>sections</em> and <em>priorities</em> to
- simplify handling of them.
+ collection of <em>packages</em>. Since there are so many of
+ them (currently well over 6000), they are split into
+ <em>sections</em> and given <em>priorities</em> to simplify
+ the handling of them.
</p>
+
<p>
The effort of the Debian project is to build a free operating
system, but not every package we want to make accessible is
- <em>free</em> in our sense (see Debian Free Software
+ <em>free</em> in our sense (see the Debian Free Software
Guidelines, below), or may be imported/exported without
restrictions. Thus, the archive is split into the sections
- <em>main</em>, <em>non-us</em>, <em>non-free</em>, and
- <em>contrib</em>.</p>
+ <em>main</em>, <em>non-free</em>, <em>contrib</em>,
+ <em>non-US/main</em>, <em>non-US/non-free</em>, and
+ <em>non-US/contrib</em>. The sections are explained in detail
+ below.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- The <em>main</em> section forms the <em>Debian GNU/Linux
- distribution</em>. </p>
+ The <em>main</em> and the <em>non-US/main</em> sections
+ together form the <em>Debian GNU/Linux distribution</em>.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Packages in the other sections are not considered as part of
- the Debian distribution, though we support their use, and we
+ Packages in the other sections are not considered to be part
+ of the Debian distribution, although we support their use and
provide infrastructure for them (such as our bug-tracking
system and mailing lists). This Debian Policy Manual applies
to these packages as well.</p>
<sect id="pkgcopyright">
<heading>Package copyright and sections</heading>
<p>
- The aims of this policy are:
+ The aims of this section are:
<list compact="compact">
<item>
- <p>We want to make as much software available as we
- can.</p>
+ to allow us to make as much software available as we can,
</item>
<item>
- <p>We want to encourage everyone to write free software.</p>
+ to allow us to encourage everyone to write free software, and
</item>
<item>
- <p> We want to make it easy for people to produce
+ to allow us to make it easy for people to produce
CD-ROMs of our system without violating any licenses,
- import/export restrictions, or any other laws.</p>
+ import/export restrictions, or any other laws.
</item>
</list>
</p>
- <sect1>
- <heading>The Debian Free Software Guidelines</heading>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>The Debian Free Software Guidelines</heading>
+ <p>
+ The Debian Free Software Guidelines (DFSG) form our
+ definition of "free software". These are:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag>Free Redistribution
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license of a Debian component may not restrict any
+ party from selling or giving away the software as a
+ component of an aggregate software distribution
+ containing programs from several different
+ sources. The license may not require a royalty or
+ other fee for such sale.
+ </item>
+ <tag>Source Code
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The program must include source code, and must allow
+ distribution in source code as well as compiled form.
+ </item>
+ <tag>Derived Works
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license must allow modifications and derived
+ works, and must allow them to be distributed under the
+ same terms as the license of the original software.
+ </item>
+ <tag>Integrity of The Author's Source Code
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license may restrict source-code from being
+ distributed in modified form <em>only</em> if the
+ license allows the distribution of "patch files"
+ with the source code for the purpose of modifying the
+ program at build time. The license must explicitly
+ permit distribution of software built from modified
+ source code. The license may require derived works to
+ carry a different name or version number from the
+ original software. (This is a compromise. The Debian
+ Project encourages all authors to not restrict any
+ files, source or binary, from being modified.)
+ </item>
+ <tag>No Discrimination Against Persons or Groups
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license must not discriminate against any person
+ or group of persons.
+ </item>
+ <tag>No Discrimination Against Fields of Endeavor
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license must not restrict anyone from making use
+ of the program in a specific field of endeavor. For
+ example, it may not restrict the program from being
+ used in a business, or from being used for genetic
+ research.
+ </item>
+ <tag>Distribution of License
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The rights attached to the program must apply to all
+ to whom the program is redistributed without the need
+ for execution of an additional license by those
+ parties.
+ </item>
+ <tag>License Must Not Be Specific to Debian
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The rights attached to the program must not depend on
+ the program's being part of a Debian system. If the
+ program is extracted from Debian and used or
+ distributed without Debian but otherwise within the
+ terms of the program's license, all parties to whom
+ the program is redistributed must have the same
+ rights as those that are granted in conjunction with
+ the Debian system.
+ </item>
+ <tag>License Must Not Contaminate Other Software
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The license must not place restrictions on other
+ software that is distributed along with the licensed
+ software. For example, the license must not insist
+ that all other programs distributed on the same medium
+ must be free software.
+ </item>
+ <tag>Example Licenses
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ The "GPL," "BSD," and "Artistic" licenses are examples of
+ licenses that we consider <em>free</em>.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>The main section</heading>
+ <p>
+ Every package in <em>main</em> and <em>non-US/main</em>
+ must comply with the DFSG (Debian Free Software
+ Guidelines).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, the packages in <em>main</em>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ must not require a package outside of <em>main</em>
+ for compilation or execution (thus, the package must
+ not declare a "Depends", "Recommends", or
+ "Build-Depends" relationship on a non-<em>main</em>
+ package),
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must not be so buggy that we refuse to support them,
+ and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must meet all policy requirements presented in this
+ manual.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Similarly, the packages in <em>non-US/main</em>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ must not require a package outside of <em>main</em>
+ or <em>non-US/main</em> for compilation or
+ execution,
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must not be so buggy that we refuse to support them,
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must meet all policy requirements presented in this
+ manual.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="contrib">
+ <heading>The contrib section</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Every package in <em>contrib</em> and
+ <em>non-US/contrib</em> must comply with the DFSG.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, the packages in <em>contrib</em> and
+ <em>non-US/contrib</em>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ must not be so buggy that we refuse to support them,
+ and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must meet all policy requirements presented in this
+ manual.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Furthermore, packages in <em>contrib</em> must not require
+ a package in a <em>non-US</em> section for compilation or
+ execution.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Examples of packages which would be included in
+ <em>contrib</em> or <em>non-US/contrib</em> are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ free packages which require <em>contrib</em>,
+ <em>non-free</em> packages or packages which are not
+ in our archive at all for compilation or execution,
+ and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ wrapper packages or other sorts of free accessories for
+ non-free programs.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="non-free">
+ <heading>The non-free section</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must be placed in <em>non-free</em> or
+ <em>non-US/non-free</em> if they are not compliant with
+ the DFSG or are encumbered by patents or other legal
+ issues that make their distribution problematic.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, the packages in <em>non-free</em> and
+ <em>non-US/non-free</em>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ must not be so buggy that we refuse to support them,
+ and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ must meet all policy requirements presented in this
+ manual that it is possible for them to meet.
+ <footnote>
+ It is possible that there are policy
+ requirements which the package is unable to
+ meet, for example, if the source is
+ unavailable. These situations will need to be
+ handled on a case-by-case basis.
+ </footnote>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="non-US">
+ <heading>The non-US sections</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Non-free programs with cryptographic program code need to
+ be stored on the <em>non-us</em> server because of export
+ restrictions of the U.S.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Programs which use patented algorithms that have a
+ restrictied license also need to be stored on "non-us",
+ since that is located in a country where it is not allowed
+ to patent algorithms.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A package depends on another package which is distributed
+ via the non-us server has to be stored on the non-us
+ server as well.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Further copyright considerations</heading>
+ <p>
+ Every package must be accompanied by a verbatim copy of
+ its copyright and distribution license in the file
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</file>
+ (see <ref id="copyrightfile"> for further details).
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We reserve the right to restrict files from being included
+ anywhere in our archives if
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ their use or distribution would break a law,
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ there is an ethical conflict in their distribution or
+ use,
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ we would have to sign a license for them, or
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ their distribution would conflict with other project
+ policies.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Programs whose authors encourage the user to make
+ donations are fine for the main distribution, provided
+ that the authors do not claim that not donating is
+ immoral, unethical, illegal or something similar; in such
+ a case they must go in <em>non-free</em>.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages whose copyright permission notices (or patent
+ problems) do not even allow redistribution of binaries
+ only, and where no special permission has been obtained,
+ must not be placed on the Debian FTP site and its mirrors
+ at all.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that under international copyright law (this applies
+ in the United States, too), <em>no</em> distribution or
+ modification of a work is allowed without an explicit
+ notice saying so. Therefore a program without a copyright
+ notice <em>is</em> copyrighted and you may not do anything
+ to it without risking being sued! Likewise if a program
+ has a copyright notice but no statement saying what is
+ permitted then nothing is permitted.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Many authors are unaware of the problems that restrictive
+ copyrights (or lack of copyright notices) can cause for
+ the users of their supposedly-free software. It is often
+ worthwhile contacting such authors diplomatically to ask
+ them to modify their license terms. However, this can be a
+ politically difficult thing to do and you should ask for
+ advice on the <tt>debian-legal</tt> mailing list first, as
+ explained below.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When in doubt about a copyright, send mail to
+ <email>debian-legal@lists.debian.org</email>. Be prepared
+ to provide us with the copyright statement. Software
+ covered by the GPL, public domain software and BSD-like
+ copyrights are safe; be wary of the phrases "commercial
+ use prohibited" and "distribution restricted".
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Subsections</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The packages in the sections <em>main</em>,
+ <em>contrib</em> and <em>non-free</em> are grouped further
+ into <em>subsections</em> to simplify handling.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The section and subsection for each package should be
+ specified in the package's <tt>Section</tt> control
+ record. However, the maintainer of the Debian archive
+ may override this selection to ensure the consistency of
+ the Debian distribution. The <tt>Section</tt> field
+ should be of the form:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <em>subsection</em> if the package is in the
+ <em>main</em> section,
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <em>section/subsection</em> if the package is in
+ the <em>contrib</em> or <em>non-free</em> section,
+ and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <tt>non-US</tt>, <tt>non-US/contrib</tt> or
+ <tt>non-US/non-free</tt> if the package is in
+ <em>non-US/main</em>, <em>non-US/contrib</em> or
+ <em>non-US/non-free</em> respectively.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian archive maintainers provide the authoritative
+ list of subsections. At present, they are:
+ <em>admin</em>, <em>base</em>, <em>comm</em>,
+ <em>contrib</em>, <em>devel</em>, <em>doc</em>,
+ <em>editors</em>, <em>electronics</em>, <em>games</em>,
+ <em>graphics</em>, <em>hamradio</em>,
+ <em>interpreters</em>, <em>libs</em>, <em>mail</em>,
+ <em>math</em>, <em>misc</em>, <em>net</em>, <em>news</em>,
+ <em>non-US</em>, <em>non-free</em>, <em>oldlibs</em>,
+ <em>otherosfs</em>, <em>science</em>, <em>shells</em>,
+ <em>sound</em>, <em>tex</em>, <em>text</em>,
+ <em>utils</em>, <em>web</em>, <em>x11</em>.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Priorities</heading>
+
<p>
- The Debian Free Software Guidelines (DFSG) is our
- definition of `free' software.
+ Each package should have a <em>priority</em> value, which is
+ included in the package's <em>control record</em>. This
+ information is used by the Debian package management tools
+ to separate high-priority packages from less-important
+ packages.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ The following <em>priority levels</em> are recognised by the
+ Debian package management tools.
<taglist>
- <tag>Free Redistribution
- </tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- The license of a Debian component may not restrict any
- party from selling or giving away the software as a
- component of an aggregate software distribution
- containing programs from several different
- sources. The license may not require a royalty or
- other fee for such sale.
- </p>
- </item>
- <tag>Source Code
- </tag>
+ <tag><tt>required</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>
- The program must include source code, and must allow
- distribution in source code as well as compiled form.
- </p>
+ Packages which are necessary for the proper
+ functioning of the system. You must not remove these
+ packages or your system may become totally broken and
+ you may not even be able to use <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to
+ put things back. Systems with only the
+ <tt>required</tt> packages are probably unusable, but
+ they do have enough functionality to allow the
+ sysadmin to boot and install more software.
</item>
- <tag>Derived Works
- </tag>
+ <tag><tt>important</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>
- The license must allow modifications and derived
- works, and must allow them to be distributed under the
- same terms as the license of the original software.
- </p>
+ Important programs, including those which one would
+ expect to find on any Unix-like system. If the
+ expectation is that an experienced Unix person who
+ found it missing would say "What on earth is going on,
+ where is <prgn>foo</prgn>?", it must be an
+ <tt>important</tt> package.<footnote>
+ This is an important criterion because we are
+ trying to produce, amongst other things, a free
+ Unix.
+ </footnote>
+ Other packages without which the system will not run
+ well or be usable must also have priority
+ <tt>important</tt>. This does
+ <em>not</em> include Emacs, the X Window System, TeX
+ or any other large applications. The
+ <tt>important</tt> packages are just a bare minimum of
+ commonly-expected and necessary tools.
</item>
- <tag>Integrity of The Author's Source Code
- </tag>
+ <tag><tt>standard</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>
- The license may restrict source-code from being
- distributed in modified form <em>only</em> if the
- license allows the distribution of ``patch files''
- with the source code for the purpose of modifying the
- program at build time. The license must explicitly
- permit distribution of software built from modified
- source code. The license may require derived works to
- carry a different name or version number from the
- original software. (This is a compromise. The Debian
- group encourages all authors to not restrict any
- files, source or binary, from being modified.)
- </p>
+ These packages provide a reasonably small but not too
+ limited character-mode system. This is what will be
+ installed by default if the user doesn't select anything
+ else. It doesn't include many large applications.
</item>
- <tag>No Discrimination Against Persons or Groups
- </tag>
+ <tag><tt>optional</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>
- The license must not discriminate against any person
- or group of persons.
- </p>
+ (In a sense everything that isn't required is
+ optional, but that's not what is meant here.) This is
+ all the software that you might reasonably want to
+ install if you didn't know what it was and don't have
+ specialized requirements. This is a much larger system
+ and includes the X Window System, a full TeX
+ distribution, and many applications. Note that
+ optional packages should not conflict with each other.
</item>
- <tag>No Discrimination Against Fields of Endeavor
- </tag>
+ <tag><tt>extra</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>
- The license must not restrict anyone from making use
- of the program in a specific field of endeavor. For
- example, it may not restrict the program from being
- used in a business, or from being used for genetic
- research.
- </p>
- </item>
- <tag>Distribution of License
- </tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- The rights attached to the program must apply to all
- to whom the program is redistributed without the need
- for execution of an additional license by those
- parties.
- </p>
- </item>
- <tag>License Must Not Be Specific to Debian
- </tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- The rights attached to the program must not depend on
- the program's being part of a Debian system. If the
- program is extracted from Debian and used or
- distributed without Debian but otherwise within the
- terms of the program's license, all parties to whom
- the program is redistributed must have the same
- rights as those that are granted in conjunction with
- the Debian system.
- </p>
- </item>
- <tag>License Must Not Contaminate Other Software
- </tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- The license must not place restrictions on other
- software that is distributed along with the licensed
- software. For example, the license must not insist
- that all other programs distributed on the same medium
- must be free software.
- </p>
- </item>
- <tag>Example Licenses
- </tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- The ``GPL,'' ``BSD,'' and ``Artistic'' licenses are
- examples of licenses that we consider <em>free</em>.
- </p>
+ This contains all packages that conflict with others
+ with required, important, standard or optional
+ priorities, or are only likely to be useful if you
+ already know what they are or have specialised
+ requirements.
</item>
</taglist>
</p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>The main section</heading>
- <p>
- Every package in "main" must comply with the DFSG (Debian
- Free Software Guidelines).</p>
-
- <p>
- In addition, the packages in "main"
- <list compact="compact">
- <item>
- <p>
- must not require a package outside of "main" for
- compilation or execution (thus, the package may not
- declare a "Depends" or "Recommends" relationship on a
- non-main package),
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- must not be so buggy that we refuse to support them,
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- must meet all policy requirements presented in this
- manual.
- </p>
- </item>
- </list>
- </p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>The contrib section</heading>
- <p>
- Every package in "contrib" must comply with the DFSG.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Examples of packages which would be included in "contrib" are
- <list compact="compact">
- <item>
- <p>
- free packages which require "contrib", "non-free", or
- "non-US" packages or packages which are not in our
- archive at all for compilation or execution,
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- wrapper packages or other sorts of free accessories for
- non-free programs,
- </p>
- </item>
- </list>
- </p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>The non-free section</heading>
- <p>
- `Non-free' contains packages which are not compliant with
- the DFSG or which are encumbered by patents or other legal
- issues that make their distribution problematic.</p>
- <p>
- All packages in `non-free' must be electronically
- distributable across international borders.
- </p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>The non-us server</heading>
- <p>
- Some programs with cryptographic program code must be stored
- on the "non-us" server because of export restrictions of the
- U.S.</p>
- <p>
- This applies only to packages which contain cryptographic
- code. A package containing a program with an interface to a
- cryptographic program or a program that's dynamically linked
- against a cryptographic library can be distributed if it is
- capable of running without the cryptography library or
- program.
- </p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Further copyright considerations</heading>
- <p>
- Every package must be accompanied by a verbatim copy of its
- copyright and distribution license in the file
- /usr/share/doc/<package-name>/copyright (see <ref
- id="copyrightfile"> for details).</p>
- <p>
- We reserve the right to restrict files from being included
- anywhere in our archives if
- <list compact="compact">
- <item>
- <p>
- their use or distribution would break a law,
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- there is an ethical conflict in their distribution or
- use,
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- we would have to sign a license for them, or
- </p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- their distribution would conflict with other project
- policies.
- </p>
- </item>
- </list>
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Programs whose authors encourage the user to make donations
- are fine for the main distribution, provided that the
- authors do not claim that not donating is immoral,
- unethical, illegal or something similar; otherwise they must
- go in contrib (or non-free, if even distribution is
- restricted by such statements).</p>
-
- <p>
- Packages whose copyright permission notices (or patent
- problems) do not allow redistribution even of only binaries,
- and where no special permission has been obtained, cannot be
- placed on the Debian FTP site and its mirrors at all.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note, that under international copyright law (this applies
- in the United States, too) <em>no</em> distribution or
- modification of a work is allowed without an explicit notice
- saying so. Therefore a program without a copyright notice
- <em>is</em> copyrighted and you may not do anything to it
- without risking being sued! Likewise if a program has a
- copyright notice but no statement saying what is permitted
- then nothing is permitted.</p>
-
- <p>
- Many authors are unaware of the problems that restrictive
- copyrights (or lack of copyright notices) can cause for the
- users of their supposedly-free software. It is often
- worthwhile contacting such authors diplomatically to ask
- them to modify their license terms. However, this is a
- politically difficult thing to do and you should ask for
- advice on <tt>debian-devel</tt> first.</p>
-
- <p>
- When in doubt, send mail to
- <email>debian-devel@lists.debian.org</email>. Be prepared
- to provide us with the copyright statement. Software
- covered by the GPL, public domain software and BSD-like
- copyrights are safe; be wary of the phrases `commercial use
- prohibited' and `distribution restricted'.</p>
- </sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Subsections</heading>
-
- <p>
- The packages in all the sections (<em>main</em>,
- <em>contrib</em>, <em>non-US/main</em>, <em>non-free</em>,
- <em>non-US/contrib</em>, and <em>non-US/non-free</em>) are
- grouped further into <em>subsections</em> to simplify
- handling.</p>
-
- <p>
- The section for each package is specified in the package's
- <em>control record</em>. However, the maintainer of the
- Debian archive may override this selection to assure the
- consistency of the Debian distribution. </p>
<p>
- Please check the current Debian distribution to see which
- sections are available.</p>
- </sect1>
- <sect>
- <heading>Priorities</heading>
-
- <p>
- Each package is given a certain <em>priority</em> value,
- which is included in the package's <em>control
- record</em>. This information is used in the Debian package
- management tool to separate high-priority packages from
- less-important packages.</p>
-
- <p>
- The following <em>priority levels</em> are supported by the
- Debian package management system, <prgn>dpkg</prgn>.
- <taglist>
- <tag><tt>required</tt></tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- <tt>required</tt> packages are necessary for the
- proper functioning of the system. You must not remove
- these packages or your system may become totally
- broken and you may not even be able to use
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to put things back. Systems with
- only the <tt>required</tt> packages are probably
- unusable, but they do have enough functionality to
- allow the sysadmin to boot and install more
- software.</p>
- </item>
- <tag><tt>important</tt></tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- Important programs, including those which one would
- expect to find on any Unix-like system. If the
- expectation is that an experienced Unix person who
- found it missing would say `What the F*!@<+ is
- going on, where is <prgn>foo</prgn>', it must be in
- <tt>important</tt>. This is an important criterion
- because we are trying to produce, amongst other
- things, a free Unix. Other packages without which the
- system will not run well or be usable must also be
- here. This does <em>not</em> include Emacs, the X
- Window System, TeX or any other large applications.
- The <tt>important</tt> packages are just a bare
- minimum of commonly-expected and necessary tools.</p>
- </item>
- <tag><tt>standard</tt></tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- These packages provide a reasonably small but not too
- limited character-mode system. This is what will
- install by default if the user doesn't select anything
- else. It doesn't include many large applications, but
- it does include Emacs (this is more of a piece of
- infrastructure than an application) and a reasonable
- subset of TeX and LaTeX (if this is possible without
- X).</p>
- </item>
- <tag><tt>optional</tt></tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- (In a sense everything is optional that isn't
- required, but that's not what is meant here.) This is
- all the software that you might reasonably want to
- install if you didn't know what it was or don't have
- specialized requirements. This is a much larger system
- and includes the X Window System, a full TeX
- distribution, and many applications.</p>
- </item>
- <tag><tt>extra</tt></tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- This contains all packages that conflict with others
- with required, important, standard or optional
- priorities, or are only likely to be useful if you
- already know what they are or have specialised
- requirements.
- </p>
- </item>
- </taglist></p>
-
- <p>
- Packages may not depend on packages with lower priority
+ Packages must not depend on packages with lower priority
values (excluding build-time dependencies). In order to
- ensure this, the priorities of one or more packages may have
+ ensure this, the priorities of one or more packages may need
to be adjusted.
</p>
</sect>
-
+
<sect>
<heading>Binary packages</heading>
-
+
<p>
The Debian GNU/Linux distribution is based on the Debian
package management system, called <prgn>dpkg</prgn>. Thus,
- all packages in the Debian distribution have to be provided
+ all packages in the Debian distribution must be provided
in the <tt>.deb</tt> file format.</p>
-
-
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>The package name</heading>
-
+
<p>
Every package must have a name that's unique within the Debian
archive.</p>
-
+
<p>
- Package names may only consist of lower case letters, digits (0-9),
- plus (+) or minus (-) signs, and periods (.).</p>
-
+ Package names must consist only of lower case letters
+ (<tt>a-z</tt>), digits (<tt>0-9</tt>), plus (<tt>+</tt>)
+ and minus (<tt>-</tt>) signs, and periods (<tt>.</tt>).
+ They must be at least two characters long and must start
+ with an alphanumeric character.
+ </p>
+
<p>
The package name is part of the file name of the
<tt>.deb</tt> file and is included in the control field
information.
</p>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1>
<heading>The maintainer of a package</heading>
-
- <p>
- Every package must have exactly one maintainer at a
- time. This person is responsible that the license of the
- package's software complies with the policy of the
- distribution this package is included in.</p>
-
+ <p>
+ Every package must have a Debian maintainer (the
+ maintainer may be one person or a group of people
+ reachable from a common email address, such as a mailing
+ list). The maintainer is responsible for ensuring that
+ the package is placed in the appropriate distributions.
+ </p>
+
<p>
The maintainer must be specified in the
- <tt>Maintainer</tt> control field with the correct name
- and a working email address for the Debian maintainer of
- the package. If one person maintains several packages
- he/she should try to avoid having different forms of their
- name and email address in different <tt>Maintainer</tt>
- fields.</p>
-
+ <tt>Maintainer</tt> control field with their correct name
+ and a working email address. If one person maintains
+ several packages, he/she should try to avoid having
+ different forms of their name and email address in
+ the <tt>Maintainer</tt> fields of those packages.
+ </p>
+
<p>
If the maintainer of a package quits from the Debian
- project the Debian QA Group
- <email>debian-qa@lists.debian.org</email> takes over the
+ project, "Debian QA Group"
+ <email>packages@qa.debian.org</email> takes over the
maintainership of the package until someone else
volunteers for that task. These packages are called
- <em>orphaned packages</em>.
+ <em>orphaned packages</em>.<footnote>
+ The detailed procedure for doing this gracefully can
+ be found in the Debian Developer's Reference,
+ see <ref id="related">.
+ </footnote>
</p>
</sect1>
-
-
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>The description of a package</heading>
-
+
<p>
Every Debian package must have an extended description
stored in the appropriate field of the control record.</p>
-
- <p>
- The description must be written so that it tells the user
- what they need to know to decide whether to install the
- package. This description should not just be copied from
- the blurb for the program. Instructions for configuring
- or using the package must not be included -- that is what
- installation scripts, manual pages, Info files, etc. are
- for. Copyright statements and other administrivia must
- not be included -- that is what the copyright file is
- for.</p>
- </sect1>
-
-
+
+ <p>
+ The description should be written so that it gives the
+ system administrator enough information to decide whether
+ to install the package. This description should not just
+ be copied verbatim from the program's documentation.
+ Instructions for configuring or using the package should
+ not be included (that is what installation scripts,
+ manual pages, info files, etc., are for). Copyright
+ statements and other administrivia should not be included
+ either (that is what the copyright file is for).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Please refer to <ref id="descriptions"> for more information.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>Dependencies</heading>
-
+
<p>
- Every package has to specify the dependency information
- about other packages, that are required for the first to
+ Every package must specify the dependency information
+ about other packages that are required for the first to
work correctly.</p>
-
+
<p>
- For example, for any shared libraries required by
- dynamically-linked executable binary in a package a
- dependency entry has to be provided.</p>
-
+ For example, a dependency entry must be provided for any
+ shared libraries required by a dynamically-linked executable
+ binary in a package.</p>
+
<p>
- It is not necessary for other packages to declare any
- dependencies they have on other packages which are marked
- <tt>Essential</tt> (see below).</p>
-
+ Packages are not required to declare any dependencies they
+ have on other packages which are marked <tt>Essential</tt>
+ (see below), and should not do so unless they depend on a
+ particular version of that package.</p>
+
<p>
- Sometimes, a package requires another package to be
- installed <em>and</em> configured before it can be
- installed. In this case, you'll have to specify a
- <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> entry for the package.</p>
-
+ Sometimes, a package requires another package to be installed
+ <em>and</em> configured before it can be installed. In this
+ case, you must specify a <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> entry for
+ the package.</p>
+
<p>
- You must not specify a <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> entry for a
+ You should not specify a <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> entry for a
package before this has been discussed on the
<tt>debian-devel</tt> mailing list and a consensus about
doing that has been reached.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1 id="virtual_pkg">
<heading>Virtual packages</heading>
-
- <p>
- Sometimes, there are several packages doing more-or-less
- the same job. In this case, it's useful to define a
- <em>virtual package</em> whose name describes the function
- the packages have. (The virtual packages just exist
- logically, not physically--that's why they are called
- <em>virtual</em>.) The packages with this particular
- function will then <em>provide</em> the virtual
+
+ <p>
+ Sometimes, there are several packages which offer
+ more-or-less the same functionality. In this case, it's
+ useful to define a <em>virtual package</em> whose name
+ describes that common functionality. (The virtual
+ packages only exist logically, not physically; that's why
+ they are called <em>virtual</em>.) The packages with this
+ particular function will then <em>provide</em> the virtual
package. Thus, any other package requiring that function
can simply depend on the virtual package without having to
specify all possible packages individually.</p>
-
+
<p>
- All packages must use virtual package names where
+ All packages should use virtual package names where
appropriate, and arrange to create new ones if necessary.
- They must not use virtual package names (except privately,
+ They should not use virtual package names (except privately,
amongst a cooperating group of packages) unless they have
been agreed upon and appear in the list of virtual package
- names.</p>
-
+ names. (See also <ref id="virtual">)</p>
+
<p>
The latest version of the authoritative list of virtual
- package names can be found on
- <ftpsite>ftp.debian.org</ftpsite> in
- <ftppath>/debian/doc/package-developer/virtual-package-names-list.text</ftppath>
- or your local mirror. In addition, it is included in the
- <tt>debian-policy</tt> package. The procedure for updating
- the list is described at the top of the file.</p></sect1>
-
-
+ package names can be found in the <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ It's also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/virtual-package-names-list.txt"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/virtual-package-names-list.txt"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/virtual-package-names-list.txt"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/virtual-package-names-list.txt"></tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The procedure for updating the list is described in the preface
+ to the list.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
<sect1>
- <heading>Base packages</heading>
-
+ <heading>Base system</heading>
+
<p>
- The packages included in the <tt>base</tt> section have a
- special function. They form a minimum subset of the Debian
+ The <tt>base system</tt> is a minimum subset of the Debian
GNU/Linux system that is installed before everything else
on a new system. Thus, only very few packages are allowed
to go into the <tt>base</tt> section to keep the required
disk usage very small.</p>
-
+
<p>
- Most of these packages should have the priority value
+ Most of these packages will have the priority value
<tt>required</tt> or at least <tt>important</tt>, and many
of them will be tagged <tt>essential</tt> (see below).</p>
-
- <p>
- You must not place any packages into the <tt>base</tt>
- section before this has been discussed on the
- <tt>debian-devel</tt> mailing list and a consensus about
- doing that has been reached.</p></sect1>
-
-
+
+
+ </sect1>
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>Essential packages</heading>
-
+
<p>
Some packages are tagged <tt>essential</tt>. (They have
<tt>Essential: yes</tt> in their package control record.)
This flag is used for packages that are <em>essential</em>
for a system.</p>
-
- <p>
- Since these packages can not easily be removed (you'll
- have to specify an extra <em>force option</em> to
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn>) this flag must only be used where
- absolutely necessary.
-
- A shared library package must not be tagged
- <em>essential</em>--the dependencies will prevent its
- premature removal, and we need to be able to remove it
- when it has been superseded.</p>
-
+
+ <p>
+ Since these packages cannot be easily removed (one has to
+ specify an extra <em>force option</em> to
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to do so), this flag must not be used
+ unless absolutely necessary. A shared library package
+ must not be tagged <tt>essential</tt>; dependencies will
+ prevent its premature removal, and we need to be able to
+ remove it when it has been superseded.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Since dpkg will not prevent upgrading of other packages
+ while an <tt>essential</tt> package is in an unconfigured
+ state, all <tt>essential</tt> packages must supply all of
+ their core functionality even when unconfigured. If the
+ package cannot satisfy this requirement it must not be
+ tagged as essential, and any packages depending on this
+ package must instead have explicit dependency fields as
+ appropriate.
+ </p>
+
<p>
You must not tag any packages <tt>essential</tt> before
this has been discussed on the <tt>debian-devel</tt>
- mailing and a consensus about doing that has been
- reached.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Maintainer scripts</heading>
-
+ mailing list and a consensus about doing that has been
+ reached.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Tasks</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian install process allows the user to choose from
+ a number of common tasks which a Debian system can be used to
+ perform. Selecting a task with <prgn>tasksel</prgn> causes
+ a set of packages that are useful in performing that task to be
+ installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This set of packages is all available packages which have the
+ name of the selected task in the <tt>Task</tt> field of their
+ control file. The format of this field is a list of tasks,
+ separated by commas.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should not tag any packages as belonging to a task
+ before this has been discussed on the
+ <em>debian-devel</em> mailing list and a consensus about
+ doing that has been reached.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For third parties (and historical reasons), tasksel also
+ supports constructing tasks based on <em>task
+ packages</em>. These are packages whose names begin with
+ <em>task-</em>. Task packages should not be included in the
+ Debian archive.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="maintscripts">
+ <heading>Maintainer Scripts</heading>
+
<p>
- The package installation scripts must avoid producing
+ The package installation scripts should avoid producing
output which it is unnecessary for the user to see and
should rely on <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to stave off boredom on
the part of a user installing many packages. This means,
amongst other things, using the <tt>--quiet</tt> option on
<prgn>install-info</prgn>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Packages should try to minimize the amount of prompting
- they need to do, and they should ensure that the user will
- only ever be asked each question once. This means that
- packages should try to use appropriate shared
- configuration files (such as <tt>/etc/papersize</tt> and
- <tt>/etc/news/server</tt>), rather than each prompting for
- their own list of required pieces of information.</p>
-
- <p>
- It also means that an upgrade should not ask the same
- questions again, unless the user has used <tt>dpkg
- --purge</tt> to remove the package's configuration. The
- answers to configuration questions should be stored in an
- appropriate place in <tt>/etc</tt> so that the user can
- modify them, and how this has been done should be
- documented.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a package has a vitally important piece of information
- to pass to the user (such as "don't run me as I am, you
- must edit the following configuration files first or you
- risk your system emitting badly-formatted messages"), it
- should display this in the <prgn>postinst</prgn> script
- and prompt the user to hit return to acknowledge the
- message. Copyright messages do not count as vitally
- important (they belong in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</tt>); neither
- do instructions on how to use a program (these should be
- in on line documentation, where all the users can see
- them).</p>
-
- <p>
- Any necessary prompting should almost always be confined
- to the post-installation script, and should be protected
- with a conditional so that unnecessary prompting doesn't
- happen if a package's installation fails and the
- <prgn>postinst</prgn> is called with
- <tt>abort-upgrade</tt>, <tt>abort-remove</tt> or
- <tt>abort-deconfigure</tt>.</p>
-
+
<p>
Errors which occur during the execution of an installation
- script <em>must</em> be checked and the installation
- <em>must not</em> continue after an error.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note, that <ref id="scripts">, in general applies to
- package maintainer scripts, too.</p>
-
- <p>
- Do not use <prgn>dpkg-divert</prgn> on a file belonging to
- another package without consulting the maintainer of that
- package first.</p>
-
- <p>
- In order for <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> to work
- correctly all the packages which supply an instance of the
- `shared' command name (or, in general, filename) must use
- it. You can use <tt>Conflicts</tt> to force the
- De-installation of other packages supplying it which do not
- (yet) use <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn>. It may in
- this case be appropriate to specify a conflict on earlier
- versions of something--this is an exception to the usual
- rule that this is not allowed.</p>
- </sect1>
- </sect>
- <sect>
- <heading>Source packages</heading>
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Standards conformance</heading>
-
- <p>
- You should specify the most recent version of the
- packaging standards with which your package complies in
- the source package's <tt>Standards-Version</tt> field.</p>
-
- <p>
- This value will be used to file bug reports automatically
- if your package becomes too much out of date.</p>
-
- <p>
- The value corresponds to a version of the Debian manuals,
- as can be found on the title page or page headers and
- footers (depending on the format).</p>
-
+ script must be checked and the installation must not
+ continue after an error.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- The version number has four components--major and minor
- number and major and minor patch level. When the
- standards change in a way that requires every package to
- change the major number will be changed. Significant
- changes that will require work in many packages will be
- signaled by a change to the minor number. The major patch
- level will be changed for any change to the meaning of the
- standards, however small; the minor patch level will be
- changed when only cosmetic, typographical or other edits
- which do not change the meaning are made, or changes which
- do not affect the contents of packages.</p>
+ Note that in general <ref id="scripts"> applies to package
+ maintainer scripts, too.
+ </p>
<p>
- For package maintainers, only the first 3 digits of the
- manual version are significant in representing the
- <em>Standards-Version</em>, and either these 3 digits or
- the complete 4 digits can be specified--that's up to the
- maintainer.
- <footnote>
- <p>
- In the past, people specified 4 digits in the
- Standards-Version field, like `2.3.0.0'. Since any
- `patch-level changes' don't introduce new policy, it
- was thought it would be better to relax policy and
- only require that the first 3 digits are specified. (4
- digits can still be used if someone wants to do so.)
- </p>
- </footnote>
+ You should not use <prgn>dpkg-divert</prgn> on a file
+ belonging to another package without consulting the
+ maintainer of that package first.
</p>
-
+
<p>
- You should regularly, and especially if your package has
- become out of date, check for the newest Policy Manual
- available and update your package, if necessary. When your
- package complies with the new standards you may update the
- <tt>Standards-Version</tt> source package field and
- release it.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Package relationships</heading>
-
- <p>
- Source packages must specify which binary packages they
- require to be installed or not to be installed in order to
- build correctly. For example, if building a package
- requires a certain compiler, then the compiler must be
- specified as a build-time dependency.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- It will not be necessary to explicitly specify build-time
- relationships on a minimal set of packages that are always
- needed to compile, link and put in a Debian package a
- standard "Hello World!" program written in C or C++. The
- required packages are called <em>build-essential</em>, and
- an informational list can be found in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/build-essential/list</tt> (which is
- contained in the <tt>build-essential</tt> package).
-
- </p>
-
- <p>
- When specifying the set of build-time dependencies, one
- should list only those packages explicitly required by the
- build. It is not necessary to list packages which are
- required merely because some other package in the list of
- build-time dependencies depends on them. The reason is
- that dependencies change, and you should list only those
- <em>you</em> need. What others need is their business.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- It is a bug if, after unpacking a source package on a
- system with the build-essential packages installed and
- satisfying the build-time relationships (including the
- implied relationships), one cannot build the package and
- produce a working binary package suitable for installation
- into the binary distribution corresponding to the source
- distribution which contained the source package. This
- means in particular that version clauses should be used
- rigorously in build-time relationships so that one cannot
- produce bad or inconsistently configured packages when the
- relationships are properly satisfied.
- </p>
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Changes to the upstream sources</heading>
-
+ All packages which supply an instance of a common command
+ name (or, in general, filename) should generally use
+ <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn>, so that they may be
+ installed together. If <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn>
+ is not used, then each package must use
+ <tt>Conflicts</tt> to ensure that other packages are
+ de-installed. (In this case, it may be appropriate to
+ specify a conflict against earlier versions of something
+ that previously did not use
+ <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn>; this is an exception to
+ the usual rule that versioned conflicts should be
+ avoided.)
+ </p>
+
+
+ <sect2 id="maintscriptprompt">
+ <heading>Prompting in maintainer scripts</heading>
+ <p>
+ Package maintainer scripts may prompt the user if
+ necessary. Prompting may be accomplished by
+ hand<footnote>
+ From the Jargon file: by hand 2. By extension,
+ writing code which does something in an explicit or
+ low-level way for which a presupplied library
+ (<em>debconf, in this instance</em>) routine ought
+ to have been available.
+ </footnote> (but this is deprecated), or by communicating
+ through a program which conforms to the Debian Configuration
+ management specification, version 2 or higher, such as
+ <prgn>debconf</prgn><footnote>
+ <p>
+ 6% of Debian packages [see <url
+ id="http://auric.debian.org/%7Ejoeyh/debconf-stats/data/"
+ name="Debconf stats">] currently use
+ <package>debconf</package> to prompt the user at
+ install time, and this number is growing daily. The
+ benefits of using debconf are briefly explained at
+ <url
+ id="http://kitenet.net/doc/debconf-doc/introduction.html"
+ name="Debconf introduction">; they include
+ preconfiguration, (mostly) noninteractive
+ installation, elimination of redundant prompting,
+ consistency of user interface, etc.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ With this increasing number of packages using
+ <package>debconf</package>, plus the existance of a
+ nascent second implementation of the Debian
+ configuration management system
+ (<package>cdebconf</package>), and the stabilization
+ of the protocol these things use, the time has
+ finally come to reflect the use of these things in
+ policy.
+ </p>
+ </footnote>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian Configuration management specification is included
+ in the <file>debconf_specification</file> files in the
+ <package>debian-policy</package> package.
+ It is also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/debconf_specification.html"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/debconf_specification.html"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/debconf_specification.txt.gz"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/debconf_specification.txt.gz"></tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages which use the Debian Configuration management
+ specification may contain an additional
+ <prgn>config</prgn> script and a <tt>templates</tt>
+ file in their control archive. The <prgn>config</prgn>
+ script might be run before the <prgn>preinst</prgn>
+ script, and before the package is unpacked or any of its
+ dependencies or pre-dependancies are satisfied.
+ Therefore it must work using only the tools present in
+ <em>essential</em> packages.<footnote>
+ <package>Debconf</package> or another tool that
+ implements the Debian Configuration management
+ specification will also be installed, and any
+ versioned dependencies on it will be satisfied
+ before preconfiguration begins.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages should try to minimize the amount of prompting
+ they need to do, and they should ensure that the user
+ will only ever be asked each question once. This means
+ that packages should try to use appropriate shared
+ configuration files (such as <file>/etc/papersize</file> and
+ <file>/etc/news/server</file>), and shared
+ <package>debconf</package> variables rather than each
+ prompting for their own list of required pieces of
+ information.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It also means that an upgrade should not ask the same
+ questions again, unless the user has used <tt>dpkg
+ --purge</tt> to remove the package's configuration. The
+ answers to configuration questions should be stored in an
+ appropriate place in <file>/etc</file> so that the user can
+ modify them, and how this has been done should be
+ documented.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package has a vitally important piece of
+ information to pass to the user (such as "don't run me
+ as I am, you must edit the following configuration files
+ first or you risk your system emitting badly-formatted
+ messages"), it should display this in the
+ <prgn>config</prgn> or <prgn>postinst</prgn> script and
+ prompt the user to hit return to acknowledge the
+ message. Copyright messages do not count as vitally
+ important (they belong in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</file>);
+ neither do instructions on how to use a program (these
+ should be in on-line documentation, where all the users
+ can see them).</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Any necessary prompting should almost always be confined
+ to the <prgn>config</prgn> or <prgn>postinst</prgn>
+ script. If it is done in the <prgn>postinst</prgn>, it
+ should be protected with a conditional so that
+ unnecessary prompting doesn't happen if a package's
+ installation fails and the <prgn>postinst</prgn> is
+ called with <tt>abort-upgrade</tt>,
+ <tt>abort-remove</tt> or <tt>abort-deconfigure</tt>.</p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Source packages</heading>
+
+ <sect1 id="standardsversion">
+ <heading>Standards conformance</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ In the source package's <tt>Standards-Version</tt> control
+ field, you should specify the most recent version number
+ of this policy document with which your package complied
+ when it was last updated. The current version number is
+ &version;.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This information may be used to file bug reports
+ automatically if your package becomes too much out of
+ date.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The version number has four components: major and minor
+ version number and major and minor patch level. When the
+ standards change in a way that requires every package to
+ change the major number will be changed. Significant
+ changes that will require work in many packages will be
+ signaled by a change to the minor number. The major patch
+ level will be changed for any change to the meaning of the
+ standards, however small; the minor patch level will be
+ changed when only cosmetic, typographical or other edits
+ are made which neither change the meaning of the document
+ nor affect the contents of packages.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Thus only the first three components of the policy version
+ are significant in the <em>Standards-Version</em> control
+ field, and so either these three components or the all
+ four components may be specified.<footnote>
+ In the past, people specified the full version number
+ in the Standards-Version field, for example "2.3.0.0".
+ Since minor patch-level changes don't introduce new
+ policy, it was thought it would be better to relax
+ policy and only require the first 3 components to be
+ specified, in this example "2.3.0". All four
+ components may still be used if someone wishes to do
+ so.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should regularly, and especially if your package has
+ become out of date, check for the newest Policy Manual
+ available and update your package, if necessary. When your
+ package complies with the new standards you should update the
+ <tt>Standards-Version</tt> source package field and
+ release it.<footnote>
+ See the file <file>upgrading-checklist</file> for
+ information about policy which has changed between
+ different versions of this document.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-relations">
+ <heading>Package relationships</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Source packages should specify which binary packages they
+ require to be installed or not to be installed in order to
+ build correctly. For example, if building a package
+ requires a certain compiler, then the compiler should be
+ specified as a build-time dependency.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If changes to the source code are made that are generally
- applicable please try to get them included in the upstream
- version of the package by supplying the upstream authors
- with the changes in whatever form they prefer.</p>
-
+ It is not necessary to explicitly specify build-time
+ relationships on a minimal set of packages that are always
+ needed to compile, link and put in a Debian package a
+ standard "Hello World!" program written in C or C++. The
+ required packages are called <em>build-essential</em>, and
+ an informational list can be found in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/build-essential/list</file> (which is
+ contained in the <tt>build-essential</tt>
+ package).<footnote>
+ Rationale:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ This allows maintaining the list separately
+ from the policy documents (the list does not
+ need the kind of control that the policy
+ documents do).
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ Having a separate package allows one to install
+ the build-essential packages on a machine, as
+ well as allowing other packages such as tasks to
+ require installation of the build-essential
+ packages using the depends relation.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The separate package allows bug reports against
+ the list to be categorized separately from
+ the policy management process in the BTS.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When specifying the set of build-time dependencies, one
+ should list only those packages explicitly required by the
+ build. It is not necessary to list packages which are
+ required merely because some other package in the list of
+ build-time dependencies depends on them.<footnote>
+ The reason for this is that dependencies change, and
+ you should list all those packages, and <em>only</em>
+ those packages that <em>you</em> need directly. What
+ others need is their business. For example, if you
+ only link against <file>libimlib</file>, you will need to
+ build-depend on <package>libimlib2-dev</package> but
+ not against any <tt>libjpeg*</tt> packages, even
+ though <tt>libimlib2-dev</tt> currently depends on
+ them: installation of <package>libimlib2-dev</package>
+ will automatically ensure that all of its run-time
+ dependencies are satisfied.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If build-time dependencies are specified, it must be
+ possible to build the package and produce working binaries
+ on a system with only essential and build-essential
+ packages installed and also those required to satisfy the
+ build-time relationships (including any implied
+ relationships). In particular, this means that version
+ clauses should be used rigorously in build-time
+ relationships so that one cannot produce bad or
+ inconsistently configured packages when the relationships
+ are properly satisfied.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <ref id="relationships"> explains the technical details.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Changes to the upstream sources</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ If changes to the source code are made that are not
+ specific to the needs of the Debian system, they should be
+ sent to the upstream authors in whatever form they prefer
+ so as to be included in the upstream version of the
+ package.</p>
+
<p>
If you need to configure the package differently for
Debian or for Linux, and the upstream source doesn't
- provide a way to configure it the way you need to, please
- add such configuration facilities (for example, a new
- <prgn>autoconf</prgn> test or <tt>#define</tt>) and send
- the patch to the upstream authors, with the default set to
- the way they originally had it. You can then easily
- override the default in your <tt>debian/rules</tt> or
- wherever is appropriate.</p>
-
- <p>
- Please make sure that the <prgn>configure</prgn> utility
+ provide a way to do so, you should add such configuration
+ facilities (for example, a new <prgn>autoconf</prgn> test
+ or <tt>#define</tt>) and send the patch to the upstream
+ authors, with the default set to the way they originally
+ had it. You can then easily override the default in your
+ <file>debian/rules</file> or wherever is appropriate.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should make sure that the <prgn>configure</prgn> utility
detects the correct architecture specification string
(refer to <ref id="arch-spec"> for details).</p>
-
+
<p>
If you need to edit a <prgn>Makefile</prgn> where
GNU-style <prgn>configure</prgn> scripts are used, you
- should edit the <tt>.in</tt> files rather than editing the
+ should edit the <file>.in</file> files rather than editing the
<prgn>Makefile</prgn> directly. This allows the user to
reconfigure the package if necessary. You should
<em>not</em> configure the package and edit the generated
<prgn>Makefile</prgn>! This makes it impossible for
- someone else to later reconfigure the package.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Documenting your changes</heading>
-
- <p>
- Document your changes and updates to the source package
- properly in the <tt>debian/changelog</tt> file.</p>
-
- <p>
- A copy of the file which will be installed in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</tt> should be
- in <tt>debian/copyright</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- In non-experimental packages you may only use a format for
- <tt>debian/changelog</tt> which is supported by the most
- recent released version of <prgn>dpkg</prgn>. If your
- format is not supported and there is general support for
- it you should contact the <prgn>dpkg</prgn> maintainer to
- have the parser script for your format included in the
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn> package. (You will need to agree that
- the parser and its manpage may be distributed under the
- GNU GPL, just as the rest of <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
- is.)</p></sect1>
-
-
+ someone else to later reconfigure the package.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should document your changes and updates to the source
+ package properly in the <file>debian/changelog</file> file.
+ For more information, please see <ref id="changelogs">.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>Error trapping in makefiles</heading>
-
+
<p>
When <prgn>make</prgn> invokes a command in a makefile
- (including your package's upstream makefiles and the
- <tt>debian/rules</tt>) it does so using <tt>sh</tt>. This
- means that <tt>sh</tt>'s usual bad error handling
+ (including your package's upstream makefiles and
+ <file>debian/rules</file>), it does so using <prgn>sh</prgn>. This
+ means that <prgn>sh</prgn>'s usual bad error handling
properties apply: if you include a miniature script as one
of the commands in your makefile you'll find that if you
don't do anything about it then errors are not detected
and <prgn>make</prgn> will blithely continue after
problems.</p>
-
+
<p>
Every time you put more than one shell command (this
includes using a loop) in a makefile command you
- <em>must</em> make sure that errors are trapped. For
+ must make sure that errors are trapped. For
simple compound commands, such as changing directory and
then running a program, using <tt>&&</tt> rather
than semicolon as a command separator is sufficient. For
more complex commands including most loops and
- conditionals you must include a separate <tt>set -e</tt>
+ conditionals you should include a separate <tt>set -e</tt>
command at the start of every makefile command that's
actually one of these miniature shell scripts.</p></sect1>
-
-
+
+
<sect1>
<heading>Obsolete constructs and libraries</heading>
-
+
<p>
- The include file <prgn><varargs.h></prgn> is
+ The include file <tt><varargs.h></tt> is
provided to support end-users compiling very old software;
the library <tt>libtermcap</tt> is provided to support the
execution of software which has been linked against it
(either old programs or those such as Netscape which are
only available in binary form).</p>
-
- <p>
- Debian packages should be ported to include
- <prgn><stdarg.h></prgn> and <tt>ncurses</tt> when
- they are built.</p>
- </sect1>
- </sect></chapt>
-
- <chapt><heading>The Operating System</heading>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>File system hierarchy</heading>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Linux File system Structure</heading>
-
- <p>
- The location of all installed files and directories must
- comply with the Linux File system Hierarchy Standard
- (FHS). The latest version of this document can be found
- alongside this manual or on
- <url id="http://www.pathname.com/fhs/">.<footnote>
- <p>The Debian distribution currently distributes a draft
- version of FHS 2.1 because several significant details
- have changed between the currently released 2.0
- version and the to-be-released 2.1 version.</p>
- </footnote>
- Specific questions about following the standard may be
- asked on <prgn>debian-devel</prgn>, or referred to Daniel
- Quinlan, the FHS coordinator, at
- <email>quinlan@pathname.com</email>.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Site-specific programs</heading>
-
- <p>
- As mandated by the FHS no package should place any
- files in <tt>/usr/local</tt>, either by putting them in
- the file system archive to be unpacked by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
- or by manipulating them in their maintainer scripts.</p>
-
- <p>
- However, the package should create empty directories below
- <tt>/usr/local</tt> so that the system administrator knows
- where to place site-specific files. These directories
- should be removed on package removal if they are
- empty.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note, that this applies only to directories <em>below</em>
- <tt>/usr/local</tt>, not <em>in</em>
- <tt>/usr/local</tt>. The directory <tt>/usr/local</tt>
- itself may only contain the sub-directories listed in
- FHS, section 4.6. However, you may create directories
- below them as you wish. You may not remove any of the
- directories listed in 4.6, even if you created them.</p>
-
- <p>
- Since <tt>/usr/local</tt> may be mounted read-only from a
- remote server, these directories have to be created and
- removed by the <tt>postinst</tt> and <tt>prerm</tt>
- maintainer scripts. These scripts must not fail if either
- of these operations fail. (In the future, it will be
- possible to tell <prgn>dpkg</prgn> not to unpack files
- matching certain patterns, so that the directories can be
- included in the <tt>.deb</tt> packages and system
- administrators who do not wish these directories in
- /usr/local do not need to have them.)</p>
-
- <p>
- For example, the <prgn>emacs</prgn> package will contain
- <example>
- mkdir -p /usr/local/lib/emacs/site-lisp || true
- </example>
- in the <tt>postinst</tt> script, and
- <example>
- rmdir /usr/local/lib/emacs/site-lisp && \
- rmdir /usr/local/lib/emacs || \
- true
- </example>
- in the <tt>prerm</tt> script.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you do create a directory in <tt>/usr/local</tt> for
- local additions to a package, you must ensure that
- settings in <tt>/usr/local</tt> take precedence over the
- equivalents in <tt>/usr</tt>.</p>
<p>
- However, because '/usr/local' and its contents are for
- exclusive use of the local administrator, a package must
- not rely on the presence or absence of files or
- directories in '/usr/local' for normal operation.</p>
-
- <p>
- The <tt>/usr/local</tt> directory itself and all the
- subdirectories created by the package should have
- permissions 2775 (group-writable and set-group-id) and be
- owned by <tt>root.staff</tt>.</p>
+ Debian packages should be patched to use
+ <tt><stdarg.h></tt> and <tt>ncurses</tt>
+ instead.
+ </p>
</sect1>
</sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Users and groups</heading>
-
- <p>
- The Debian system can be configured to use either plain or
- shadow passwords.</p>
-
- <p>
- Some user ids (UIDs) and group ids (GIDs) are reserved
- globally for use by certain packages. Because some packages
- need to include files which are owned by these users or
- groups, or need the ids compiled into binaries, these ids
- must be used on any Debian system only for the purpose for
- which they are allocated. This is a serious restriction, and
- we should avoid getting in the way of local administration
- policies. In particular, many sites allocate users and/or
- local system groups starting at 100.</p>
-
- <p>
- Apart from this we should have dynamically allocated ids,
- which should by default be arranged in some sensible
- order--but the behavior should be configurable.</p>
-
- <p>
- No package except <tt>base-passwd</tt> may modify
- <tt>/etc/passwd</tt>, <tt>/etc/shadow</tt>, or
- <tt>/etc/group</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- The UID and GID ranges are as follows:
- <taglist>
- <tag>0-99:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- Globally allocated by the Debian project, must be the
- same on every Debian system. These ids will appear in
- the <tt>passwd</tt> and <tt>group</tt> files of all
- Debian systems, new ids in this range being added
- automatically as the <tt>base-passwd</tt> package is
- updated.</p>
-
- <p>
- Packages which need a single statically allocated uid
- or gid should use one of these; their maintainers
- should ask the <tt>base-passwd</tt> maintainer for
- ids.</p>
- </item>
-
- <tag>100-999:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- Dynamically allocated system users and groups.
- Packages which need a user or group, but can have this
- user or group allocated dynamically and differently on
- each system, should use `<tt>adduser --system</tt>' to
- create the group and/or user. <prgn>adduser</prgn>
- will check for the existence of the user or group, and
- if necessary choose an unused id based on the ranged
- specified in <tt>adduser.conf</tt>.</p></item>
-
-
- <tag>1000-29999:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- Dynamically allocated user accounts. By default
- <prgn>adduser</prgn> will choose UIDs and GIDs for
- user accounts in this range, though
- <tt>adduser.conf</tt> may be used to modify this
- behavior.</p>
- </item>
-
- <tag>30000-59999:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>Reserved.</p></item>
-
-
- <tag>60000-64999:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- Globally allocated by the Debian project, but only
- created on demand. The ids are allocated centrally and
- statically, but the actual accounts are only created
- on users' systems on demand.</p>
-
- <p>
- These ids are for packages which are obscure or which
- require many statically-allocated ids. These packages
- should check for and create the accounts in
- <tt>/etc/passwd</tt> or <tt>/etc/group</tt> (using
- <prgn>adduser</prgn> if it has this facility) if
- necessary. Packages which are likely to require
- further allocations should have a `hole' left after
- them in the allocation, to give them room to
- grow.</p></item>
-
-
- <tag>65000-65533:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>Reserved.</p></item>
-
-
- <tag>65534:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>User `<tt>nobody</tt>.'</p></item>
-
-
- <tag>65535:</tag>
- <item>
- <p>
- <tt>(uid_t)(-1) == (gid_t)(-1)</tt>. NOT TO BE USED,
- because it is the error return sentinel value.</p>
- </item>
- </taglist>
- </p>
- </sect>
- <sect id="sysvinit">
- <heading>System run levels</heading>
-
-
- <sect1 id="/etc/init.d">
- <heading>Introduction</heading>
-
- <p>
- The <tt>/etc/init.d</tt> directory contains the scripts
- executed by <prgn>init</prgn> at boot time and when init
- state (or `runlevel') is changed (see <manref name="init"
- section="8">).</p>
+ </chapt>
- <p>
- There are at least two different, yet functionally
- equivalent, ways of handling these scripts. For the sake
- of simplicity, this document describes only the symbolic
- link method. However, it may not be assumed that this
- method is being used, and any manipulation of the various
- runlevel behaviours must be performed using
- <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> as described below and not by
- manually installing symlinks. For information on the
- implementation details of the other method, implemented in
- the <tt>file-rc</tt> package, please refer to the
- documentation of that package.</p>
+ <chapt id="controlfields"><heading>Control files and their fields</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Many of the tools in the package management suite manipulate
+ data represented in a common format, known as <em>control
+ data</em>. The data is often stored in <em>control
+ files</em>. Binary and source packages have control files,
+ and the <file>.changes</file> files which control the installation
+ of uploaded files are also in control file format.
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s internal databases are in a similar
+ format.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect id="controlsyntax"><heading>Syntax of control files</heading>
- <p>
- These scripts are referenced by symbolic links in
- the <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> directories. When
- changing runlevels, <prgn>init</prgn> looks in the
- directory <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> for the scripts
- it should execute, where <var>n</var> is the runlevel that
- is being changed to, or `S' for the boot-up scripts.</p>
-
- <p>
- The names of the links all have the form
- <tt>S<var>mm</var><var>script</var></tt> or
- <tt>K<var>mm</var><var>script</var></tt> where
- <var>mm</var> is a two-digit number and <var>script</var>
- is the name of the script (this should be the same as the
- name of the actual script in <tt>/etc/init.d</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- When <prgn>init</prgn> changes runlevel first the targets
- of the links whose names starting with a <tt>K</tt> are
- executed, each with the single argument <tt>stop</tt>,
- followed by the scripts prefixed with an <tt>S</tt>, each
- with the single argument <tt>start</tt>. The <tt>K</tt>
- links are responsible for killing services and the
- <tt>S</tt> link for starting services upon entering the
- runlevel.</p>
-
- <p>
- For example, if we are changing from runlevel 2 to
- runlevel 3, init will first execute all of the <tt>K</tt>
- prefixed scripts it finds in <tt>/etc/rc3.d</tt>, and then
- all of the <tt>S</tt> prefixed scripts. The links
- starting with <tt>K</tt> will cause the referred-to file
- to be executed with an argument of <tt>stop</tt>, and the
- <tt>S</tt> links with an argument of <tt>start</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- The two-digit number <var>mm</var> is used to decide which
- order to start and stop things in--low-numbered links have
- their scripts run first. For example, the <tt>K20</tt>
- scripts will be executed before the <tt>K30</tt> scripts.
- This is used when a certain service must be started before
- another. For example, the name server <prgn>bind</prgn>
- might need to be started before the news server
- <prgn>inn</prgn> so that <prgn>inn</prgn> can set up its
- access lists. In this case, the script that starts
- <prgn>bind</prgn> should have a lower number than the
- script that starts <prgn>inn</prgn> so that it runs first:
- <example>
- /etc/rc2.d/S17bind
- /etc/rc2.d/S70inn
- </example>
- </p>
- </sect1>
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Writing the scripts</heading>
-
- <p>
- Packages can and should place scripts in
- <tt>/etc/init.d</tt> to start or stop services at boot
- time or during a change of runlevel. These scripts should
- be named <tt>/etc/init.d/<var>package</var></tt>, and they
- should accept one argument, saying what to do:
-
- <taglist>
- <tag><tt>start</tt></tag>
- <item><p>start the service,</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>stop</tt></tag>
- <item><p>stop the service,</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>restart</tt></tag>
- <item><p>stop and restart the service,</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>reload</tt></tag>
- <item><p>cause the configuration of the service to be
- reloaded without actually stopping and restarting
- the service,</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>force-reload</tt></tag> <item><p>cause the
- configuration to be reloaded if the service supports
- this, otherwise restart the service.</p></item>
- </taglist>
-
- The <tt>start</tt>, <tt>stop</tt>, <tt>restart</tt>, and
- <tt>force-reload</tt> options must be supported by all
- scripts in <tt>/etc/init.d</tt>, the <tt>reload</tt>
- option is optional.</p>
-
- <p>
- The <tt>init.d</tt> scripts should ensure that they will
- behave sensibly if invoked with <tt>start</tt> when the
- service is already running, or with <tt>stop</tt> when it
- isn't, and that they don't kill unfortunately-named user
- processes. The best way to achieve this is usually to use
- <prgn>start-stop-daemon</prgn>.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a service reloads its configuration automatically (as
- in the case of <prgn>cron</prgn>, for example), the
- <tt>reload</tt> option of the <tt>init.d</tt> script
- should behave as if the configuration has been reloaded
- successfully.</p>
-
- <p>
- These scripts should not fail obscurely when the
- configuration files remain but the package has been
- removed, as configuration files remain on the system after
- the package has been removed. Only when <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
- is executed with the <tt>--purge</tt> option will
- configuration files be removed. In particular, the init
- script itself is usually a configuration file (see
- <ref id="init.d notes">), and will remain on the system if
- the package is removed but not purged. Therefore, you
- should include a <tt>test</tt> statement at the top of the
- script, like this:
- <example>
- test -f <var>program-executed-later-in-script</var> || exit 0
- </example></p>
- </sect1>
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Managing the links</heading>
-
- <p>
- A program is provided, <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>, to handle
- the it easier for package maintainers to arrange for the
- proper creation and removal of
- <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> symbolic links, or their
- functional equivalent if another method is being used.
- This may be used by maintainers in their packages'
- <tt>postinst</tt> and <tt>postrm</tt> scripts.</p>
-
- <p>
- You should use this script to make changes to
- <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> and <em>never</em> either
- include any <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> symbolic links
- in the actual archive or manually create or remove the
- symbolic links in maintainer scripts. (The latter will
- fail if an alternative method of maintaining runlevel
- information is being used.)</p>
-
- <p>
- By default <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> will start services in
- each of the multi-user state runlevels (2, 3, 4, and 5)
- and stop them in the halt runlevel (0), the single-user
- runlevel (1) and the reboot runlevel (6). The system
- administrator will have the opportunity to customize
- runlevels by either running <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>, by
- simply adding, moving, or removing the symbolic links in
- <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</tt> if symbolic links are being
- used, or by modifying <tt>/etc/runlevel.conf</tt> if the
- <tt>file-rc</tt> method is being used.</p>
-
- <p>
- To get the default behavior for your package, put in your
- <tt>postinst</tt> script
- <example>
- update-rc.d <var>package</var> defaults >/dev/null
- </example>
- and in your <tt>postrm</tt>
- <example>
- if [ purge = "$1" ]; then
- update-rc.d <var>package</var> remove >/dev/null
- fi
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- This will use a default sequence number of 20. If it does
- not matter when or in which order the script is run, use
- this default. If it does, then you should talk to the
- maintainer of the <prgn>sysvinit</prgn> package or post to
- <tt>debian-devel</tt>, and they will help you choose a
- number.</p>
-
- <p>
- For more information about using <tt>update-rc.d</tt>,
- please consult its manpage <manref name="update-rc.d"
- section="8">.</p></sect1>
-
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Boot-time initialization</heading>
-
- <p>
- There used to be another directory, <tt>/etc/rc.boot</tt>,
- which contained scripts which were run once per machine
- boot. This has been deprecated in favour of links from
- <tt>/etc/rcS.d</tt> to files in <tt>/etc/init.d</tt> as
- described in <ref id="/etc/init.d">. No packages may
- place files in <tt>/etc/rc.boot</tt>.</p>
-
- <sect1 id="init.d notes">
- <heading>Notes</heading>
-
- <p>
- <em>Do not</em> include the
- <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d/*</tt> symbolic links in the
- <tt>.deb</tt> file system archive! <em>This will cause
- problems!</em> You should create them with
- <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>, as above.</p>
-
- <p>
- <em>Do not</em> include the
- <tt>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d/*</tt> symbolic links in
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s conffiles list! <em>This will cause
- problems!</em> <em>Do</em>, however, treat the
- <tt>/etc/init.d</tt> scripts as configuration files,
- either by marking them as conffiles or managing them
- correctly in the maintainer scripts (see
- <ref id="config files">). (This is important since we want
- to give the local system administrator the chance to adapt
- the scripts to the local system--e.g., to disable a
- service without de-installing the package, or to specify
- some special command line options when starting a
- service--while making sure her changes aren't lost during
- the next package upgrade.)</p>
- </sect1>
-
- <sect1>
- <heading>Example</heading>
-
- <p>
- The <prgn>bind</prgn> DNS (nameserver) package wants to
- make sure that the nameserver is running in multiuser
- runlevels, and is properly shut down with the system. It
- puts a script in <tt>/etc/init.d</tt>, naming the script
- appropriately <tt>bind</tt>. As you can see, the script
- interprets the argument <tt>reload</tt> to send the
- nameserver a <tt>HUP</tt> signal (causing it to reload its
- configuration); this way the user can say
- <tt>/etc/init.d/bind reload</tt> to reload the name
- server.</p>
-
- <p>
- <example>
- #!/bin/sh
- #
- # Original version by Robert Leslie
- # <rob@mars.org>, edited by iwj and cs
-
- test -x /usr/sbin/named || exit 0
-
- case "$1" in
- start)
- echo -n "Starting domain name service: named"
- start-stop-daemon --start --quiet --exec /usr/sbin/named
- echo "."
- ;;
- stop)
- echo -n "Stopping domain name service: named"
- start-stop-daemon --stop --quiet \
- --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
- echo "."
- ;;
- restart)
- echo -n "Restarting domain name service: named"
- start-stop-daemon --stop --quiet \
- --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
- start-stop-daemon --start --verbose --exec /usr/sbin/named
- echo "."
- ;;
- force-reload|reload)
- echo -n "Reloading configuration of domain name service: named"
- start-stop-daemon --stop --signal 1 --quiet \
- --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
- echo "."
- ;;
- *)
- echo "Usage: /etc/init.d/bind {start|stop|restart|reload|force-reload}" >&2
- exit 1
- ;;
- esac
-
- exit 0
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- Another example on which to base your <tt>/etc/init.d</tt>
- scripts is in <tt>/etc/init.d/skeleton</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- If this package is happy with the default setup from
- <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>, namely an ordering number of 20
- and having named running in all runlevels, it can say in
- its <tt>postinst</tt>:
- <example>
- update-rc.d bind defaults >/dev/null
- </example>
- And in its <tt>postrm</tt>, to remove the links when the
- package is purged:
- <example>
- if [ purge = "$1" ]; then
- update-rc.d acct remove >/dev/null
- fi
- </example></p>
- </sect1></sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Cron jobs</heading>
-
<p>
- Packages may not modify the configuration file
- <tt>/etc/crontab</tt>, nor may they modify the files in
- <tt>/var/spool/cron/crontabs</tt>.</p>
-
+ A control file consists of one or more paragraphs of fields.
+ The paragraphs are separated by blank lines. Some control
+ files allow only one paragraph; others allow several, in
+ which case each paragraph usually refers to a different
+ package. (For example, in source packages, the first
+ paragraph refers to the source package, and later paragraphs
+ refer to binary packages generated from the source.)
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If a package wants to install a job that has to be executed
- via cron, it should place a file with the name if the
- package in one of the following directories:
- <example>
- /etc/cron.daily
- /etc/cron.weekly
- /etc/cron.monthly
+ Each paragraph consists of a series of data fields; each
+ field consists of the field name, followed by a colon and
+ then the data/value associated with that field. It ends at
+ the end of the line. Horizontal whitespace (spaces and
+ tabs) may occur immediately before or after the value and is
+ ignored there; it is conventional to put a single space
+ after the colon. For example, a field might be:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Package: libc6
</example>
- As these directory names imply, the files within them are
- executed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis,
- respectively. The exact times are listed in
- <tt>/etc/crontab</tt>.</p>
+ the field name is <tt>Package</tt> and the field value
+ <tt>libc6</tt>.
+ </p>
<p>
- All files installed in any of these directories have to be
- scripts (shell scripts, Perl scripts, etc.) so that they can
- easily be modified by the local system administrator. In
- addition, they must be treated as configuration files.</p>
+ Some fields' values may span several lines; in this case
+ each continuation line <em>must</em> start with a space or
+ tab. Any trailing spaces or tabs at the end of individual
+ lines of a field value are ignored.
+ </p>
<p>
- If a certain job has to be executed more frequently than
- daily, the package should install a file
- <tt>/etc/cron.d/<var>package-name</var></tt>. This file uses
- the same syntax as <tt>/etc/crontab</tt> and is processed by
- <prgn>cron</prgn> automatically. The file must also be
- treated as a configuration file. (Note, that entries in the
- <tt>/etc/cron.d</tt> directory are not handled by
- <prgn>anacron</prgn>. Thus, you should only use this
- directory for jobs which may be skipped if the system is not
- running.)</p>
+ Except where otherwise stated only a single line of data is
+ allowed and whitespace is not significant in a field body.
+ Whitespace must not appear inside names (of packages,
+ architectures, files or anything else) or version numbers,
+ or between the characters of multi-character version
+ relationships.
+ </p>
<p>
- The scripts or crontab entries in these directories should
- check if all necessary programs are installed before they
- try to execute them. Otherwise, problems will arise when a
- package was removed but not purged since configuration files
- are kept on the system in this situation.</p>
- </sect>
+ Field names are not case-sensitive, but it is usual to
+ capitalize the field names using mixed case as shown below.
+ </p>
- <sect>
- <heading>Console messages</heading>
-
- <p>
- This section describes different formats for messages
- written to standard output by the <tt>/etc/init.d</tt>
- scripts. The intent is to improve the consistency of
- Debian's startup and shutdown look and feel.</p>
-
<p>
- Please look very careful at the details. We want to get the
- messages to look exactly the same way concerning spaces,
- punctuation, and case of letters.</p>
-
+ Blank lines, or lines consisting only of spaces and tabs,
+ are not allowed within field values or between fields - that
+ would mean a new paragraph.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect><heading>List of fields</heading>
<p>
- Here is a list of overall rules that you should use when you
- create output messages. They can be useful if you have a
- non-standard message that isn't covered in the sections
- below.</p>
-
+ This list here is not supposed to be exhaustive. Most fields
+ are dealt with elsewhere in this document.
+ </p>
+ <sect1 id="f-Package"><heading><tt>Package</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The name of the binary package. Package names consist of
+ lower case letters (<tt>a-z</tt>), digits (<tt>0-9</tt>),
+ plus (<tt>+</tt>) and minus (<tt>-</tt>) signs, and
+ periods (<tt>.</tt>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ They must be at least two characters long and must start
+ with an alphanumeric character. The use of lowercase
+ package names is required unless the package you're
+ building (or referring to, in other fields) is already
+ using uppercase characters.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="f-Version"><heading><tt>Version</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This lists the source or binary package's version number -
+ see <ref id="versions">.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1
+ id="f-Standards-Version"><heading><tt>Standards-Version</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The most recent version of the standards (the policy
+ manual and associated texts) with which the package
+ complies. This is updated manually when editing the
+ source package to conform to newer standards; it can
+ sometimes be used to tell when a package needs attention.
+ Its format is described above; see
+ <ref id="standardsversion">.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1 id="f-Distribution"><heading><tt>Distribution</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file or parsed changelog output
+ this contains the (space-separated) name(s) of the
+ distribution(s) where this version of the package should
+ be installed. Valid distributions are determined by the
+ archive maintainers.<footnote>
+ Current distribution names are:
+ <taglist compact="compact">
+ <tag><em>stable</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ This is the current "released" version of Debian
+ GNU/Linux. Once the distribution is
+ <em>stable</em> only security fixes and other
+ major bug fixes are allowed. When changes are
+ made to this distribution, the release number is
+ increased (for example: 2.2r1 becomes 2.2r2 then
+ 2.2r3, etc).
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>unstable</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ This distribution value refers to the
+ <em>developmental</em> part of the Debian
+ distribution tree. New packages, new upstream
+ versions of packages and bug fixes go into the
+ <em>unstable</em> directory tree. Download from
+ this distribution at your own risk.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>testing</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ This distribution value refers to the
+ <em>testing</em> part of the Debian distribution
+ tree. It receives its packages from the
+ unstable distribution after a short time lag to
+ ensure that there are no major issues with the
+ unstable packages. It is less prone to breakage
+ than unstable, but still risky. It is not
+ possible to upload packages directly to
+ <em>testing</em>.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>frozen</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ From time to time, the <em>testing</em>
+ distribution enters a state of "code-freeze" in
+ anticipation of release as a <em>stable</em>
+ version. During this period of testing only
+ fixes for existing or newly-discovered bugs will
+ be allowed. The exact details of this stage are
+ determined by the Release Manager.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>experimental</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ The packages with this distribution value are
+ deemed by their maintainers to be high
+ risk. Oftentimes they represent early beta or
+ developmental packages from various sources that
+ the maintainers want people to try, but are not
+ ready to be a part of the other parts of the
+ Debian distribution tree. Download at your own
+ risk.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ You should list <em>all</em> distributions that the
+ package should be installed into.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="versions"><heading>Version numbering</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Every package has a version number recorded in its
+ <tt>Version</tt> control file field.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The package management system imposes an ordering on version
+ numbers, so that it can tell whether packages are being up- or
+ downgraded and so that package system front end applications
+ can tell whether a package it finds available is newer than
+ the one installed on the system. The version number format
+ has the most significant parts (as far as comparison is
+ concerned) at the beginning.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The version number format is:
+ [<var>epoch</var><tt>:</tt>]<var>upstream_version</var>[<tt>-</tt><var>debian_revision</var>]
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The three components here are:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><var>epoch</var></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This is a single (generally small) unsigned integer. It
+ may be omitted, in which case zero is assumed. If it is
+ omitted then the <var>upstream_version</var> may not
+ contain any colons.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is provided to allow mistakes in the version numbers
+ of older versions of a package, and also a package's
+ previous version numbering schemes, to be left behind.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><var>upstream_version</var></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This is the main part of the version number. It is
+ usually the version number of the original ("upstream")
+ package from which the <file>.deb</file> file has been made,
+ if this is applicable. Usually this will be in the same
+ format as that specified by the upstream author(s);
+ however, it may need to be reformatted to fit into the
+ package management system's format and comparison
+ scheme.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The comparison behavior of the package management system
+ with respect to the <var>upstream_version</var> is
+ described below. The <var>upstream_version</var>
+ portion of the version number is mandatory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <var>upstream_version</var> may contain only
+ alphanumerics<footnote>
+ Alphanumerics are <tt>A-Za-z0-9</tt> only.
+ </footnote>
+ and the characters <tt>.</tt> <tt>+</tt> <tt>-</tt>
+ <tt>:</tt> (full stop, plus, hyphen, colon) and should
+ start with a digit. If there is no
+ <var>debian_revision</var> then hyphens are not allowed;
+ if there is no <var>epoch</var> then colons are not
+ allowed.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><var>debian_revision</var></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This part of the version number specifies the version of
+ the Debian package based on the upstream version. It
+ may contain only alphanumerics and the characters
+ <tt>+</tt> and <tt>.</tt> (plus and full stop) and is
+ compared in the same way as the
+ <var>upstream_version</var> is.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is optional; if it isn't present then the
+ <var>upstream_version</var> may not contain a hyphen.
+ This format represents the case where a piece of
+ software was written specifically to be turned into a
+ Debian package, and so there is only one "debianization"
+ of it and therefore no revision indication is required.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is conventional to restart the
+ <var>debian_revision</var> at <tt>1</tt> each time the
+ <var>upstream_version</var> is increased.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The package management system will break the version
+ number apart at the last hyphen in the string (if there
+ is one) to determine the <var>upstream_version</var> and
+ <var>debian_revision</var>. The absence of a
+ <var>debian_revision</var> compares earlier than the
+ presence of one (but note that the
+ <var>debian_revision</var> is the least significant part
+ of the version number).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <var>upstream_version</var> and <var>debian_revision</var>
+ parts are compared by the package management system using the
+ same algorithm:
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The strings are compared from left to right.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ First the initial part of each string consisting entirely of
+ non-digit characters is determined. These two parts (one of
+ which may be empty) are compared lexically. If a difference
+ is found it is returned. The lexical comparison is a
+ comparison of ASCII values modified so that all the letters
+ sort earlier than all the non-letters.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Then the initial part of the remainder of each string which
+ consists entirely of digit characters is determined. The
+ numerical values of these two parts are compared, and any
+ difference found is returned as the result of the comparison.
+ For these purposes an empty string (which can only occur at
+ the end of one or both version strings being compared) counts
+ as zero.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These two steps (comparing and removing initial non-digit
+ strings and initial digit strings) are repeated until a
+ difference is found or both strings are exhausted.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that the purpose of epochs is to allow us to leave behind
+ mistakes in version numbering, and to cope with situations
+ where the version numbering scheme changes. It is
+ <em>not</em> intended to cope with version numbers containing
+ strings of letters which the package management system cannot
+ interpret (such as <tt>ALPHA</tt> or <tt>pre-</tt>), or with
+ silly orderings (the author of this manual has heard of a
+ package whose versions went <tt>1.1</tt>, <tt>1.2</tt>,
+ <tt>1.3</tt>, <tt>1</tt>, <tt>2.1</tt>, <tt>2.2</tt>,
+ <tt>2</tt> and so forth).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If an upstream package has problematic version numbers they
+ should be converted to a sane form for use in the
+ <tt>Version</tt> field.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Version numbers based on dates</heading>
<p>
- <list>
+ In general, Debian packages should use the same version
+ numbers as the upstream sources.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ However, in some cases where the upstream version number is
+ based on a date (e.g., a development "snapshot" release) the
+ package management system cannot handle these version
+ numbers without epochs. For example, dpkg will consider
+ "96May01" to be greater than "96Dec24".</p>
+
+ <p>
+ To prevent having to use epochs for every new upstream
+ version, the version number should be changed to the
+ following format in such cases: "19960501", "19961224". It
+ is up to the maintainer whether he/she wants to bother the
+ upstream maintainer to change the version numbers upstream,
+ too.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that other version formats based on dates which are
+ parsed correctly by the package management system should
+ <em>not</em> be changed.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Native Debian packages (i.e., packages which have been
+ written especially for Debian) whose version numbers include
+ dates should always use the "YYYYMMDD" format.</p>
+ </sect>
+ </chapt>
+
+ <chapt id="miscellaneous"><heading>Packaging Considerations</heading>
+
+ <sect id="timestamps"><heading>Time Stamps</heading>
+ <p>
+ Maintainers should preserve the modification times of the
+ upstream source files in a package, as far as is reasonably
+ possible.<footnote>
+ The rationale is that there is some information conveyed
+ by knowing the age of the file, for example, you could
+ recognize that some documentation is very old by looking
+ at the modification time, so it would be nice if the
+ modification time of the upstream source would be
+ preserved.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="debianrules"><heading><file>debian/rules</file> - the
+ main building script</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file must be an executable makefile, and contains the
+ package-specific recipes for compiling the package and
+ building binary package(s) from the source.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It must start with the line <tt>#!/usr/bin/make -f</tt>,
+ so that it can be invoked by saying its name rather than
+ invoking <prgn>make</prgn> explicitly.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Since an interactive <file>debian/rules</file> script makes it
+ impossible to auto-compile that package and also makes it
+ hard for other people to reproduce the same binary
+ package, all <em>required targets</em> MUST be
+ non-interactive. At a minimum, required targets are the
+ ones called by <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn>, namely,
+ <em>clean</em>, <em>binary</em>, <em>binary-arch</em>,
+ <em>binary-indep</em>, and <em>build</em>. It also follows
+ that any target that these targets depend on must also be
+ non-interactive.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The required and optional targets are as follows:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>build</tt>, <tt>build-arch</tt> (optional),
+ <tt>build-indep</tt> (optional)</tag>
<item>
<p>
- Every message should cover one line, start with a
- capital letter and end with a period `.'.</p></item>
-
-
- <item>
+ The <tt>build</tt> target should perform all
+ non-interactive configuration and compilation of the
+ package. If a package has an interactive pre-build
+ configuration routine, the Debianized source package
+ must either be built after this has taken place (so
+ that the binary package can be built without rerunning
+ the configuration) or the configuration routine
+ modified to become non-interactive. (The latter is
+ preferable if there are architecture-specific features
+ detected by the configuration routine.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For some packages, notably ones where the same
+ source tree is compiled in different ways to produce
+ two binary packages, the <tt>build</tt> target
+ does not make much sense. For these packages it is
+ good enough to provide two (or more) targets
+ (<tt>build-a</tt> and <tt>build-b</tt> or whatever)
+ for each of the ways of building the package, and a
+ <tt>build</tt> target that does nothing. The
+ <tt>binary</tt> target will have to build the
+ package in each of the possible ways and make the
+ binary package out of each.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If you want to express that the computer is working on
- something (performing a specific task, not starting or
- stopping a program), we use an ``ellipsis'', namely
- three dots `...'. Note that we don't insert spaces in
- front of or behind the dots. If the task has been
- completed we write `done.' and a line feed.</p></item>
-
-
+ The <tt>build</tt> target must not do anything
+ that might require root privilege.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>build</tt> target may need to run the
+ <tt>clean</tt> target first - see below.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a package has a configuration and build routine
+ which takes a long time, or when the makefiles are
+ poorly designed, or when <tt>build</tt> needs to
+ run <tt>clean</tt> first, it is a good idea to
+ <tt>touch build</tt> when the build process is
+ complete. This will ensure that if <tt>debian/rules
+ build</tt> is run again it will not rebuild the whole
+ program.<footnote>
+ Another common way to do this is for <tt>build</tt>
+ to depend on <prgn>build-stamp</prgn> and to do
+ nothing else, and for the <prgn>build-stamp</prgn>
+ target to do the building and to <tt>touch
+ build-stamp</tt> on completion. This is
+ especially useful if the build routine creates a
+ file or directory called <tt>build</tt>; in such a
+ case, <tt>build</tt> will need to be listed as
+ a phony target (i.e., as a dependency of the
+ <tt>.PHONY</tt> target). See the documentation of
+ <prgn>make</prgn> for more information on phony
+ targets.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>binary</tt>, <tt>binary-arch</tt>,
+ <tt>binary-indep</tt>
+ </tag>
<item>
<p>
- Design your messages as if the computer is telling you
- what he is doing (let him be polite :-) but don't
- mention ``him'' directly. For example, if you think
- of saying
- <example>
- I'm starting network daemons: nfsd mountd.
- </example>
- just say
- <example>
- Starting network daemons: nfsd mountd.
- </example></p></item>
- </list></p>
-
- <p>
- The following formats must be used</p>
-
- <p>
- <list>
+ The <tt>binary</tt> target must be all that is
+ necessary for the user to build the binary package(s)
+ produced from this source package. All of these
+ targets are required to be non-interactive. It is
+ split into two parts: <prgn>binary-arch</prgn> builds
+ the binary packages which are specific to a particular
+ architecture, and <tt>binary-indep</tt> builds
+ those which are not.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <tt>binary</tt> may be (and commonly is) a target with
+ no commands which simply depends on
+ <tt>binary-arch</tt> and <tt>binary-indep</tt>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Both <tt>binary-*</tt> targets should depend on the
+ <tt>build</tt> target, or on the appropriate
+ <tt>build-arch</tt> or <tt>build-indep</tt> target, if
+ provided, so that the package is built if it has not
+ been already. It should then create the relevant
+ binary package(s), using <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> to
+ make their control files and <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> to
+ build them and place them in the parent of the top
+ level directory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Both the <tt>binary-arch</tt> and
+ <tt>binary-indep</tt> targets <em>must</em> exist.
+ If one of them has nothing to do (which will always be
+ the case if the source generates only a single binary
+ package, whether architecture-dependent or not), it
+ must still exist and must always succeed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>binary</tt> targets must be invoked as
+ root.<footnote>
+ The <prgn>fakeroot</prgn> package often allows one
+ to build a package correctly even without being
+ root.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>clean</tt></tag>
<item>
- <p>when daemons get started.</p>
-
<p>
- Use this format if your script starts one or more
- daemons. The output should look like this (a single
- line, no leading spaces):
- <example>
- Starting <description>: <daemon-1> <daemon-2> <...> <daemon-n>.
- </example>
- The <description> should describe the subsystem
- the daemon or set of daemons are part of, while
- <daemon-1> up to <daemon-n> denote each
- daemon's name (typically the file name of the
- program).</p>
-
- <p>
- For example, the output of /etc/init.d/lpd would look like:
- <example>
- Starting printer spooler: lpd.
- </example></p>
-
+ This must undo any effects that the <tt>build</tt>
+ and <tt>binary</tt> targets may have had, except
+ that it should leave alone any output files created in
+ the parent directory by a run of a <tt>binary</tt>
+ target. This target must be non-interactive.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- This can be achieved by saying
- <example>
- echo -n "Starting printer spooler: lpd"
- start-stop-daemon --start --quiet lpd
- echo "."
- </example>
- in the script. If you have more than one daemon to
- start, you should do the following:
- <example>
- echo -n "Starting remote file system services:"
- echo -n " nfsd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet nfsd
- echo -n " mountd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet mountd
- echo -n " ugidd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet ugidd
- echo "."
- </example>
- This makes it possible for the user to see what takes
- so long and when the final daemon has been
- started. Please be careful where to put spaces: In the
- example above the system administrator can easily
- comment out a line if he don't wants to start a
- specific daemon, while the displayed message still
- looks good.</p></item>
-
-
- <item>
- <p>when something needs to be configured.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you have to set up different parameters of the
- system upon boot up, you can use this format:
- <example>
- Setting <parameter> to `<value>'.
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- You can use the following echo statement to get the quotes right:
- <example>
- echo "Setting DNS domainname to \`"value"'."
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- Note that the left quotation mark (`) is different
- from the right (').</p></item>
-
- <item>
- <p>when a daemon is stopped.</p>
-
- <p>
- When you stop a daemon you should issue a message
- similar to the startup message, except that `Starting'
- is replaced with `Stopping'.</p>
-
- <p>
- So stopping the printer daemon will like like this:
- <example>
- Stopping printer spooler: lpd.
- </example></p></item>
-
- <item>
- <p>when something is executed.</p>
-
- <p>
- There a several examples where you have to run a
- program at system startup or shutdown to perform a
- specific task. For example, setting the system's clock
- via `netdate' or killing all processes when the system
- comes down. Your message should like this:
- <example>
- Doing something very useful...done.
- </example>
- You should print the `done.' right after the job has been completed,
- so that the user gets informed why he has to wait. You can get this
- behavior by saying
- <example>
- echo -n "Doing something very useful..."
- do_something
- echo "done."
- </example>
- in your script.</p></item>
-
+ If a <tt>build</tt> file is touched at the end of
+ the <tt>build</tt> target, as suggested above, it
+ should be removed as the first action that
+ <tt>clean</tt> performs, so that running
+ <tt>build</tt> again after an interrupted
+ <tt>clean</tt> doesn't think that everything is
+ already done.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>clean</tt> target may need to be
+ invoked as root if <tt>binary</tt> has been
+ invoked since the last <tt>clean</tt>, or if
+ <tt>build</tt> has been invoked as root (since
+ <tt>build</tt> may create directories, for
+ example).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>get-orig-source</tt> (optional)</tag>
<item>
- <p>when the configuration is reloaded.</p>
-
<p>
- When a daemon is forced to reload its configuration
- files you should use the following format:
- <example>
- Reloading <daemon's-name> configuration...done.
- </example></p></item>
-
- <item>
- <p>when none of the above rules apply.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you have to print a message that doesn't fit into
- the styles described above, you can use something
- appropriate, but please have a look at the overall
- rules listed above.</p></item>
- </list></p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Menus</heading>
+ This target fetches the most recent version of the
+ original source package from a canonical archive site
+ (via FTP or WWW, for example), does any necessary
+ rearrangement to turn it into the original source
+ tar file format described below, and leaves it in the
+ current directory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This target may be invoked in any directory, and
+ should take care to clean up any temporary files it
+ may have left.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This target is optional, but providing it if
+ possible is a good idea.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
<p>
- Menu entries should follow the current menu policy as
- defined in the file <ftpsite>ftp.debian.org</ftpsite> in
- <ftppath>/debian/doc/package-developer/menu-policy.txt</ftppath>
- or your local mirror. In addition, it is included in the
- <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ The <tt>build</tt>, <tt>binary</tt> and
+ <tt>clean</tt> targets must be invoked with the current
+ directory being the package's top-level directory.
</p>
+
<p>
- The Debian <tt>menu</tt> packages provides a unique
- interface between packages providing applications and
- documents, and <em>menu programs</em> (either X window
- managers or text-based menu programs as
- <prgn>pdmenu</prgn>).</p>
-
+ Additional targets may exist in <file>debian/rules</file>,
+ either as published or undocumented interfaces or for the
+ package's internal use.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- All packages that provide applications that need not be
- passed any special command line arguments for normal
- operation should register a menu entry for those
- applications, so that users of the <tt>menu</tt> package
- will automatically get menu entries in their window
- managers, as well in shells like <tt>pdmenu</tt>.</p>
-
+ The architectures we build on and build for are determined
+ by <prgn>make</prgn> variables using the utility
+ <qref id="pkg-dpkgarch"><prgn>dpkg-architecture</prgn></qref>.
+ You can determine the
+ Debian architecture and the GNU style architecture
+ specification string for the build machine (the machine type
+ we are building on) as well as for the host machine (the
+ machine type we are building for). Here is a list of
+ supported <prgn>make</prgn> variables:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <tt>DEB_*_ARCH</tt> (the Debian architecture)
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <tt>DEB_*_GNU_TYPE</tt> (the GNU style architecture
+ specification string)
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <tt>DEB_*_GNU_CPU</tt> (the CPU part of
+ <tt>DEB_*_GNU_TYPE</tt>)
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <tt>DEB_*_GNU_SYSTEM</tt> (the System part of
+ <tt>DEB_*_GNU_TYPE</tt>)
+ </list>
+ where <tt>*</tt> is either <tt>BUILD</tt> for specification of
+ the build machine or <tt>HOST</tt> for specification of the
+ host machine.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Backward compatibility can be provided in the rules file
+ by setting the needed variables to suitable default
+ values; please refer to the documentation of
+ <prgn>dpkg-architecture</prgn> for details.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Please refer to the <em>Debian Menu System</em> document
- that comes with the <tt>menu</tt> package for information
- about how to register your applications and web
- documents.</p>
+ It is important to understand that the <tt>DEB_*_ARCH</tt>
+ string only determines which Debian architecture we are
+ building on or for. It should not be used to get the CPU
+ or system information; the GNU style variables should be
+ used for that.
+ </p>
</sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Multimedia handlers</heading>
-
+
+ <sect id="dpkgchangelog"><heading><file>debian/changelog</file>
+ </heading>
+
<p>
- Packages which provide the ability to view/show/play,
- compose, edit or print MIME types should register themselves
- as such following the current MIME support policy as defined
- in the file found on <ftpsite>ftp.debian.org</ftpsite> in
- <ftppath>/debian/doc/package-developer/mime_policy.txt</ftppath>
- or your local mirror. In addition, it is included in the
- <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ This file records the changes to the Debian-specific parts of the
+ package<footnote>
+ Though there is nothing stopping an author who is also
+ the Debian maintainer from using it for all their
+ changes, it will have to be renamed if the Debian and
+ upstream maintainers become different people. In such a
+ case, however, it might be better to maintain the
+ package as a non-native package.
+ </footnote>.
</p>
<p>
- MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions, RFC 1521) is a
- mechanism for encoding files and data streams and providing
- meta-information about them, in particular their type (e.g.
- audio or video) and format (e.g. PNG, HTML, MP3).
+ It has a special format which allows the package building
+ tools to discover which version of the package is being
+ built and find out other release-specific information.
</p>
-
+
<p>
- Registration of MIME type handlers allows programs like mail
- user agents and web browsers to to invoke these handlers to
- view, edit or display MIME types they don't support
- directly.
+ That format is a series of entries like this:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>package</var> (<var>version</var>) <var>distribution(s)</var>; urgency=<var>urgency</var>
+ <comment>
+ <p>[optional blank line(s), stripped]</p>
+ </comment>
+ * <var>change details</var>
+ <var>more change details</var>
+ <comment>
+ <p>[blank line(s), included in output of dpkg-parsechangelog]</p>
+ </comment>
+ * <var>even more change details</var>
+ <comment>
+ <p>[optional blank line(s), stripped]</p>
+ </comment>
+ -- <var>maintainer name</var> <<var>email
+ address</var>><var>[two spaces]</var> <var>date</var>
+ </example>
</p>
- </sect>
- <sect>
- <heading>Keyboard configuration</heading>
-
<p>
- To achieve a consistent keyboard configuration (i.e., all
- applications interpret a keyboard event the same way) all
- programs in the Debian distribution have to be configured to
- comply with the following guidelines.</p>
-
+ <var>package</var> and <var>version</var> are the source
+ package name and version number.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Here is a list that contains certain keys and their interpretation:
-
- <taglist>
- <tag><tt><--</tt></tag>
- <item><p>delete the character to the left of the cursor</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>Delete</tt></tag>
- <item><p>delete the character to the right of the cursor</p></item>
-
- <tag><tt>Control+H</tt></tag>
- <item><p>emacs: the help prefix</p></item>
- </taglist>
-
- The interpretation of any keyboard events should be independent
- of the terminal that's used, be it a virtual console, an X
- terminal emulator, an rlogin/telnet session, etc.</p>
-
+ <var>distribution(s)</var> lists the distributions where
+ this version should be installed when it is uploaded - it
+ is copied to the <tt>Distribution</tt> field in the
+ <file>.changes</file> file. See <ref id="f-Distribution">.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- The following list explains how the different programs
- should be set up to achieve this:</p>
-
+ <var>urgency</var> is the value for the <tt>Urgency</tt>
+ field in the <file>.changes</file> file for the upload. It is
+ not possible to specify an urgency containing commas; commas
+ are used to separate
+ <tt><var>keyword</var>=<var>value</var></tt> settings in the
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> changelog format (though there is
+ currently only one useful <var>keyword</var>,
+ <tt>urgency</tt>).<footnote>
+ Recognised urgency values are <tt>low</tt>,
+ <tt>medium</tt>, <tt>high</tt> and <tt>emergency</tt>.
+ They have an effect on how quickly a package will be
+ considered for inclusion into the <tt>testing</tt>
+ distribution, and give an indication of the importance
+ of any fixes included in this upload.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
<p>
- <list compact="compact">
- <item><p>`<tt><--</tt>' generates KB_Backspace in
- X.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>`<tt>Delete</tt>' generates KB_Delete in X.</p></item>
-
- <item>
- <p>
- X translations are set up to make KB_Backspace
- generate ASCII DEL, and to make KB_Delete generate
- <tt>ESC [ 3 ~</tt> (this is the vt220 escape code for
- the `delete character' key). This must be done by
- loading the resources using xrdb on all local X
- displays, not using the application defaults, so that
- the translation resources used correspond to the
- xmodmap settings.</p></item>
-
- <item>
- <p>
- The Linux console is configured to make
- `<tt><--</tt>' generate DEL, and `Delete' generate
- <tt>ESC [ 3 ~</tt> (this is the case at the
- moment).</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- X applications are configured so that Backspace
- deletes left, and Delete deletes right. Motif
- applications already work like this.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>stty erase <tt>^?</tt> .</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- The `xterm' terminfo entry should have <tt>ESC [ 3
- ~</tt> for kdch1, just like TERM=linux and
- TERM=vt220.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- Emacs is programmed to map KB_Backspace or the `stty
- erase' character to delete-backward-char, and
- KB_Delete or kdch1 to delete-forward-char, and
- <tt>^H</tt> to help as always.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- Other applications use the `stty erase' character and
- kdch1 for the two delete keys, with ASCII DEL being
- `delete previous character' and kdch1 being `delete
- character under cursor'.</p></item>
- </list></p>
-
+ The change details may in fact be any series of lines
+ starting with at least two spaces, but conventionally each
+ change starts with an asterisk and a separating space and
+ continuation lines are indented so as to bring them in
+ line with the start of the text above. Blank lines may be
+ used here to separate groups of changes, if desired.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- This will solve the problem except for:</p>
-
+ If this upload resolves bugs recorded in the Bug Tracking
+ System (BTS), they may be automatically closed on the
+ inclusion of this package into the Debian archive by
+ including the string: <tt>closes: Bug#<var>nnnnn</var></tt>
+ in the change details.<footnote>
+ To be precise, the string should match the following
+ Perl regular expression:
+ <example>
+/closes:\s*(?:bug)?\#?\s?\d+(?:,\s*(?:bug)?\#?\s?\d+)*/i
+ </example>
+ Then all of the bug numbers listed will be closed by the
+ archive maintenance script (<prgn>katie</prgn>), or in
+ the case of an NMU, marked as fixed.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
<p>
- <list compact="compact">
- <item><p>
- Some terminals have a <tt><--</tt> key that cannot
- be made to produce anything except <tt>^H</tt>. On
- these terminals Emacs help will be unavailable on
- <tt>^H</tt> (assuming that the `stty erase' character
- takes precedence in Emacs, and has been set
- correctly). M-x help or F1 (if available) can be used
- instead.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- Some operating systems use <tt>^H</tt> for stty erase.
- However, modern telnet versions and all rlogin
- versions propagate stty settings, and almost all UNIX
- versions honour stty erase. Where the stty settings
- are not propagated correctly things can be made to
- work by using stty manually.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- Some systems (including previous Debian versions) use
- xmodmap to arrange for both <tt><--</tt> and Delete
- to generate KB_Delete. We can change the behavior
- of their X clients via the same X resources that we
- use to do it for our own, or have our clients be
- configured via their resources when things are the
- other way around. On displays configured like this
- Delete will not work, but <tt><--</tt>
- will.</p></item>
-
- <item><p>
- Some operating systems have different kdch1 settings
- in their terminfo for xterm and others. On these
- systems the Delete key will not work correctly when
- you log in from a system conforming to our policy, but
- <tt><--</tt> will.</p></item>
- </list>
+ The maintainer name and email address used in the changelog
+ should be the details of the person uploading <em>this</em>
+ version. They are <em>not</em> necessarily those of the
+ usual package maintainer. The information here will be
+ copied to the <tt>Changed-By</tt> field in the
+ <tt>.changes</tt> file, and then later used to send an
+ acknowledgement when the upload has been installed.
</p>
- </sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Environment variables</heading>
-
+
<p>
- No program may depend on environment variables to get
- reasonable defaults. (That's because these environment
- variables would have to be set in a system-wide
- configuration file like /etc/profile, which is not supported
- by all shells.)</p>
-
+ The <var>date</var> should be in RFC822 format<footnote>
+ This is generated by the <prgn>822-date</prgn>
+ program.
+ </footnote>; it should include the time zone specified
+ numerically, with the time zone name or abbreviation
+ optionally present as a comment in parentheses.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If a program should depend on environment variables for its
- configuration, the program has to be changed to fall back to
- a reasonable default configuration if these environment
- variables are not present. If this cannot be done easily
- (e.g., if the source code of a non-free program is not
- available), the program should be replaced by a small
- `wrapper' shell script which sets the environment variables
- and calls the original program.</p>
-
+ The first "title" line with the package name should start
+ at the left hand margin; the "trailer" line with the
+ maintainer and date details should be preceded by exactly
+ one space. The maintainer details and the date must be
+ separated by exactly two spaces.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1><heading>Defining alternative changelog formats</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to use a different format to the standard
+ one, by providing a parser for the format you wish to
+ use.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A changelog parser must not interact with the user at
+ all.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+<!-- FIXME: section pkg-srcsubstvars is the same as srcsubstvars -->
+
+ <sect id="srcsubstvars"><heading><file>debian/substvars</file>
+ and variable substitutions </heading>
+
<p>
- Here is an example of a wrapper script for this purpose:
-
- <example>
- #!/bin/sh
- BAR=/var/lib/fubar
- export BAR
- exec /usr/lib/foo/foo "$@"
- </example></p>
-
+ When <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>,
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> and <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>
+ generate control files they perform variable substitutions
+ on their output just before writing it. Variable
+ substitutions have the form <tt>${<var>variable</var>}</tt>.
+ The optional file <file>debian/substvars</file> contains
+ variable substitutions to be used; variables can also be set
+ directly from <file>debian/rules</file> using the <tt>-V</tt>
+ option to the source packaging commands, and certain
+ predefined variables are also available.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Furthermore, as <tt>/etc/profile</tt> is a configuration
- file of the <prgn>bash</prgn> package, no other package may
- put any environment variables or other commands into that
- file.</p>
+ The <file>debian/substvars</file> file is usually generated and
+ modified dynamically by <file>debian/rules</file> targets, in
+ which case it must be removed by the <tt>clean</tt> target.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See <manref name="dpkg-source" section="1"> for full
+ details about source variable substitutions, including the
+ format of <file>debian/substvars</file>.</p>
</sect>
- </chapt>
- <chapt>
- <heading>Files</heading>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Binaries</heading>
-
+
+ <sect id="debianfiles"><heading><file>debian/files</file>
+ </heading>
+
<p>
- It is not allowed that two packages install programs with
- different functionality but with the same filenames. (The
- case of two programs having the same functionality but
- different implementations is handled via `alternatives.')
- If this case happens, one of the programs has to be
- renamed. The maintainers should report this to the
- developers' mailing and try to find a consensus about
- which package will have to be renamed. If a consensus can
- not be reached, <em>both</em> programs must be
- renamed.</p>
-
- <p>
- Generally the following compilation parameters should be used:
- <example>
- CC = gcc
- CFLAGS = -O2 -Wall # sane warning options vary between programs
- LDFLAGS = # none
- install -s # (or use strip on the files in debian/tmp)
- </example></p>
-
+ This file is not a permanent part of the source tree; it
+ is used while building packages to record which files are
+ being generated. <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> uses it
+ when it generates a <file>.changes</file> file.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Note that by default all installed binaries should be stripped,
- either by using the <tt>-s</tt> flag to
- <prgn>install</prgn>, or by calling <prgn>strip</prgn> on
- the binaries after they have been copied into
- <tt>debian/tmp</tt> but before the tree is made into a
- package.</p>
-
- <p>
- The <tt>-N</tt> flag should not be used. On a.out systems
- it may have been useful for some very small binaries, but
- for ELF it has no good effect.</p>
-
- <p>
- Debugging symbols are useful for error diagnosis, investigation
- of core dumps (which may be submitted by users in bug reports),
- or testing and developing the software. Therefore it is
- recommended to support building the package with
- debugging information through the following interface:
- If the environment variable <tt>DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS</tt>
- contains the string <tt>debug</tt>, compile the software with
- debugging information (usually this involves adding the
- <tt>-g</tt> flag to <tt>CFLAGS</tt>). This allows to generate
- a build tree with debugging information. If the environment
- variable <tt>DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS</tt> contains the
- string <tt>nostrip</tt>, do not strip the files at installation
- time. This allows to generate a package with debugging
- information included. The following makefile snippet
- is only an example how to test for either
- condition:
- <footnote>
+ It should not exist in a shipped source package, and so it
+ (and any backup files or temporary files such as
+ <file>files.new</file><footnote>
+ <file>files.new</file> is used as a temporary file by
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> and
+ <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> - they write a new
+ version of <tt>files</tt> here before renaming it,
+ to avoid leaving a corrupted copy if an error
+ occurs.
+ </footnote>) should be removed by the
+ <tt>clean</tt> target. It may also be wise to
+ ensure a fresh start by emptying or removing it at the
+ start of the <tt>binary</tt> target.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> is run for a binary
+ package, it adds an entry to <file>debian/files</file> for the
+ <file>.deb</file> file that will be created when <tt>dpkg-deb
+ --build</tt> is run for that binary package. So for most
+ packages all that needs to be done with this file is to
+ delete it in the <tt>clean</tt> target.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package upload includes files besides the source
+ package and any binary packages whose control files were
+ made with <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> then they should be
+ placed in the parent of the package's top-level directory
+ and <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> should be called to add
+ the file to the list in <file>debian/files</file>.</p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="restrictions"><heading>Restrictions on objects in source packages
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The source package may not contain any hard links<footnote>
<p>
- Rationale: Building by default with -g causes more
- wasted CPU cycles since the information is stripped away
- anyway. The package can by default build without -g if
- it also provides a mechanism to easily be rebuilt with
- debugging information. This can be done by providing a
- "build-debug" make target, or allowing the user to
- specify "BUILD_DEBUG=yes" in the environment while
- compiling that package.
+ This is not currently detected when building source
+ packages, but only when extracting
+ them.
</p>
- <p>Now this has several added benefits:
- <list>
- <item>
- <p>
- It is actually easier to build debugging bins and
- libraries this way (no more editing debian/rules
- or similar) since it provides a documented way of
- getting this type of build.</p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- There will be much less wasted cpu time for the
- autobuilders since not having debugging
- information (and hence also not having to strip
- it) will increase the speed of compiles. This
- skips an entire pass of the compiler,
- </p>
- </item>
- </list>
+ <p>
+ Hard links may be permitted at some point in the
+ future, but would require a fair amount of
+ work.
</p>
+ </footnote>, device special files, sockets or setuid or
+ setgid files.<footnote>
+ Setgid directories are allowed.
</footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
- <example>
- CFLAGS = -O2 -Wall
- INSTALL = install
-
- ifneq (,$(findstring debug,$(DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS)))
- CFLAGS += -g
- ifneq (,$(findstring nostrip,$(DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS)))
- INSTALL += -s
- endif
- endif
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- It is up to the package maintainer to decide what
- compilation options are best for the package. Certain
- binaries (such as computationally-intensive programs) may
- function better with certain flags (<tt>-O3</tt>, for
- example); feel free to use them. Please use good judgment
- here. Don't use flags for the sake of it; only use them
- if there is good reason to do so. Feel free to override
- the upstream author's ideas about which compilation
- options are best--they are often inappropriate for our
- environment.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Libraries</heading>
-
- <p>
- All libraries must have a shared version in the lib
- package and a static version in the lib-dev package. The
- shared version must be compiled with <tt>-fPIC</tt>, and
- the static version must not be. In other words, each
- <tt>*.c</tt> file is compiled twice.</p>
-
- <p>
- You have to specify the gcc option <tt>-D_REENTRANT</tt>
- when building a library (either static or shared) to make
- the library compatible with LinuxThreads.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note that all installed shared libraries should be
- stripped with
- <example>
- strip --strip-unneeded <your-lib>
- </example>
- (The option `--strip-unneeded' makes <tt>strip</tt> remove
- only the symbols which aren't needed for relocation
- processing.) Shared libraries can function perfectly well
- when stripped, since the symbols for dynamic linking are
- in a separate part of the ELF object file.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note that under some circumstances it may be useful to
- install a shared library unstripped, for example when
- building a separate package to support debugging.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- An ever increasing number of packages are using libtool to
- do their linking. The latest GNU libtools (>= 1.3a) can take
- advantage of the metadata in the installed libtool archive
- files (`*.la'). The main advantage of libtool's .la files is
- that it allows libtool to store and subsequently access
- metadata with respect to the libraries it builds. libtool
- will search for those files, which contain a lot of useful
- information about a library (e.g. dependency libraries for
- static linking). Also, they're <em>essential</em> for
- programs using libltdl.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Certainly libtool is fully capable of linking against shared
- libraries which don't have .la files, but being a mere shell
- script it can add considerably to the build time of a
- libtool using package if that shell-script has to derive all
- this information from first principles for each library every
- time it is linked. With the advent of libtool-1.4 (and to a
- lesser extent libtool-1.3), the .la files will also store
- information about inter-library dependencies which cannot
- necessarily be derived after the .la file is deleted.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Packages that use libtool to create shared libraries must
- include the <em>.la</em> files in the <em>-dev</em>
- packages, with the exception that if the package relies on
- libtool's <em>libltdl</em> library, in which case the .la
- files must go in the run-time library package. This is a
- good idea in general, and especially for static linking
- issues.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Please make sure that you use only released versions of
- shared libraries to build your packages; otherwise other
- users will not be able to run your binaries
- properly. Producing source packages that depend on
- unreleased compilers is also usually a bad
- idea.
+ <sect id="descriptions"><heading>Descriptions of packages - the
+ <tt>Description</tt> field</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The "Description" control file field consists of two parts,
+ the synopsis or the short description, and the long description.
+ The field's format is as follows:
+ </p>
+
+ <p><example>
+ Description: <single line synopsis>
+ <extended description over several lines>
+</example></p>
+
+ <p>
+ The description is intended to describe the program to a user
+ who has never met it before so that they know whether they
+ want to install it. It should also give information about the
+ significant dependencies and conflicts between this package
+ and others, so that the user knows why these dependencies and
+ conflicts have been declared.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Put important information first, both in the synopsis and
+ extended description. Sometimes only the first part of the
+ synopsis or of the description will be displayed. You can
+ assume that there will usually be a way to see the whole
+ extended description.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1 id="synopsis"><heading>The single line synopsis</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The single line synopsis should be kept brief - certainly
+ under 80 characters.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Do not include the package name in the synopsis line. The
+ display software knows how to display this already, and you
+ do not need to state it. Remember that in many situations
+ the user may only see the synopsis line - make it as
+ informative as you can.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="extendeddesc"><heading>The extended description</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Do not try to continue the single line synopsis into the
+ extended description. This will not work correctly when
+ the full description is displayed, and makes no sense
+ where only the summary (the single line synopsis) is
+ available.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The extended description should describe what the package
+ does and how it relates to the rest of the system (in terms
+ of, for example, which subsystem it is which part of).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The description field needs to make sense to anyone, even
+ people who have no idea about any of the things the
+ package deals with.<footnote>
+ The blurb that comes with a program in its
+ announcements and/or <prgn>README</prgn> files is
+ rarely suitable for use in a description. It is
+ usually aimed at people who are already in the
+ community where the package is used.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The lines in the extended description can have these formats:
+ </p>
+
+ <p><list>
+
+ <item>
+ Those starting with a single space are part of a paragraph.
+ Successive lines of this form will be word-wrapped when
+ displayed. The leading space will usually be stripped off.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Those starting with two or more spaces. These will be
+ displayed verbatim. If the display cannot be panned
+ horizontally, the displaying program will linewrap them "hard"
+ (i.e., without taking account of word breaks). If it can they
+ will be allowed to trail off to the right. None, one or two
+ initial spaces may be deleted, but the number of spaces
+ deleted from each line will be the same (so that you can have
+ indenting work correctly, for example).
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Those containing a single space followed by a single full stop
+ character. These are rendered as blank lines. This is the
+ <em>only</em> way to get a blank line<footnote>
+ Completely empty lines will not be rendered as blank lines.
+ Instead, they will cause the parser to think you're starting
+ a whole new record in the control file, and will therefore
+ likely abort with an error.
+ </footnote>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Those containing a space, a full stop and some more characters.
+ These are for future expansion. Do not use them.
+ </item>
+
+ </list></p>
+
+ <p>
+ Do not use tab characters. Their effect is not predictable.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="maintainerscripts"><heading>Package maintainer scripts
+ and installation procedure
+ </heading>
+
+ <sect><heading>Introduction to package maintainer scripts
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to supply scripts as part of a package which
+ the package management system will run for you when your
+ package is installed, upgraded or removed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These scripts are the files <prgn>preinst</prgn>,
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn>, <prgn>prerm</prgn> and <prgn>postrm</prgn> in the
+ control area of the package. They must be proper executable
+ files; if they are scripts (which is recommended), they must
+ start with the usual <tt>#!</tt> convention. They should be
+ readable and executable by anyone, and not world-writable.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The package management system looks at the exit status from
+ these scripts. It is important that they exit with a
+ non-zero status if there is an error, so that the package
+ management system can stop its processing. For shell
+ scripts this means that you <em>almost always</em> need to
+ use <tt>set -e</tt> (this is usually true when writing shell
+ scripts, in fact). It is also important, of course, that
+ they don't exit with a non-zero status if everything went
+ well.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a package is upgraded a combination of the scripts from
+ the old and new packages is called during the upgrade
+ procedure. If your scripts are going to be at all
+ complicated you need to be aware of this, and may need to
+ check the arguments to your scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Broadly speaking the <prgn>preinst</prgn> is called before
+ (a particular version of) a package is installed, and the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> afterwards; the <prgn>prerm</prgn>
+ before (a version of) a package is removed and the
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> afterwards.
</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Programs called from maintainer scripts should not normally
+ have a path prepended to them. Before installation is
+ started, the package management system checks to see if the
+ programs <prgn>ldconfig</prgn>,
+ <prgn>start-stop-daemon</prgn>, <prgn>install-info</prgn>,
+ and <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> can be found via the
+ <tt>PATH</tt> environment variable. Those programs, and any
+ other program that one would expect to be on the
+ <tt>PATH</tt>, should thus be invoked without an absolute
+ pathname. Maintainer scripts should also not reset the
+ <tt>PATH</tt>, though they might choose to modify it by
+ prepending or appending package-specific directories. These
+ considerations really apply to all shell scripts.</p>
</sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Shared libraries</heading>
-
- <p>
- Packages involving shared libraries should be split up
- into several binary packages.</p>
-
- <p>
- For a straightforward library which has a development
- environment and a runtime kit including just shared
- libraries you need to create two packages:
- <tt><var>libraryname</var><var>soname</var></tt>
- (<var>soname</var> is the shared object name of the shared
- library--it's the thing that has to match exactly between
- building an executable and running it for the dynamic
- linker to be able run the program; usually the
- <var>soname</var> is the major number of the library) and
- <tt><var>libraryname</var><var>soname</var>-dev</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you prefer only to support one development version at a
- time you may name the development package
- <tt><var>libraryname</var>-dev</tt>; otherwise you may
- wish to use <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s conflicts mechanism to
- ensure that the user only installs one development version
- at a time (after all, different development versions are
- likely to have the same header files in them, causing a
- filename clash if both are installed). Typically the
- development version will also need an exact version
- dependency on the runtime library, to make sure that
- compilation and linking happens correctly.</p>
-
- <p>
- Packages which use the shared library should have a
- dependency on the name of the shared library package,
- <tt><var>libraryname</var><var>soname</var></tt>. When
- the <var>soname</var> changes you can have both versions
- of the library installed while moving from the old library
- to the new.</p>
-
- <p>
- If your package has some run-time support programs which
- use the shared library you must <em>not</em> put them in
- the shared library package. If you do that then you won't
- be able to install several versions of the shared library
- without getting filename clashes. Instead, either create
- a third package for the runtime binaries (this package
- might typically be named
- <tt><var>libraryname</var>-runtime</tt>--note the absence
- of the <var>soname</var> in the package name) or if the
- development package is small include them in there.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you have several shared libraries built from the same
- source tree you can lump them all together into a single
- shared library package, provided that you change all their
- <var>soname</var>s at once (so that you don't get filename
- clashes if you try to install different versions of the
- combined shared libraries package).</p>
-
- <p>
- Follow the directions in the <em>Debian Packaging
- Manual</em> for putting the shared library in its package,
- and make sure you include a <tt>shlibs</tt> control area
- file with details of the dependencies for packages which
- use the library.</p>
-
- <p>
- Shared libraries should <em>not</em> be installed
- executable, since <prgn>ld.so</prgn> does not require this
- and trying to execute a shared library results in a core
- dump.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect id="scripts">
- <heading>Scripts</heading>
-
- <p>
- All command scripts, including the package maintainer
- scripts inside the package and used by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>,
- should have a <tt>#!</tt> line naming the shell to be used
- to interpret them.</p>
-
- <p>
- In the case of Perl scripts this should be
- <tt>#!/usr/bin/perl</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Shell scripts (<prgn>sh</prgn> and <prgn>bash</prgn>)
- should almost certainly start with <tt>set -e</tt> so that
- errors are detected. Every script <em>must</em> use
- <tt>set -e</tt> or check the exit status of <em>every</em>
- command.</p>
-
- <p>
- The standard shell interpreter `<tt>/bin/sh</tt>' may be a
- symbolic link to any POSIX compatible shell. Thus, shell
- scripts specifying `<tt>/bin/sh</tt>' as interpreter may
- only use POSIX features. If a script requires non-POSIX
- features from the shell interpreter, the appropriate shell
- has to be specified in the first line of the script (e.g.,
- `<tt>#!/bin/bash</tt>') and the package has to depend on
- the package providing the shell (unless the shell package
- is marked `Essential', e.g., in the case of
- <prgn>bash</prgn>).</p>
-
- <p>
- Restrict your script to POSIX features when possible so
- that it may use <tt>/bin/sh</tt> as its interpreter. If
- your script works with <prgn>ash</prgn>, it's probably
- POSIX compliant, but if you are in doubt, use
- <tt>/bin/bash</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Perl scripts should check for errors when making any
- system calls, including <tt>open</tt>, <tt>print</tt>,
- <tt>close</tt>, <tt>rename</tt> and <tt>system</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- <prgn>csh</prgn> and <prgn>tcsh</prgn> should be avoided
- as scripting languages. See <em>Csh Programming
- Considered Harmful</em>, one of the <tt>comp.unix.*</tt>
- FAQs. It can be found on
- <url id="http://language.perl.com/versus/csh.whynot">, or
- <url id="http://www.cpan.org/doc/FMTEYEWTK/versus/csh.whynot">
- or even on <ftpsite>ftp.cpan.org</ftpsite>
- <ftppath>/pub/perl/CPAN/doc/FMTEYEWTK/versus/csh.whynot</ftppath>.
- If an upstream package comes with <prgn>csh</prgn> scripts
- then you must make sure that they start with
- <tt>#!/bin/csh</tt> and make your package depend on the
- <prgn>c-shell</prgn> virtual package.</p>
-
- <p>
- Any scripts which create files in world-writable
- directories (e.g., in <tt>/tmp</tt>) have to use a
- mechanism which will fail if a file with the same name
- already exists.</p>
-
- <p>
- The Debian base distribution provides the
- <prgn>tempfile</prgn> and <prgn>mktemp</prgn> utilities
- for use by scripts for this purpose.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Symbolic links</heading>
-
- <p>
- In general, symbolic links within a top-level directory
- should be relative, and symbolic links pointing from one
- top-level directory into another should be absolute. (A
- top-level directory is a sub-directory of the root
- directory `/'.)</p>
-
- <p>
- In addition, symbolic links should be specified as short
- as possible, i.e., link targets like `foo/../bar' are
- deprecated.</p>
-
- <p>
- Note that when creating a relative link using
- <prgn>ln</prgn> it is not necessary for the target of the
- link to exist relative to the working directory you're
- running <prgn>ln</prgn> from; nor is it necessary to
- change directory to the directory where the link is to be
- made. Simply include the string that should appear as the
- target of the link (this will be a pathname relative to
- the directory in which the link resides) as the first
- argument to <prgn>ln</prgn>.</p>
-
- <p>
- For example, in your <prgn>Makefile</prgn> or
- <tt>debian/rules</tt>, do things like:
- <example>
- ln -fs gcc $(prefix)/bin/cc
- ln -fs gcc debian/tmp/usr/bin/cc
- ln -fs ../sbin/sendmail $(prefix)/bin/runq
- ln -fs ../sbin/sendmail debian/tmp/usr/bin/runq
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- A symbolic link pointing to a compressed file should
- always have the same file extension as the referenced
- file. (For example, if a file `<tt>foo.gz</tt>' is
- referenced by a symbolic link, the filename of the link
- has to end with `<tt>.gz</tt>' too, as in
- `bar.gz.')</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Device files</heading>
-
- <p>
- No package may include device files in the package file
- tree.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a package needs any special device files that are not
- included in the base system, it has to call
- <prgn>makedev</prgn> in the <tt>postinst</tt> script,
- after asking the user for permission to do so.</p>
-
- <p>
- No package should remove any device files in the
- <tt>postrm</tt> or any other script. This is left to the
- system administrator.</p>
-
- <p>
- Debian uses the serial devices
- <tt>/dev/tty*</tt>. Programs using the old
- <tt>/dev/cu*</tt> devices should be changed to use
- <tt>/dev/tty*</tt>.</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect id="config files">
- <heading>Configuration files</heading>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Definitions</heading>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Maintainer scripts Idempotency</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ It is necessary for the error recovery procedures that the
+ scripts be idempotent. This means that if it is run
+ successfully, and then it is called again, it doesn't bomb
+ out or cause any harm, but just ensures that everything is
+ the way it ought to be. If the first call failed, or
+ aborted half way through for some reason, the second call
+ should merely do the things that were left undone the first
+ time, if any, and exit with a success status if everything
+ is OK.<footnote>
+ This is so that if an error occurs, the user interrupts
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> or some other unforeseen circumstance
+ happens you don't leave the user with a badly-broken
+ package when <prgn>dpkg</prgn> attempts to repeat the
+ action.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Controlling terminal for maintainer scripts</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The maintainer scripts are guaranteed to run with a
+ controlling terminal and can interact with the user.
+ If they need to prompt for passwords, do full-screen
+ interaction or something similar you should do these
+ things to and from <file>/dev/tty</file>, since
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will at some point redirect scripts'
+ standard input and output so that it can log the
+ installation process. Likewise, because these scripts
+ may be executed with standard output redirected into a
+ pipe for logging purposes, Perl scripts should set
+ unbuffered output by setting <tt>$|=1</tt> so that the
+ output is printed immediately rather than being
+ buffered.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each script should return a zero exit status for
+ success, or a nonzero one for failure.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="mscriptsinstact"><heading>Summary of ways maintainer
+ scripts are called
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <var>new-preinst</var> <tt>install</tt>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-preinst</var> <tt>install</tt> <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-preinst</var> <tt>upgrade</tt> <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>old-preinst</var> <tt>abort-upgrade</tt>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <var>postinst</var> <tt>configure</tt>
+ <var>most-recently-configured-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>old-postinst</var> <tt>abort-upgrade</tt>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>conflictor's-postinst</var> <tt>abort-remove</tt>
+ <tt>in-favour</tt> <var>package</var>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>deconfigured's-postinst</var>
+ <tt>abort-deconfigure</tt> <tt>in-favour</tt>
+ <var>failed-install-package</var> <var>version</var>
+ <tt>removing</tt> <var>conflicting-package</var>
+ <var>version</var>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <var>prerm</var> <tt>remove</tt>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>old-prerm</var> <tt>upgrade</tt>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-prerm</var> <tt>failed-upgrade</tt>
+ <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>conflictor's-prerm</var> <tt>remove</tt>
+ <tt>in-favour</tt> <var>package</var>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>deconfigured's-prerm</var> <tt>deconfigure</tt>
+ <tt>in-favour</tt> <var>package-being-installed</var>
+ <var>version</var> <tt>removing</tt>
+ <var>conflicting-package</var>
+ <var>version</var>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <var>postrm</var> <tt>remove</tt>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>postrm</var> <tt>purge</tt>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>old-postrm</var> <tt>upgrade</tt>
+ <var>new-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-postrm</var> <tt>failed-upgrade</tt>
+ <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-postrm</var> <tt>abort-install</tt>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-postrm</var> <tt>abort-install</tt>
+ <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>new-postrm</var> <tt>abort-upgrade</tt>
+ <var>old-version</var>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <var>disappearer's-postrm</var> <tt>disappear</tt>
+ <var>overwriter</var>
+ <var>overwriter-version</var>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+
+ <sect id="unpackphase">
+ <heading>Details of unpack phase of installation or upgrade</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The procedure on installation/upgrade/overwrite/disappear
+ (i.e., when running <tt>dpkg --unpack</tt>, or the unpack
+ stage of <tt>dpkg --install</tt>) is as follows. In each
+ case, if a major error occurs (unless listed below) the
+ actions are, in general, run backwards - this means that the
+ maintainer scripts are run with different arguments in
+ reverse order. These are the "error unwind" calls listed
+ below.
+
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ If a version of the package is already installed, call
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>old-prerm</var> upgrade <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ If the script runs but exits with a non-zero
+ exit status, <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will attempt:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-prerm</var> failed-upgrade <var>old-version</var>
+ </example>
+ Error unwind, for both the above cases:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>old-postinst</var> abort-upgrade <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If a "conflicting" package is being removed at the same time:
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ If any packages depended on that conflicting
+ package and <tt>--auto-deconfigure</tt> is
+ specified, call, for each such package:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>deconfigured's-prerm</var> deconfigure \
+ in-favour <var>package-being-installed</var> <var>version</var> \
+ removing <var>conflicting-package</var> <var>version</var>
+ </example>
+ Error unwind:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>deconfigured's-postinst</var> abort-deconfigure \
+ in-favour <var>package-being-installed-but-failed</var> <var>version</var> \
+ removing <var>conflicting-package</var> <var>version</var>
+ </example>
+ The deconfigured packages are marked as
+ requiring configuration, so that if
+ <tt>--install</tt> is used they will be
+ configured again if possible.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ To prepare for removal of the conflicting package, call:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>conflictor's-prerm</var> remove \
+ in-favour <var>package</var> <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ Error unwind:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>conflictor's-postinst</var> abort-remove \
+ in-favour <var>package</var> <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ If the package is being upgraded, call:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-preinst</var> upgrade <var>old-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ Otherwise, if the package had some configuration
+ files from a previous version installed (i.e., it
+ is in the "configuration files only" state):
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-preinst</var> install <var>old-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ Otherwise (i.e., the package was completely purged):
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-preinst</var> install
+ </example>
+ Error unwind actions, respectively:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-postrm</var> abort-upgrade <var>old-version</var>
+<var>new-postrm</var> abort-install <var>old-version</var>
+<var>new-postrm</var> abort-install
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ The new package's files are unpacked, overwriting any
+ that may be on the system already, for example any
+ from the old version of the same package or from
+ another package. Backups of the old files are kept
+ temporarily, and if anything goes wrong the package
+ management system will attempt to put them back as
+ part of the error unwind.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is an error for a package to contains files which
+ are on the system in another package, unless
+ <tt>Replaces</tt> is used (see <ref id="replaces">).
+ <!--
+ The following paragraph is not currently the case:
+ Currently the <tt>- - force-overwrite</tt> flag is
+ enabled, downgrading it to a warning, but this may not
+ always be the case.
+ -->
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is a more serious error for a package to contain a
+ plain file or other kind of non-directory where another
+ package has a directory (again, unless
+ <tt>Replaces</tt> is used). This error can be
+ overridden if desired using
+ <tt>--force-overwrite-dir</tt>, but this is not
+ advisable.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages which overwrite each other's files produce
+ behavior which, though deterministic, is hard for the
+ system administrator to understand. It can easily
+ lead to "missing" programs if, for example, a package
+ is installed which overwrites a file from another
+ package, and is then removed again.<footnote>
+ Part of the problem is due to what is arguably a
+ bug in <prgn>dpkg</prgn>.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A directory will never be replaced by a symbolic link
+ to a directory or vice versa; instead, the existing
+ state (symlink or not) will be left alone and
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will follow the symlink if there is
+ one.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ If the package is being upgraded, call
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>old-postrm</var> upgrade <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ If this fails, <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will attempt:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>new-postrm</var> failed-upgrade <var>old-version</var>
+ </example>
+ Error unwind, for both cases:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>old-preinst</var> abort-upgrade <var>new-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This is the point of no return - if
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> gets this far, it won't back off
+ past this point if an error occurs. This will
+ leave the package in a fairly bad state, which
+ will require a successful re-installation to clear
+ up, but it's when <prgn>dpkg</prgn> starts doing
+ things that are irreversible.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Any files which were in the old version of the package
+ but not in the new are removed.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ The new file list replaces the old.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ The new maintainer scripts replace the old.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Any packages all of whose files have been overwritten
+ during the installation, and which aren't required for
+ dependencies, are considered to have been removed.
+ For each such package
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> calls:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>disappearer's-postrm</var> disappear \
+ <var>overwriter</var> <var>overwriter-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The package's maintainer scripts are removed.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ It is noted in the status database as being in a
+ sane state, namely not installed (any conffiles
+ it may have are ignored, rather than being
+ removed by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>). Note that
+ disappearing packages do not have their prerm
+ called, because <prgn>dpkg</prgn> doesn't know
+ in advance that the package is going to
+ vanish.
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Any files in the package we're unpacking that are also
+ listed in the file lists of other packages are removed
+ from those lists. (This will lobotomize the file list
+ of the "conflicting" package if there is one.)
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ The backup files made during installation, above, are
+ deleted.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ The new package's status is now sane, and recorded as
+ "unpacked".
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Here is another point of no return - if the
+ conflicting package's removal fails we do not unwind
+ the rest of the installation; the conflicting package
+ is left in a half-removed limbo.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If there was a conflicting package we go and do the
+ removal actions (described below), starting with the
+ removal of the conflicting package's files (any that
+ are also in the package being installed have already
+ been removed from the conflicting package's file list,
+ and so do not get removed now).
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="configdetails"><heading>Details of configuration</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ When we configure a package (this happens with <tt>dpkg
+ --install</tt> and <tt>dpkg --configure</tt>), we first
+ update any <tt>conffile</tt>s and then call:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>postinst</var> configure <var>most-recently-configured-version</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ No attempt is made to unwind after errors during
+ configuration.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If there is no most recently configured version
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will pass a null argument; older versions
+ of dpkg may pass <tt><unknown></tt> (including the
+ angle brackets) in this case. Even older ones do not pass a
+ second argument at all, under any circumstances.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="removedetails"><heading>Details of removal and/or
+ configuration purging</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>prerm</var> remove
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The package's files are removed (except <tt>conffile</tt>s).
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>postrm</var> remove
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ All the maintainer scripts except the <prgn>postrm</prgn>
+ are removed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If we aren't purging the package we stop here. Note
+ that packages which have no <prgn>postrm</prgn> and no
+ <tt>conffile</tt>s are automatically purged when
+ removed, as there is no difference except for the
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> status.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The <tt>conffile</tt>s and any backup files
+ (<tt>~</tt>-files, <tt>#*#</tt> files,
+ <tt>%</tt>-files, <tt>.dpkg-{old,new,tmp}</tt>, etc.)
+ are removed.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>postrm</var> purge
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The package's file list is removed.
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+
+ No attempt is made to unwind after errors during
+ removal.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="relationships">
+ <heading>Declaring relationships between packages</heading>
+
+ <sect id="depsyntax">
+ <heading>Syntax of relationship fields</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ These fields all have a uniform syntax. They are a list of
+ package names separated by commas.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the <tt>Depends</tt>, <tt>Recommends</tt>,
+ <tt>Suggests</tt>, <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Depends</tt> and <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>
+ control file fields of the package, which declare
+ dependencies on other packages, the package names listed may
+ also include lists of alternative package names, separated
+ by vertical bar (pipe) symbols <tt>|</tt>. In such a case,
+ if any one of the alternative packages is installed, that
+ part of the dependency is considered to be satisfied.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All of the fields except for <tt>Provides</tt> may restrict
+ their applicability to particular versions of each named
+ package. This is done in parentheses after each individual
+ package name; the parentheses should contain a relation from
+ the list below followed by a version number, in the format
+ described in <ref id="versions">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The relations allowed are <tt><<</tt>, <tt><=</tt>,
+ <tt>=</tt>, <tt>>=</tt> and <tt>>></tt> for
+ strictly earlier, earlier or equal, exactly equal, later or
+ equal and strictly later, respectively. The deprecated
+ forms <tt><</tt> and <tt>></tt> were used to mean
+ earlier/later or equal, rather than strictly earlier/later,
+ so they should not appear in new packages (though
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> still supports them).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Whitespace may appear at any point in the version
+ specification subject to the rules in <ref
+ id="controlsyntax">, and must appear where it's necessary to
+ disambiguate; it is not otherwise significant. For
+ consistency and in case of future changes to
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> it is recommended that a single space be
+ used after a version relationship and before a version
+ number; it is also conventional to put a single space after
+ each comma, on either side of each vertical bar, and before
+ each open parenthesis.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, a list of dependencies might appear as:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Package: mutt
+Version: 1.3.17-1
+Depends: libc6 (>= 2.2.1), exim | mail-transport-agent
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All fields that specify build-time relationships
+ (<tt>Build-Depends</tt>, <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt> and <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt>)
+ may be restricted to a certain set of architectures. This
+ is indicated in brackets after each individual package name and
+ the optional version specification. The brackets enclose a
+ list of Debian architecture names separated by whitespace.
+ Exclamation marks may be prepended to each of the names.
+ (It is not permitted for some names to be prepended with
+ exclamation marks and others not.) If the current Debian
+ host architecture is not in this list and there are no
+ exclamation marks in the list, or it is in the list with a
+ prepended exclamation mark, the package name and the
+ associated version specification are ignored completely for
+ the purposes of defining the relationships.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Source: glibc
+Build-Depends-Indep: texinfo
+Build-Depends: kernel-headers-2.2.10 [!hurd-i386],
+ hurd-dev [hurd-i386], gnumach-dev [hurd-i386]
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that the binary package relationship fields such as
+ <tt>Depends</tt> appear in one of the binary package
+ sections of the control file, whereas the build-time
+ relationships such as <tt>Build-Depends</tt> appear in the
+ source package section of the control file (which is the
+ first section).
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Binary Dependencies - <tt>Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Recommends</tt>, <tt>Suggests</tt>, <tt>Enhances</tt>,
+ <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages can declare in their control file that they have
+ certain relationships to other packages - for example, that
+ they may not be installed at the same time as certain other
+ packages, and/or that they depend on the presence of others.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This is done using the <tt>Depends</tt>, <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Recommends</tt>, <tt>Suggests</tt>, <tt>Enhances</tt> and
+ <tt>Conflicts</tt> control file fields.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These six fields are used to declare a dependency
+ relationship by one package on another. Except for
+ <tt>Enhances</tt>, they appear in the depending (binary)
+ package's control file. (<tt>Enhances</tt> appears in the
+ recommending package's control file.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A <tt>Depends</tt> field takes effect <em>only</em> when a
+ package is to be configured. It does not prevent a package
+ being on the system in an unconfigured state while its
+ dependencies are unsatisfied, and it is possible to replace
+ a package whose dependencies are satisfied and which is
+ properly installed with a different version whose
+ dependencies are not and cannot be satisfied; when this is
+ done the depending package will be left unconfigured (since
+ attempts to configure it will give errors) and will not
+ function properly. If it is necessary, a
+ <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> field can be used, which has a partial
+ effect even when a package is being unpacked, as explained
+ in detail below. (The other three dependency fields,
+ <tt>Recommends</tt>, <tt>Suggests</tt> and
+ <tt>Enhances</tt>, are only used by the various front-ends
+ to <prgn>dpkg</prgn> such as <prgn>dselect</prgn>.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For this reason packages in an installation run are usually
+ all unpacked first and all configured later; this gives
+ later versions of packages with dependencies on later
+ versions of other packages the opportunity to have their
+ dependencies satisfied.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>Depends</tt> field thus allows package maintainers
+ to impose an order in which packages should be configured.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The meaning of the five dependency fields is as follows:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>Depends</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This declares an absolute dependency. A package will
+ not be configured unless all of the packages listed in
+ its <tt>Depends</tt> field have been correctly
+ configured.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>Depends</tt> field should be used if the
+ depended-on package is required for the depending
+ package to provide a significant amount of
+ functionality.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>Depends</tt> field should also be used if the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn>, <prgn>prerm</prgn> or
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> scripts require the package to be
+ present in order to run. Note, however, that the
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> cannot rely on any non-essential
+ packages to be present during the <tt>purge</tt>
+ phase.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Recommends</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This declares a strong, but not absolute, dependency.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>Recommends</tt> field should list packages
+ that would be found together with this one in all but
+ unusual installations.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Suggests</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ This is used to declare that one package may be more
+ useful with one or more others. Using this field
+ tells the packaging system and the user that the
+ listed packages are related to this one and can
+ perhaps enhance its usefulness, but that installing
+ this one without them is perfectly reasonable.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Enhances</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ This field is similar to Suggests but works in the
+ opposite direction. It is used to declare that a
+ package can enhance the functionality of another
+ package.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Pre-Depends</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This field is like <tt>Depends</tt>, except that it
+ also forces <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to complete installation
+ of the packages named before even starting the
+ installation of the package which declares the
+ pre-dependency, as follows:
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a package declaring a pre-dependency is about to
+ be <em>unpacked</em> the pre-dependency can be
+ satisfied if the depended-on package is either fully
+ configured, <em>or even if</em> the depended-on
+ package(s) are only unpacked or half-configured,
+ provided that they have been configured correctly at
+ some point in the past (and not removed or partially
+ removed since). In this case, both the
+ previously-configured and currently unpacked or
+ half-configured versions must satisfy any version
+ clause in the <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> field.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When the package declaring a pre-dependency is about
+ to be <em>configured</em>, the pre-dependency will be
+ treated as a normal <tt>Depends</tt>, that is, it will
+ be considered satisfied only if the depended-on
+ package has been correctly configured.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> should be used sparingly,
+ preferably only by packages whose premature upgrade or
+ installation would hamper the ability of the system to
+ continue with any upgrade that might be in progress.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <tt>Pre-Depends</tt> are also required if the
+ <prgn>preinst</prgn> script depends on the named
+ package. It is best to avoid this situation if
+ possible.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When selecting which level of dependency to use you should
+ consider how important the depended-on package is to the
+ functionality of the one declaring the dependency. Some
+ packages are composed of components of varying degrees of
+ importance. Such a package should list using
+ <tt>Depends</tt> the package(s) which are required by the
+ more important components. The other components'
+ requirements may be mentioned as Suggestions or
+ Recommendations, as appropriate to the components' relative
+ importance.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="conflicts">
+ <heading>Conflicting binary packages - <tt>Conflicts</tt></heading>
+
+ <p>
+ When one binary package declares a conflict with another
+ using a <tt>Conflicts</tt> field, <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will
+ refuse to allow them to be installed on the system at the
+ same time.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If one package is to be installed, the other must be removed
+ first - if the package being installed is marked as
+ replacing (see <ref id="replaces">) the one on the system,
+ or the one on the system is marked as deselected, or both
+ packages are marked <tt>Essential</tt>, then
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will automatically remove the package
+ which is causing the conflict, otherwise it will halt the
+ installation of the new package with an error. This
+ mechanism is specifically designed to produce an error when
+ the installed package is <tt>Essential</tt>, but the new
+ package is not.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A package will not cause a conflict merely because its
+ configuration files are still installed; it must be at least
+ half-installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A special exception is made for packages which declare a
+ conflict with their own package name, or with a virtual
+ package which they provide (see below): this does not
+ prevent their installation, and allows a package to conflict
+ with others providing a replacement for it. You use this
+ feature when you want the package in question to be the only
+ package providing some feature.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A <tt>Conflicts</tt> entry should almost never have an
+ "earlier than" version clause. This would prevent
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> from upgrading or installing the package
+ which declared such a conflict until the upgrade or removal
+ of the conflicted-with package had been completed.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="virtual"><heading>Virtual packages - <tt>Provides</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ As well as the names of actual ("concrete") packages, the
+ package relationship fields <tt>Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Recommends</tt>, <tt>Suggests</tt>, <tt>Enhances</tt>,
+ <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>, <tt>Conflicts</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Depends</tt>, <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt> and <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt>
+ may mention "virtual packages".
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A <em>virtual package</em> is one which appears in the
+ <tt>Provides</tt> control file field of another package.
+ The effect is as if the package(s) which provide a
+ particular virtual package name had been listed by name
+ everywhere the virtual package name appears. (See also <ref
+ id="virtual_pkg">)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If there are both concrete and virtual packages of the same
+ name, then the dependency may be satisfied (or the conflict
+ caused) by either the concrete package with the name in
+ question or any other concrete package which provides the
+ virtual package with the name in question. This is so that,
+ for example, supposing we have
+ <example compact="compact">
+Package: foo
+Depends: bar
+ </example>
+ and someone else releases an enhanced version of the
+ <tt>bar</tt> package (for example, a non-US variant), they
+ can say:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Package: bar-plus
+Provides: bar
+ </example>
+ and the <tt>bar-plus</tt> package will now also satisfy the
+ dependency for the <tt>foo</tt> package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a dependency or a conflict has a version number attached
+ then only real packages will be considered to see whether
+ the relationship is satisfied (or the prohibition violated,
+ for a conflict) - it is assumed that a real package which
+ provides the virtual package is not of the "right" version.
+ So, a <tt>Provides</tt> field may not contain version
+ numbers, and the version number of the concrete package
+ which provides a particular virtual package will not be
+ looked at when considering a dependency on or conflict with
+ the virtual package name.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is likely that the ability will be added in a future
+ release of <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to specify a version number for
+ each virtual package it provides. This feature is not yet
+ present, however, and is expected to be used only
+ infrequently.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you want to specify which of a set of real packages
+ should be the default to satisfy a particular dependency on
+ a virtual package, you should list the real package as an
+ alternative before the virtual one.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect id="replaces"><heading>Overwriting files and replacing
+ packages - <tt>Replaces</tt></heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages can declare in their control file that they should
+ overwrite files in certain other packages, or completely
+ replace other packages. The <tt>Replaces</tt> control file
+ field has these two distinct purposes.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1><heading>Overwriting files in other packages</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Firstly, as mentioned before, it is usually an error for a
+ package to contain files which are on the system in
+ another package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ However, if the overwriting package declares that it
+ <tt>Replaces</tt> the one containing the file being
+ overwritten, then <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will replace the file
+ from the old package with that from the new. The file
+ will no longer be listed as "owned" by the old package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package is completely replaced in this way, so that
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> does not know of any files it still
+ contains, it is considered to have "disappeared". It will
+ be marked as not wanted on the system (selected for
+ removal) and not installed. Any <tt>conffile</tt>s
+ details noted for the package will be ignored, as they
+ will have been taken over by the overwriting package. The
+ package's <prgn>postrm</prgn> script will be run with a
+ special argument to allow the package to do any final
+ cleanup required. See <ref id="mscriptsinstact">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If an installed package, <tt>foo</tt> say, declares that
+ it replaces another, <tt>bar</tt>, and an attempt is made
+ to install <tt>bar</tt>, <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will discard
+ files in the <tt>bar</tt> package which would overwrite
+ those already present in <tt>foo</tt>. This is so that
+ you can install an older version of a package without
+ problems.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For this usage of <tt>Replaces</tt>, virtual packages (see
+ <ref id="virtual">) are not considered when looking at a
+ <tt>Replaces</tt> field - the packages declared as being
+ replaced must be mentioned by their real names.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Furthermore, this usage of <tt>Replaces</tt> only takes
+ effect when both packages are at least partially on the
+ system at once, so that it can only happen if they do not
+ conflict or if the conflict has been overridden.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1><heading>Replacing whole packages, forcing their
+ removal</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Secondly, <tt>Replaces</tt> allows the packaging system to
+ resolve which package should be removed when there is a
+ conflict - see <ref id="conflicts">. This usage only
+ takes effect when the two packages <em>do</em> conflict,
+ so that the two usages of this field do not interfere with
+ each other.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In this situation, the package declared as being replaced
+ can be a virtual package, so for example, all mail
+ transport agents (MTAs) would have the following fields in
+ their control files:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Provides: mail-transport-agent
+Conflicts: mail-transport-agent
+Replaces: mail-transport-agent
+ </example>
+ ensuring that only one MTA can be installed at any one
+ time.
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect><heading>Relationships between source and binary packages -
+ <tt>Build-Depends</tt>, <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt>, <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Source packages that require certain binary packages to be
+ installed or absent at the time of building the package
+ can declare relationships to those binary packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This is done using the <tt>Build-Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>, <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt> and
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt> control file fields.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Build-dependencies on "build-essential" binary packages can be
+ omitted. Please see <ref id="pkg-relations"> for more information.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The dependencies and conflicts they define must be satisfied
+ (as defined earlier for binary packages) in order to invoke
+ the targets in <tt>debian/rules</tt>, as follows:<footnote>
+ <p>
+ If you make "build-arch" or "binary-arch", you need
+ Build-Depends. If you make "build-indep" or
+ "binary-indep", you need Build-Depends and
+ Build-Depends-Indep. If you make "build" or "binary",
+ you need both.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ There is no Build-Depends-Arch; the autobuilders will
+ only need the Build-Depends if they know how to build
+ only build-arch and binary-arch. Anyone building the
+ build-indep/binary-indep targets is basically assumed to
+ be building the whole package and so installs all build
+ dependencies.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The purpose of the original split, I recall, was so that
+ the autobuilders wouldn't need to install extra packages
+ needed only for the binary-indep targets. But without a
+ build-arch/build-indep split, this didn't work, since
+ most of the work is done in the build target, not in the
+ binary target.
+ </p>
+ </footnote>
+
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>Build-Depends</tt>, <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ The <tt>Build-Depends</tt> and
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts</tt> fields must be satisfied when
+ any of the following targets is invoked:
+ <tt>build</tt>, <tt>clean</tt>, <tt>binary</tt>,
+ <tt>binary-arch</tt>, <tt>build-arch</tt>,
+ <tt>build-indep</tt> and <tt>binary-indep</tt>.
+ </item>
+ <tag><tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt>,
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ The <tt>Build-Depends-Indep</tt> and
+ <tt>Build-Conflicts-Indep</tt> fields must be
+ satisfied when any of the following targets is
+ invoked: <tt>build</tt>, <tt>clean</tt>,
+ <tt>build-indep</tt>, <tt>binary</tt> and
+ <tt>binary-indep</tt>.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ </p>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="conffiles">
+ <heading>Configuration file handling</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This chapter has been superseded by <ref id="config-files">.
+ </p>
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="sharedlibs"><heading>Shared libraries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages containing shared libraries must be constructed with
+ a little care to make sure that the shared library is always
+ available. This is especially important for packages whose
+ shared libraries are vitally important, such as the C library
+ (currently <tt>libc6</tt>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages involving shared libraries should be split up into
+ several binary packages. This section mostly deals with how
+ this separation is to be accomplished; rules for files within
+ the shared library packages are in <ref id="libraries"> instead.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-runtime">
+ <heading>Run-time shared libraries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The run-time shared library needs to be placed in a package called
+ <package><var>libraryname</var><var>soversion</var></package>, where
+ <file><var>soversion</var></file> is the version number in the
+ soname of the shared library<footnote>
+ The soname is the shared object name: it's the thing
+ that has to match exactly between building an executable
+ and running it for the dynamic linker to be able run the
+ program. For example, if the soname of the library is
+ <file>libfoo.so.6</file>, the library package would be
+ called <file>libfoo6</file>.
+ </footnote>.
+ Alternatively, if it would be confusing to directly append
+ <var>soversion</var> to <var>libraryname</var> (e.g. because
+ <var>libraryname</var> itself ends in a number), you may use
+ <package><var>libraryname</var>-<var>soversion</var></package> and
+ <package><var>libraryname</var>-<var>soversion</var>-dev</package>
+ instead.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you have several shared libraries built from the same
+ source tree you may lump them all together into a single
+ shared library package, provided that you change all of
+ their sonames at once (so that you don't get filename
+ clashes if you try to install different versions of the
+ combined shared libraries package).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The package should install the shared libraries under
+ their normal names. For example, the <package>libgdbmg1</package>
+ package should install <file>libgdbm.so.1.7.3</file> as
+ <file>/usr/lib/libgdbm.so.1.7.3</file>. The files should not be
+ renamed or re-linked by any <prgn>prerm</prgn> or
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> scripts; <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will take care
+ of renaming things safely without affecting running programs,
+ and attempts to interfere with this are likely to lead to
+ problems.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Shared libraries should not be installed executable, since
+ the dynamic linker does not require this and trying to
+ execute a shared library usually results in a core dump.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The run-time library package should include the symbolic link that
+ <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> would create for the shared libraries.
+ For example, the <package>libgdbmg1</package> package should include
+ a symbolic link from <file>/usr/lib/libgdbm.so.1</file> to
+ <file>libgdbm.so.1.7.3</file>. This is needed so that the dynamic
+ linker (for example <prgn>ld.so</prgn> or
+ <prgn>ld-linux.so.*</prgn>) can find the library between the
+ time that <prgn>dpkg</prgn> installs it and the time that
+ <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> is run in the <prgn>postinst</prgn>
+ script.<footnote>
+ The package management system requires the library to be
+ placed before the symbolic link pointing to it in the
+ <file>.deb</file> file. This is so that when
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> comes to install the symlink
+ (overwriting the previous symlink pointing at an older
+ version of the library), the new shared library is already
+ in place. In the past, this was achieved by creating the
+ library in the temporary packaging directory before
+ creating the symlink. Unfortunately, this was not always
+ effective, since the building of the tar file in the
+ <file>.deb</file> depended on the behavior of the underlying
+ file system. Some file systems (such as reiserfs) reorder
+ the files so that the order of creation is forgotten.
+ Since version 1.7.0, <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ reorders the files itself as necessary when building a
+ package. Thus it is no longer important to concern
+ oneself with the order of file creation.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1 id="ldconfig">
+ <heading><tt>ldconfig</tt></heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Any package installing shared libraries in one of the default
+ library directories of the dynamic linker (which are currently
+ <file>/usr/lib</file> and <file>/lib</file>) or a directory that is
+ listed in <file>/etc/ld.so.conf</file><footnote>
+ These are currently
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>/usr/X11R6/lib/Xaw3d</item>
+ <item>/usr/local/lib</item>
+ <item>/usr/lib/libc5-compat</item>
+ <item>/lib/libc5-compat</item>
+ <item>/usr/X11R6/lib</item>
+ </list>
+ </footnote>
+ must use <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> to update the shared library
+ system.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The package must call <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> in the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> script if the first argument is
+ <tt>configure</tt>; the <prgn>postinst</prgn> script may
+ optionally invoke <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> at other times. The
+ package should call <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> in the
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> script if the first argument is
+ <tt>remove</tt>. The maintainer scripts must not invoke
+ <prgn>ldconfig</prgn> under any circumstances other than those
+ described in this paragraph.<footnote>
+ <p>
+ During install or upgrade, the preinst is called before
+ the new files are installed, so calling "ldconfig" is
+ pointless. The preinst of an existing package can also be
+ called if an upgrade fails. However, this happens during
+ the critical time when a shared libs may exist on-disk
+ under a temporary name. Thus, it is dangerous and
+ forbidden by current policy to call "ldconfig" at this
+ time.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a package is installed or upgraded, "postinst
+ configure" runs after the new files are safely on-disk.
+ Since it is perfectly safe to invoke ldconfig
+ unconditionally in a postinst, it is OK for a package to
+ simply put ldconfig in its postinst without checking the
+ argument. The postinst can also be called to recover from
+ a failed upgrade. This happens before any new files are
+ unpacked, so there is no reason to call "ldconfig" at this
+ point.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For a package that is being removed, prerm is
+ called with all the files intact, so calling ldconfig is
+ useless. The other calls to "prerm" happen in the case of
+ upgrade at a time when all the files of the old package
+ are on-disk, so again calling "ldconfig" is pointless.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ postrm, on the other hand, is called with the "remove"
+ argument just after the files are removed, so this is the
+ proper time to call "ldconfig" to notify the system of the
+ fact shared libraries from the package are removed.
+ The postrm can be called at several other times. At the
+ time of "postrm purge", "postrm abort-install", or "postrm
+ abort-upgrade", calling "ldconfig" is useless because the
+ shared lib files are not on-disk. However, when "postrm"
+ is invoked with arguments "upgrade", "failed-upgrade", or
+ "disappear", a shared lib may exist on-disk under a
+ temporary filename.
+ </p>
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-runtime-progs">
+ <heading>Run-time support programs</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ If your package has some run-time support programs which use
+ the shared library you must not put them in the shared
+ library package. If you do that then you won't be able to
+ install several versions of the shared library without
+ getting filename clashes.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Instead, either create another package for the runtime binaries
+ (this package might typically be named
+ <package><var>libraryname</var>-runtime</package>; note the absence
+ of the <var>soversion</var> in the package name), or if the
+ development package is small, include them in there.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-static">
+ <heading>Static libraries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The static library (<file><var>libraryname.a</var></file>)
+ is usually provided in addition to the shared version.
+ It is placed into the development package (see below).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In some cases, it is acceptable for a library to be
+ available in static form only; these cases include:
+ <list>
+ <item>libraries for languages whose shared library support
+ is immature or unstable</item>
+ <item>libraries whose interfaces are in flux or under
+ development (commonly the case when the library's
+ major version number is zero, or where the ABI breaks
+ across patchlevels)</item>
+ <item>libraries which are explicitly intended to be
+ available only in static form by their upstream
+ author(s)</item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-dev">
+ <heading>Development files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The development files associated to a shared library need to be
+ placed in a package called
+ <package><var>libraryname</var><var>soversion</var>-dev</package>,
+ or if you prefer only to support one development version at a
+ time, <package><var>libraryname</var>-dev</package>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In case several development versions of a library exist, you may
+ need to use <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s Conflicts mechanism (see
+ <ref id="conflicts">) to ensure that the user only installs one
+ development version at a time (as different development versions are
+ likely to have the same header files in them, which would cause a
+ filename clash if both were installed).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The development package should contain a symlink for the associated
+ shared library without a version number. For example, the
+ <package>libgdbmg1-dev</package> package should include a symlink
+ from <file>/usr/lib/libgdbm.so</file> to
+ <file>libgdbm.so.1.7.3</file>. This symlink is needed by the linker
+ (<prgn>ld</prgn>) when compiling packages, as it will only look for
+ <file>libgdbm.so</file> when compiling dynamically.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-intradeps">
+ <heading>Dependencies between the packages of the same library</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Typically the development version should have an exact
+ version dependency on the runtime library, to make sure that
+ compilation and linking happens correctly. The
+ <tt>${Source-Version}</tt> substitution variable can be
+ useful for this purpose.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="sharedlibs-shlibdeps">
+ <heading>Dependencies between the library and other packages -
+ the <tt>shlibs</tt> system</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package contains a binary or library which links to a
+ shared library, we must ensure that when the package is
+ installed on the system, all of the libraries needed are
+ also installed. This requirement led to the creation of the
+ <tt>shlibs</tt> system, which is very simple in its design:
+ any package which <em>provides</em> a shared library also
+ provides information on the package dependencies required to
+ ensure the presence of this library, and any package which
+ <em>uses</em> a shared library uses this information to
+ determine the dependencies it requires. The files which
+ contain the mapping from shared libraries to the necessary
+ dependency information are called <file>shlibs</file> files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Thus, when a package is built which contains any shared
+ libraries, it must provide a <file>shlibs</file> file for other
+ packages to use, and when a package is built which contains
+ any shared libraries or compiled binaries, it must run
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> on these to determine the
+ libraries used and hence the dependencies needed by this
+ package.<footnote>
+ <p>
+ In the past, the shared libraries linked to were
+ determined by calling <prgn>ldd</prgn>, but now
+ <prgn>objdump</prgn> is used to do this. The only
+ change this makes to package building is that
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> must also be run on shared
+ libraries, whereas in the past this was unnecessary.
+ The rest of this footnote explains the advantage that
+ this method gives.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ We say that a binary <tt>foo</tt> <em>directly</em> uses
+ a library <tt>libbar</tt> if it is explicitly linked
+ with that library (that is, it uses the flag
+ <tt>-lbar</tt> during the linking stage). Other
+ libraries that are needed by <tt>libbar</tt> are linked
+ <em>indirectly</em> to <tt>foo</tt>, and the dynamic
+ linker will load them automatically when it loads
+ <tt>libbar</tt>. A package should depend on
+ the libraries it directly uses, and the dependencies for
+ those libraries should automatically pull in the other
+ libraries.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Unfortunately, the <prgn>ldd</prgn> program shows both
+ the directly and indirectly used libraries, meaning that
+ the dependencies determined included both direct and
+ indirect dependencies. The use of <prgn>objdump</prgn>
+ avoids this problem by determining only the directly
+ used libraries.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A good example of where this helps is the following. We
+ could update <tt>libimlib</tt> with a new version that
+ supports a new graphics format called dgf (but retaining
+ the same major version number). If we used the old
+ <prgn>ldd</prgn> method, every package that uses
+ <tt>libimlib</tt> would need to be recompiled so it
+ would also depend on <tt>libdgf</tt> or it wouldn't run
+ due to missing symbols. However with the new system,
+ packages using <tt>libimlib</tt> can rely on
+ <tt>libimlib</tt> itself having the dependency on
+ <tt>libdgf</tt> and so they would not need rebuilding.
+ </p>
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the following sections, we will first describe where the
+ various <tt>shlibs</tt> files are to be found, then how to
+ use <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn>, and finally the
+ <tt>shlibs</tt> file format and how to create them if your
+ package contains a shared library.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>The <tt>shlibs</tt> files present on the system</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ There are several places where <tt>shlibs</tt> files are
+ found. The following list gives them in the order in which
+ they are read by <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn>. (The first
+ one which gives the required information is used.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ <p><file>debian/shlibs.local</file></p>
+
+ <p>
+ This lists overrides for this package. Its use is
+ described below (see <ref id="shlibslocal">).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p><file>/etc/dpkg/shlibs.override</file></p>
+
+ <p>
+ This lists global overrides. This list is normally
+ empty. It is maintained by the local system
+ administrator.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p><file>DEBIAN/shlibs</file> files in the "build directory"</p>
+
+ <p>
+ When packages are being built, any
+ <file>debian/shlibs</file> files are copied into the
+ control file area of the temporary build directory and
+ given the name <file>shlibs</file>. These files give
+ details of any shared libraries included in the
+ package.<footnote>
+ An example may help here. Let us say that the
+ source package <tt>foo</tt> generates two binary
+ packages, <tt>libfoo2</tt> and
+ <tt>foo-runtime</tt>. When building the binary
+ packages, the two packages are created in the
+ directories <file>debian/libfoo2</file> and
+ <file>debian/foo-runtime</file> respectively.
+ (<file>debian/tmp</file> could be used instead of one
+ of these.) Since <tt>libfoo2</tt> provides the
+ <tt>libfoo</tt> shared library, it will require a
+ <tt>shlibs</tt> file, which will be installed in
+ <file>debian/libfoo2/DEBIAN/shlibs</file>, eventually
+ to become
+ <file>/var/lib/dpkg/info/libfoo2.shlibs</file>. Then
+ when <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> is run on the
+ executable
+ <file>debian/foo-runtime/usr/bin/foo-prog</file>, it
+ will examine the
+ <file>debian/libfoo2/DEBIAN/shlibs</file> file to
+ determine whether <tt>foo-prog</tt>'s library
+ dependencies are satisfied by any of the libraries
+ provided by <tt>libfoo2</tt>. For this reason,
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> must only be run once
+ all of the individual binary packages'
+ <tt>shlibs</tt> files have been installed into the
+ build directory.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p><file>/var/lib/dpkg/info/*.shlibs</file></p>
+
+ <p>
+ These are the <file>shlibs</file> files corresponding to
+ all of the packages installed on the system, and are
+ maintained by the relevant package maintainers.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p><file>/etc/dpkg/shlibs.default</file></p>
+
+ <p>
+ This file lists any shared libraries whose packages
+ have failed to provide correct <file>shlibs</file> files.
+ It was used when the <file>shlibs</file> setup was first
+ introduced, but it is now normally empty. It is
+ maintained by the <tt>dpkg</tt> maintainer.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>How to use <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> and the
+ <file>shlibs</file> files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Put a call to <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> into your
+ <file>debian/rules</file> file. If your package contains only
+ compiled binaries and libraries (but no scripts), you can
+ use a command such as:
+ <example compact="compact">
+dpkg-shlibdeps debian/tmp/usr/bin/* debian/tmp/usr/sbin/* \
+ debian/tmp/usr/lib/*
+ </example>
+ Otherwise, you will need to explicitly list the compiled
+ binaries and libraries.<footnote>
+ If you are using <tt>debhelper</tt>, the
+ <prgn>dh_shlibdeps</prgn> program will do this work for
+ you. It will also correctly handle multi-binary
+ packages.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This command puts the dependency information into the
+ <file>debian/substvars</file> file, which is then used by
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>. You will need to place a
+ <tt>${shlib:Depends}</tt> variable in the <tt>Depends</tt>
+ field in the control file for this to work.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> doesn't complain, you're
+ done. If it does complain you might need to create your own
+ <file>debian/shlibs.local</file> file, as explained below (see
+ <ref id="shlibslocal">).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you have multiple binary packages, you will need to call
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> on each one which contains
+ compiled libraries or binaries. In such a case, you will
+ need to use the <tt>-T</tt> option to the <tt>dpkg</tt>
+ utilities to specify a different <file>substvars</file> file.
+ For more details on this and other options, see <manref
+ name="dpkg-shlibdeps" section="1">.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="shlibs">
+ <heading>The <file>shlibs</file> File Format</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Each <file>shlibs</file> file has the same format. Lines
+ beginning with <tt>#</tt> are considered to be comments and
+ are ignored. Each line is of the form:
+ <example compact="compact">
+<var>library-name</var> <var>soname-version-number</var> <var>dependencies ...</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ We will explain this by reference to the example of the
+ <tt>zlib1g</tt> package, which (at the time of writing)
+ installs the shared library <file>/usr/lib/libz.so.1.1.3</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>library-name</var> is the name of the shared library,
+ in this case <tt>libz</tt>. (This must match the name part
+ of the soname, see below.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>soname-version-number</var> is the version part of the
+ soname of the library. The soname is the thing that must
+ exactly match for the library to be recognized by the
+ dynamic linker, and is usually of the form
+ <tt><var>name</var>.so.<var>major-version</var></tt>, in our
+ example, <tt>libz.so.1</tt>.<footnote>
+ This can be determined using the command
+ <example compact="compact">
+objdump -p /usr/lib/libz.so.1.1.3 | grep SONAME
+ </example>
+ </footnote>
+ The version part is the part which comes after
+ <tt>.so.</tt>, so in our case, it is <tt>1</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>dependencies</var> has the same syntax as a dependency
+ field in a binary package control file. It should give
+ details of which packages are required to satisfy a binary
+ built against the version of the library contained in the
+ package. See <ref id="depsyntax"> for details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In our example, if the first version of the <tt>zlib1g</tt>
+ package which contained a minor number of at least
+ <tt>1.3</tt> was <var>1:1.1.3-1</var>, then the
+ <tt>shlibs</tt> entry for this library could say:
+ <example compact="compact">
+libz 1 zlib1g (>= 1:1.1.3)
+ </example>
+ The version-specific dependency is to avoid warnings from
+ the dynamic linker about using older shared libraries with
+ newer binaries.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Providing a <file>shlibs</file> file</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ If your package provides a shared library, you should create
+ a <file>shlibs</file> file following the format described above.
+ It is usual to call this file <file>debian/shlibs</file> (but if
+ you have multiple binary packages, you might want to call it
+ <file>debian/shlibs.<var>package</var></file> instead). Then
+ let <file>debian/rules</file> install it in the control area:
+ <example compact="compact">
+install -m644 debian/shlibs debian/tmp/DEBIAN
+ </example>
+ or, in the case of a multi-binary package:
+ <example compact="compact">
+install -m644 debian/shlibs.<var>package</var> debian/<var>package</var>/DEBIAN/shlibs
+ </example>
+ An alternative way of doing this is to create the
+ <file>shlibs</file> file in the control area directly from
+ <file>debian/rules</file> without using a <file>debian/shlibs</file>
+ file at all,<footnote>
+ This is what <prgn>dh_makeshlibs</prgn> in the
+ <tt>debhelper</tt> suite does.
+ </footnote>
+ since the <file>debian/shlibs</file> file itself is ignored by
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ As <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> reads the
+ <file>DEBIAN/shlibs</file> files in all of the binary packages
+ being built from this source package, all of the
+ <file>DEBIAN/shlibs</file> files should be installed before
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> is called on any of the binary
+ packages.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="shlibslocal">
+ <heading>Writing the <file>debian/shlibs.local</file> file</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file is intended only as a <em>temporary</em> fix if
+ your binaries or libraries depend on a library whose package
+ does not yet provide a correct <file>shlibs</file> file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ We will assume that you are trying to package a binary
+ <tt>foo</tt>. When you try running
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> you get the following error
+ message (<tt>-O</tt> displays the dependency information on
+ <tt>stdout</tt> instead of writing it to
+ <tt>debian/substvars</tt>, and the lines have been wrapped
+ for ease of reading):
+ <example compact="compact">
+$ dpkg-shlibdeps -O debian/tmp/usr/bin/foo
+dpkg-shlibdeps: warning: unable to find dependency
+ information for shared library libbar (soname 1,
+ path /usr/lib/libbar.so.1, dependency field Depends)
+shlibs:Depends=libc6 (>= 2.2.2-2)
+ </example>
+ You can then run <prgn>ldd</prgn> on the binary to find the
+ full location of the library concerned:
+ <example compact="compact">
+$ ldd foo
+libbar.so.1 => /usr/lib/libbar.so.1 (0x4001e000)
+libc.so.6 => /lib/libc.so.6 (0x40032000)
+/lib/ld-linux.so.2 => /lib/ld-linux.so.2 (0x40000000)
+ </example>
+ So the <prgn>foo</prgn> binary depends on the
+ <prgn>libbar</prgn> shared library, but no package seems to
+ provide a <file>*.shlibs</file> file handling
+ <file>libbar.so.1</file> in <file>/var/lib/dpkg/info/</file>. Let's
+ determine the package responsible:
+ <example compact="compact">
+$ dpkg -S /usr/lib/libbar.so.1
+bar1: /usr/lib/libbar.so.1
+$ dpkg -s bar1 | grep Version
+Version: 1.0-1
+ </example>
+ This tells us that the <tt>bar1</tt> package, version 1.0-1,
+ is the one we are using. Now we can file a bug against the
+ <tt>bar1</tt> package and create our own
+ <file>debian/shlibs.local</file> to locally fix the problem.
+ Including the following line into your
+ <file>debian/shlibs.local</file> file:
+ <example compact="compact">
+libbar 1 bar1 (>= 1.0-1)
+ </example>
+ should allow the package build to work.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ As soon as the maintainer of <tt>bar1</tt> provides a
+ correct <file>shlibs</file> file, you should remove this line
+ from your <file>debian/shlibs.local</file> file. (You should
+ probably also then have a versioned <tt>Build-Depends</tt>
+ on <tt>bar1</tt> to help ensure that others do not have the
+ same problem building your package.)
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ </chapt>
+
+ <chapt id="opersys"><heading>The Operating System</heading>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Filesystem hierarchy</heading>
+
+
+ <sect1 id="fhs">
+ <heading>Filesystem Structure</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The location of all installed files and directories must
+ comply with the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS),
+ version 2.1, except where doing so would violate other
+ terms of Debian Policy. The version of this document
+ referred here can be found in the <tt>debian-policy</tt>
+ package or on
+ <url id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/fhs/"
+ name="FHS (Debian copy)"> alongside this manual (or, if
+ you have the <package>debian-policy</package> installed,
+ you can try <url
+ id="file:///usr/share/doc/debian-policy/fhs/" name="FHS
+ (local copy)">). The
+ latest version, which may be a more recent version, may
+ be found on
+ <url id="http://www.pathname.com/fhs/" name="FHS (upstream)">.
+ Specific questions about following the standard may be
+ asked on the <tt>debian-devel</tt> mailing list, or
+ referred to the FHS mailing list (see the
+ <url id="http://www.pathname.com/fhs/" name="FHS web site"> for
+ more information).
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Site-specific programs</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ As mandated by the FHS, packages must not place any
+ files in <file>/usr/local</file>, either by putting them in
+ the file system archive to be unpacked by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ or by manipulating them in their maintainer scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ However, the package may create empty directories below
+ <file>/usr/local</file> so that the system administrator knows
+ where to place site-specific files. These directories
+ should be removed on package removal if they are
+ empty.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note, that this applies only to directories <em>below</em>
+ <file>/usr/local</file>, not <em>in</em> <file>/usr/local</file>.
+ Packages must not create sub-directories in the directory
+ <file>/usr/local</file> itself, except those listed in FHS,
+ section 4.5. However, you may create directories below
+ them as you wish. You must not remove any of the
+ directories listed in 4.5, even if you created them.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Since <file>/usr/local</file> can be mounted read-only from a
+ remote server, these directories must be created and
+ removed by the <prgn>postinst</prgn> and <prgn>prerm</prgn>
+ maintainer scripts and not be included in the
+ <file>.deb</file> archive. These scripts must not fail if
+ either of these operations fail.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, the <tt>emacsen-common</tt> package could
+ contain something like
+ <example compact="compact">
+if [ ! -e /usr/local/share/emacs ]
+then
+ if mkdir /usr/local/share/emacs 2>/dev/null
+ then
+ chown root:staff /usr/local/share/emacs
+ chmod 2775 /usr/local/share/emacs
+ fi
+fi
+ </example>
+ in its <prgn>postinst</prgn> script, and
+ <example compact="compact">
+rmdir /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp 2>/dev/null || true
+rmdir /usr/local/share/emacs 2>/dev/null || true
+ </example>
+ in the <prgn>prerm</prgn> script. (Note that this form is
+ used to ensure that if the script is interrupted, the
+ directory <file>/usr/local/share/emacs</file> will still be
+ removed.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you do create a directory in <file>/usr/local</file> for
+ local additions to a package, you should ensure that
+ settings in <file>/usr/local</file> take precedence over the
+ equivalents in <file>/usr</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ However, because <file>/usr/local</file> and its contents are
+ for exclusive use of the local administrator, a package
+ must not rely on the presence or absence of files or
+ directories in <file>/usr/local</file> for normal operation.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <file>/usr/local</file> directory itself and all the
+ subdirectories created by the package should (by default) have
+ permissions 2775 (group-writable and set-group-id) and be
+ owned by <tt>root.staff</tt>.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>The system-wide mail directory</heading>
+ <p>
+ The system-wide mail directory is <file>/var/mail</file>. This
+ directory is part of the base system and should not owned
+ by any particular mail agents. The use of the old
+ location <file>/var/spool/mail</file> is deprecated, even
+ though the spool may still be physically located there.
+ To maintain partial upgrade compatibility for systems
+ which have <file>/var/spool/mail</file> as their physical mail
+ spool, packages using <file>/var/mail</file> must depend on
+ either <package>libc6</package> (>= 2.1.3-13), or on
+ <package>base-files</package> (>= 2.2.0), or on later
+ versions of either one of these packages.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Users and groups</heading>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Introduction</heading>
+ <p>
+ The Debian system can be configured to use either plain or
+ shadow passwords.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Some user ids (UIDs) and group ids (GIDs) are reserved
+ globally for use by certain packages. Because some
+ packages need to include files which are owned by these
+ users or groups, or need the ids compiled into binaries,
+ these ids must be used on any Debian system only for the
+ purpose for which they are allocated. This is a serious
+ restriction, and we should avoid getting in the way of
+ local administration policies. In particular, many sites
+ allocate users and/or local system groups starting at 100.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Apart from this we should have dynamically allocated ids,
+ which should by default be arranged in some sensible
+ order, but the behavior should be configurable.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages other than <tt>base-passwd</tt> must not modify
+ <file>/etc/passwd</file>, <file>/etc/shadow</file>,
+ <file>/etc/group</file> or <file>/etc/gshadow</file>.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>UID and GID classes</heading>
+ <p>
+ The UID and GID numbers are divided into classes as
+ follows:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag>0-99:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Globally allocated by the Debian project, the same
+ on every Debian system. These ids will appear in
+ the <file>passwd</file> and <file>group</file> files of all
+ Debian systems, new ids in this range being added
+ automatically as the <tt>base-passwd</tt> package is
+ updated.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages which need a single statically allocated
+ uid or gid should use one of these; their
+ maintainers should ask the <tt>base-passwd</tt>
+ maintainer for ids.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>100-999:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Dynamically allocated system users and groups.
+ Packages which need a user or group, but can have
+ this user or group allocated dynamically and
+ differently on each system, should use <tt>adduser
+ --system</tt> to create the group and/or user.
+ <prgn>adduser</prgn> will check for the existence of
+ the user or group, and if necessary choose an unused
+ id based on the ranges specified in
+ <file>adduser.conf</file>.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>1000-29999:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Dynamically allocated user accounts. By default
+ <prgn>adduser</prgn> will choose UIDs and GIDs for
+ user accounts in this range, though
+ <file>adduser.conf</file> may be used to modify this
+ behavior.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>30000-59999:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>Reserved.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>60000-64999:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Globally allocated by the Debian project, but only
+ created on demand. The ids are allocated centrally
+ and statically, but the actual accounts are only
+ created on users' systems on demand.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These ids are for packages which are obscure or
+ which require many statically-allocated ids. These
+ packages should check for and create the accounts in
+ <file>/etc/passwd</file> or <file>/etc/group</file> (using
+ <prgn>adduser</prgn> if it has this facility) if
+ necessary. Packages which are likely to require
+ further allocations should have a "hole" left after
+ them in the allocation, to give them room to
+ grow.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>65000-65533:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>Reserved.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>65534:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ User <tt>nobody</tt>. The corresponding gid refers
+ to the group <tt>nogroup</tt>.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>65535:</tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <tt>(uid_t)(-1) == (gid_t)(-1)</tt> <em>must
+ not</em> be used, because it is the error return
+ sentinel value.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="sysvinit">
+ <heading>System run levels and <file>init.d</file> scripts</heading>
+
+ <sect1 id="/etc/init.d">
+ <heading>Introduction</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The <file>/etc/init.d</file> directory contains the scripts
+ executed by <prgn>init</prgn> at boot time and when the
+ init state (or "runlevel") is changed (see <manref
+ name="init" section="8">).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ There are at least two different, yet functionally
+ equivalent, ways of handling these scripts. For the sake
+ of simplicity, this document describes only the symbolic
+ link method. However, it must not be assumed by maintainer
+ scripts that this method is being used, and any automated
+ manipulation of the various runlevel behaviours by
+ maintainer scripts must be performed using
+ <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> as described below and not by
+ manually installing or removing symlinks. For information
+ on the implementation details of the other method,
+ implemented in the <tt>file-rc</tt> package, please refer
+ to the documentation of that package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These scripts are referenced by symbolic links in the
+ <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> directories. When changing
+ runlevels, <prgn>init</prgn> looks in the directory
+ <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> for the scripts it should
+ execute, where <tt><var>n</var></tt> is the runlevel that
+ is being changed to, or <tt>S</tt> for the boot-up
+ scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The names of the links all have the form
+ <file>S<var>mm</var><var>script</var></file> or
+ <file>K<var>mm</var><var>script</var></file> where
+ <var>mm</var> is a two-digit number and <var>script</var>
+ is the name of the script (this should be the same as the
+ name of the actual script in <file>/etc/init.d</file>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When <prgn>init</prgn> changes runlevel first the targets
+ of the links whose names start with a <tt>K</tt> are
+ executed, each with the single argument <tt>stop</tt>,
+ followed by the scripts prefixed with an <tt>S</tt>, each
+ with the single argument <tt>start</tt>. (The links are
+ those in the <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> directory
+ corresponding to the new runlevel.) The <tt>K</tt> links
+ are responsible for killing services and the <tt>S</tt>
+ link for starting services upon entering the runlevel.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, if we are changing from runlevel 2 to
+ runlevel 3, init will first execute all of the <tt>K</tt>
+ prefixed scripts it finds in <file>/etc/rc3.d</file>, and then
+ all of the <tt>S</tt> prefixed scripts in that directory.
+ The links starting with <tt>K</tt> will cause the
+ referred-to file to be executed with an argument of
+ <tt>stop</tt>, and the <tt>S</tt> links with an argument
+ of <tt>start</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The two-digit number <var>mm</var> is used to determine
+ the order in which to run the scripts: low-numbered links
+ have their scripts run first. For example, the
+ <tt>K20</tt> scripts will be executed before the
+ <tt>K30</tt> scripts. This is used when a certain service
+ must be started before another. For example, the name
+ server <prgn>bind</prgn> might need to be started before
+ the news server <prgn>inn</prgn> so that <prgn>inn</prgn>
+ can set up its access lists. In this case, the script
+ that starts <prgn>bind</prgn> would have a lower number
+ than the script that starts <prgn>inn</prgn> so that it
+ runs first:
+ <example compact="compact">
+/etc/rc2.d/S17bind
+/etc/rc2.d/S70inn
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The two runlevels 0 (halt) and 6 (reboot) are slightly
+ different. In these runlevels, the links with an
+ <tt>S</tt> prefix are still called after those with a
+ <tt>K</tt> prefix, but they too are called with the single
+ argument <tt>stop</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Also, if the script name ends <tt>.sh</tt>, the script
+ will be sourced in runlevel <tt>S</tt> rather that being
+ run in a forked subprocess, but will be explicitly run by
+ <prgn>sh</prgn> in all other runlevels.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Writing the scripts</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that include daemons for system services should
+ place scripts in <file>/etc/init.d</file> to start or stop
+ services at boot time or during a change of runlevel.
+ These scripts should be named
+ <file>/etc/init.d/<var>package</var></file>, and they should
+ accept one argument, saying what to do:
+
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>start</tt></tag>
+ <item>start the service,</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>stop</tt></tag>
+ <item>stop the service,</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>restart</tt></tag>
+ <item>stop and restart the service if it's already running,
+ otherwise start the service</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>reload</tt></tag>
+ <item><p>cause the configuration of the service to be
+ reloaded without actually stopping and restarting
+ the service,</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>force-reload</tt></tag>
+ <item>cause the configuration to be reloaded if the
+ service supports this, otherwise restart the
+ service.</item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ The <tt>start</tt>, <tt>stop</tt>, <tt>restart</tt>, and
+ <tt>force-reload</tt> options should be supported by all
+ scripts in <file>/etc/init.d</file>, the <tt>reload</tt>
+ option is optional.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <file>init.d</file> scripts should ensure that they will
+ behave sensibly if invoked with <tt>start</tt> when the
+ service is already running, or with <tt>stop</tt> when it
+ isn't, and that they don't kill unfortunately-named user
+ processes. The best way to achieve this is usually to use
+ <prgn>start-stop-daemon</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a service reloads its configuration automatically (as
+ in the case of <prgn>cron</prgn>, for example), the
+ <tt>reload</tt> option of the <file>init.d</file> script
+ should behave as if the configuration has been reloaded
+ successfully.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <file>/etc/init.d</file> scripts must be treated as
+ configuration files, either (if they are present in the
+ package, that is, in the .deb file) by marking them as
+ <tt>conffile</tt>s, or, (if they do not exist in the .deb)
+ by managing them correctly in the maintainer scripts (see
+ <ref id="config-files">). This is important since we want
+ to give the local system administrator the chance to adapt
+ the scripts to the local system, e.g., to disable a
+ service without de-installing the package, or to specify
+ some special command line options when starting a service,
+ while making sure her changes aren't lost during the next
+ package upgrade.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These scripts should not fail obscurely when the
+ configuration files remain but the package has been
+ removed, as configuration files remain on the system after
+ the package has been removed. Only when <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ is executed with the <tt>--purge</tt> option will
+ configuration files be removed. In particular, as the
+ <file>/etc/init.d/<var>package</var></file> script itself is
+ usually a <tt>conffile</tt>, it will remain on the system
+ if the package is removed but not purged. Therefore, you
+ should include a <tt>test</tt> statement at the top of the
+ script, like this:
+ <example compact="compact">
+test -f <var>program-executed-later-in-script</var> || exit 0
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Often there are some variables in the <file>init.d</file>
+ scripts whose values control the behaviour of the scripts,
+ and which a system administrator is likely to want to
+ change. As the scripts themselves are frequently
+ <tt>conffile</tt>s, modifying them requires that the
+ administrator merge in their changes each time the package
+ is upgraded and the <tt>conffile</tt> changes. To ease
+ the burden on the system administrator, such configurable
+ values should not be placed directly in the script.
+ Instead, they should be placed in a file in
+ <file>/etc/default</file>, which typically will have the same
+ base name as the <file>init.d</file> script. This extra file
+ should be sourced by the script when the script runs. It
+ must contain only variable settings and comments in POSIX
+ <prgn>sh</prgn> format. It may either be a
+ <tt>conffile</tt> or a configuration file maintained by
+ the package maintainer scripts. See <ref id="config-files">
+ for more details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ To ensure that vital configurable values are always
+ available, the <file>init.d</file> script should set default
+ values for each of the shell variables it uses, either
+ before sourcing the <file>/etc/default/</file> file or
+ afterwards using something like the <tt>:
+ ${VAR:=default}</tt> syntax. Also, the <file>init.d</file>
+ script must behave sensibly and not fail if the
+ <file>/etc/default</file> file is deleted.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Interfacing with the initscript system</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Maintainers should use the abstraction layer provided by
+ the <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> and <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn>
+ programs to deal with initscripts in their packages'
+ scripts such as <prgn>postinst</prgn>, <prgn>prerm</prgn>
+ and <prgn>postrm</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Directly managing the /etc/rc?.d links and directly
+ invoking the <file>/etc/init.d/</file> initscripts should
+ be done only by packages providing the initscript
+ subsystem (such as <prgn>sysvinit</prgn> and
+ <prgn>file-rc</prgn>).
+ </p>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <heading>Managing the links</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The program <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> is provided for
+ package maintainers to arrange for the proper creation and
+ removal of <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> symbolic links,
+ or their functional equivalent if another method is being
+ used. This may be used by maintainers in their packages'
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> and <prgn>postrm</prgn> scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You must not include any <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file>
+ symbolic links in the actual archive or manually create or
+ remove the symbolic links in maintainer scripts; you must
+ use the <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> program instead. (The
+ former will fail if an alternative method of maintaining
+ runlevel information is being used.) You must not include
+ the <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> directories themselves
+ in the archive either. (Only the <tt>sysvinit</tt>
+ package may do so.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ By default <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> will start services in
+ each of the multi-user state runlevels (2, 3, 4, and 5)
+ and stop them in the halt runlevel (0), the single-user
+ runlevel (1) and the reboot runlevel (6). The system
+ administrator will have the opportunity to customize
+ runlevels by simply adding, moving, or removing the
+ symbolic links in <file>/etc/rc<var>n</var>.d</file> if
+ symbolic links are being used, or by modifying
+ <file>/etc/runlevel.conf</file> if the <tt>file-rc</tt> method
+ is being used.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ To get the default behavior for your package, put in your
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> script
+ <example compact="compact">
+ update-rc.d <var>package</var> defaults
+ </example>
+ and in your <prgn>postrm</prgn>
+ <example compact="compact">
+ if [ "$1" = purge ]; then
+ update-rc.d <var>package</var> remove
+ fi
+ </example>. Note that if your package changes runlevels
+ or priority, you may have to remove and recreate the links,
+ since otherwise the old links may persist. Refer to the
+ documentation of <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This will use a default sequence number of 20. If it does
+ not matter when or in which order the <file>init.d</file>
+ script is run, use this default. If it does, then you
+ should talk to the maintainer of the <prgn>sysvinit</prgn>
+ package or post to <tt>debian-devel</tt>, and they will
+ help you choose a number.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For more information about using <tt>update-rc.d</tt>,
+ please consult its manpage <manref name="update-rc.d"
+ section="8">.
+ </p>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <heading>Running initscripts</heading>
+ <p>
+ The program <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn> is provided to make
+ it easier for package maintainers to properly invoke an
+ initscript, obeying runlevel and other locally-defined
+ constraints that might limit a package's right to start,
+ stop and otherwise manage services. This program may be
+ used by maintainers in their packages' scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The use of <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn> to invoke the
+ <file>/etc/init.d/*</file> initscripts is strongly
+ recommended<footnote>
+ In the future, the use of invoke-rc.d to invoke
+ initscripts shall be made mandatory. Maintainers are
+ advised to switch to invoke-rc.d as soon as
+ possible.
+ </footnote>, instead of calling them directly.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ By default, <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn> will pass any
+ action requests (start, stop, reload, restart...) to the
+ <file>/etc/init.d</file> script, filtering out requests
+ to start or restart a service out of its intended
+ runlevels.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Most packages will simply need to change:
+ <example compact="compact">/etc/init.d/<package>
+ <action></example> in their <prgn>postinst</prgn>
+ and <prgn>prerm</prgn> scripts to:
+ <example compact="compact">
+ if [ -x /usr/sbin/invoke-rc.d ] ; then
+ invoke-rc.d <var>package</var> <action>
+ else
+ /etc/init.d/<var>package</var> <action>
+ fi
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A package should register its initscript services using
+ <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> before it tries to invoke them
+ using <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn>. Invocation of
+ unregistered services may fail.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For more information about using
+ <prgn>invoke-rc.d</prgn>, please consult its manpage
+ <manref name="invoke-rc.d" section="8">.
+ </p>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Boot-time initialization</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ There used to be another directory, <file>/etc/rc.boot</file>,
+ which contained scripts which were run once per machine
+ boot. This has been deprecated in favour of links from
+ <file>/etc/rcS.d</file> to files in <file>/etc/init.d</file> as
+ described in <ref id="/etc/init.d">. Packages must not
+ place files in <file>/etc/rc.boot</file>.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Example</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The <prgn>bind</prgn> DNS (nameserver) package wants to
+ make sure that the nameserver is running in multiuser
+ runlevels, and is properly shut down with the system. It
+ puts a script in <file>/etc/init.d</file>, naming the script
+ appropriately <tt>bind</tt>. As you can see, the script
+ interprets the argument <tt>reload</tt> to send the
+ nameserver a <tt>HUP</tt> signal (causing it to reload its
+ configuration); this way the system administrator can say
+ <tt>/etc/init.d/bind reload</tt> to reload the name
+ server. The script has one configurable value, which can
+ be used to pass parameters to the named program at
+ startup; this value is read from
+ <file>/etc/default/bind</file> (see below).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <example compact="compact">
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# Original version by Robert Leslie
+# <rob@mars.org>, edited by iwj and cs
+
+test -x /usr/sbin/named || exit 0
+
+# Source defaults file.
+PARAMS=''
+if [ -f /etc/default/bind ]; then
+ . /etc/default/bind
+fi
+
+
+case "$1" in
+start)
+ echo -n "Starting domain name service: named"
+ start-stop-daemon --start --quiet --exec /usr/sbin/named \
+ -- $PARAMS
+ echo "."
+ ;;
+stop)
+ echo -n "Stopping domain name service: named"
+ start-stop-daemon --stop --quiet \
+ --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
+ echo "."
+ ;;
+restart)
+ echo -n "Restarting domain name service: named"
+ start-stop-daemon --stop --quiet \
+ --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
+ start-stop-daemon --start --verbose --exec /usr/sbin/named \
+ -- $PARAMS
+ echo "."
+ ;;
+force-reload|reload)
+ echo -n "Reloading configuration of domain name service: named"
+ start-stop-daemon --stop --signal 1 --quiet \
+ --pidfile /var/run/named.pid --exec /usr/sbin/named
+ echo "."
+ ;;
+*)
+ echo "Usage: /etc/init.d/bind " \
+ " {start|stop|restart|reload|force-reload}" >&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+esac
+
+exit 0
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Complementing the above init script is a configuration
+ file <file>/etc/default/bind</file>, which contains
+ configurable parameters used by the script. This would be
+ created by the <prgn>postinst</prgn> script if it was not
+ already present, and removed on purge by the
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> script.
+ <example compact="compact">
+# Specified parameters to pass to named. See named(8).
+# You may uncomment the following line, and edit to taste.
+#PARAMS="-u nobody"
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Another example on which you can base your
+ <file>/etc/init.d</file> scripts is found in
+ <file>/etc/init.d/skeleton</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If this package is happy with the default setup from
+ <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn>, namely an ordering number of 20
+ and having named running in all runlevels, it can say in
+ its <prgn>postinst</prgn>:
+ <example compact="compact">
+update-rc.d bind defaults >/dev/null
+ </example>
+ And in its <prgn>postrm</prgn>, to remove the links when the
+ package is purged:
+ <example compact="compact">
+if [ "$1" = purge ]; then
+ update-rc.d bind remove >/dev/null
+fi
+ </example>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Console messages from <file>init.d</file> scripts</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This section describes the formats to be used for messages
+ written to standard output by the <file>/etc/init.d</file>
+ scripts. The intent is to improve the consistency of
+ Debian's startup and shutdown look and feel. For this
+ reason, please look very carefully at the details. We want
+ the messages to have the same format in terms of wording,
+ spaces, punctuation and case of letters.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Here is a list of overall rules that you should use when you
+ create output messages. They can be useful if you have a
+ non-standard message that is not covered specifically in the
+ sections below.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ Every message should fit in one line (fewer than 80
+ characters), start with a capital letter and end with
+ a period (<tt>.</tt>) and line feed (<tt>"\n"</tt>).
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If you want to express that the computer is working on
+ something (that is, performing a specific task, not
+ starting or stopping a program), we use an "ellipsis"
+ (three dots: <tt>...</tt>). Note that we don't insert
+ spaces before or after the dots. If the task has been
+ completed we write <tt>done.</tt> and a line feed.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Design your messages as if the computer is telling you
+ what he is doing (let him be polite :-), but don't
+ mention "him" directly. For example, if you think of
+ saying
+ <example compact="compact">
+I'm starting network daemons: nfsd mountd.
+ </example>
+ just say
+ <example compact="compact">
+Starting network daemons: nfsd mountd.
+ </example>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ There are standard message formats for the following
+ situations. They should be used by the <tt>init.d</tt>
+ scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ <p>When daemons are started</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If your script starts one or more daemons, the output
+ should look like this (a single line, no leading
+ spaces):
+ <example compact="compact">
+Starting <var>description</var>: <var>daemon-1</var> ... <var>daemon-n</var>.
+ </example>
+ The <var>description</var> should describe the
+ subsystem the daemon or set of daemons are part of,
+ while <var>daemon-1</var> up to <var>daemon-n</var>
+ denote each daemon's name (typically the file name of
+ the program).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, the output of <file>/etc/init.d/lpd</file>
+ would look like:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Starting printer spooler: lpd.
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This can be achieved by saying
+ <example compact="compact">
+echo -n "Starting printer spooler: lpd"
+start-stop-daemon --start --quiet --exec /usr/sbin/lpd
+echo "."
+ </example>
+ in the script. If you have more than one daemon to
+ start, you should do the following:
+ <example compact="compact">
+echo -n "Starting remote file system services:"
+echo -n " nfsd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet nfsd
+echo -n " mountd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet mountd
+echo -n " ugidd"; start-stop-daemon --start --quiet ugidd
+echo "."
+ </example>
+ This makes it possible for the user to see what takes
+ so long and when the final daemon has been started.
+ You should be careful where to put spaces: in the
+ example above the system administrator can easily
+ comment out a line if he don't wants to start a
+ specific daemon, while the displayed message still
+ looks good.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>When a system parameter is being set</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you have to set up different system parameters
+ during the system boot, you should use this format:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Setting <var>parameter</var> to "<var>value</var>".
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You can use a statement such as the following to get
+ the quotes right:
+ <example compact="compact">
+echo "Setting DNS domainname to \"$domainname\"."
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that the same symbol (<tt>"</tt>) is used for the left
+ and right quotation marks. A grave accent (<tt>`</tt>) is
+ not a quote character; neither is an apostrophe
+ (<tt>'</tt>).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>When a daemon is stopped or restarted</p>
+
+ <p>
+ When you stop or restart a daemon, you should issue a
+ message identical to the startup message, except that
+ <tt>Starting</tt> is replaced with <tt>Stopping</tt>
+ or <tt>Restarting</tt> respectively.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, stopping the printer daemon will like
+ like this:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Stopping printer spooler: lpd.
+ </example>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>When something is executed</p>
+
+ <p>
+ There are several examples where you have to run a
+ program at system startup or shutdown to perform a
+ specific task, for example, setting the system's clock
+ using <prgn>netdate</prgn> or killing all processes
+ when the system shuts down. Your message should look
+ like this:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Doing something very useful...done.
+ </example>
+ You should print the <tt>done.</tt> immediately after
+ the job has been completed, so that the user is
+ informed why she has to wait. You can get this
+ behavior by saying
+ <example compact="compact">
+echo -n "Doing something very useful..."
+do_something
+echo "done."
+ </example>
+ in your script.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>When the configuration is reloaded</p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a daemon is forced to reload its configuration
+ files you should use the following format:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Reloading <var>description</var> configuration...done.
+ </example>
+ where <var>description</var> is the same as in the
+ daemon starting message.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Cron jobs</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must not modify the configuration file
+ <file>/etc/crontab</file>, and they must not modify the files in
+ <file>/var/spool/cron/crontabs</file>.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package wants to install a job that has to be executed
+ via cron, it should place a file with the name of the
+ package in one or more of the following directories:
+ <example compact="compact">
+/etc/cron.daily
+/etc/cron.weekly
+/etc/cron.monthly
+ </example>
+ As these directory names imply, the files within them are
+ executed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis,
+ respectively. The exact times are listed in
+ <file>/etc/crontab</file>.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ All files installed in any of these directories must be
+ scripts (e.g., shell scripts or Perl scripts) so that they
+ can easily be modified by the local system administrator.
+ In addition, they should be treated as configuration
+ files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a certain job has to be executed more frequently than
+ daily, the package should install a file
+ <file>/etc/cron.d/<var>package</var></file>. This file uses the
+ same syntax as <file>/etc/crontab</file> and is processed by
+ <prgn>cron</prgn> automatically. The file must also be
+ treated as a configuration file. (Note that entries in the
+ <file>/etc/cron.d</file> directory are not handled by
+ <prgn>anacron</prgn>. Thus, you should only use this
+ directory for jobs which may be skipped if the system is not
+ running.)</p>
+
+ <p>
+ The scripts or crontab entries in these directories should
+ check if all necessary programs are installed before they
+ try to execute them. Otherwise, problems will arise when a
+ package was removed but not purged since configuration files
+ are kept on the system in this situation.</p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="menus">
+ <heading>Menus</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian <tt>menu</tt> package provides a standard
+ interface between packages providing applications and
+ documents, and <em>menu programs</em> (either X window
+ managers or text-based menu programs such as
+ <prgn>pdmenu</prgn>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All packages that provide applications that need not be
+ passed any special command line arguments for normal
+ operation should register a menu entry for those
+ applications, so that users of the <tt>menu</tt> package
+ will automatically get menu entries in their window
+ managers, as well in shells like <tt>pdmenu</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Menu entries should follow the current menu policy.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The menu policy can be found in the <tt>menu-policy</tt>
+ files in the <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ They are also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/menu-policy/"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/menu-policy/"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/menu-policy.txt.gz"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/menu-policy.txt.gz"></tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Please also refer to the <em>Debian Menu System</em>
+ documentation that comes with the <tt>menu</tt> package for
+ information about how to register your applications and web
+ documents.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="mime">
+ <heading>Multimedia handlers</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions, RFCs 2045-2049)
+ is a mechanism for encoding files and data streams and
+ providing meta-information about them, in particular their
+ type (e.g. audio or video) and format (e.g. PNG, HTML,
+ MP3).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Registration of MIME type handlers allows programs like mail
+ user agents and web browsers to to invoke these handlers to
+ view, edit or display MIME types they don't support
+ directly.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages which provide the ability to view/show/play,
+ compose, edit or print MIME types should register themselves
+ as such following the current MIME support policy.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The MIME support policy can be found in the <tt>mime-policy</tt>
+ files in the <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ They are also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/mime-policy/"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/mime-policy/"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/mime-policy.txt.gz"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/mime-policy.txt.gz"></tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Keyboard configuration</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ To achieve a consistent keyboard configuration so that all
+ applications interpret a keyboard event the same way, all
+ programs in the Debian distribution must be configured to
+ comply with the following guidelines.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The following keys must have the specified interpretations:
+
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt><--</tt></tag>
+ <item>delete the character to the left of the cursor</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Delete</tt></tag>
+ <item>delete the character to the right of the cursor</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Control+H</tt></tag>
+ <item>emacs: the help prefix</item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ The interpretation of any keyboard events should be
+ independent of the terminal that is used, be it a virtual
+ console, an X terminal emulator, an rlogin/telnet session,
+ etc.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The following list explains how the different programs
+ should be set up to achieve this:
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ <tt><--</tt> generates <tt>KB_BackSpace</tt> in X.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <tt>Delete</tt> generates <tt>KB_Delete</tt> in X.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ X translations are set up to make
+ <tt>KB_Backspace</tt> generate ASCII DEL, and to make
+ <tt>KB_Delete</tt> generate <tt>ESC [ 3 ~</tt> (this
+ is the vt220 escape code for the "delete character"
+ key). This must be done by loading the X resources
+ using <prgn>xrdb</prgn> on all local X displays, not
+ using the application defaults, so that the
+ translation resources used correspond to the
+ <prgn>xmodmap</prgn> settings.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ The Linux console is configured to make
+ <tt><--</tt> generate DEL, and <tt>Delete</tt>
+ generate <tt>ESC [ 3 ~</tt>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ X applications are configured so that <tt><</tt>
+ deletes left, and <tt>Delete</tt> deletes right. Motif
+ applications already work like this.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Terminals should have <tt>stty erase ^?</tt> .
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ The <tt>xterm</tt> terminfo entry should have <tt>ESC
+ [ 3 ~</tt> for <tt>kdch1</tt>, just as for
+ <tt>TERM=linux</tt> and <tt>TERM=vt220</tt>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Emacs is programmed to map <tt>KB_Backspace</tt> or
+ the <tt>stty erase</tt> character to
+ <tt>delete-backward-char</tt>, and <tt>KB_Delete</tt>
+ or <tt>kdch1</tt> to <tt>delete-forward-char</tt>, and
+ <tt>^H</tt> to <tt>help</tt> as always.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Other applications use the <tt>stty erase</tt>
+ character and <tt>kdch1</tt> for the two delete keys,
+ with ASCII DEL being "delete previous character" and
+ <tt>kdch1</tt> being "delete character under
+ cursor".
+ </item>
+
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This will solve the problem except for the following
+ cases:
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ Some terminals have a <tt><--</tt> key that cannot
+ be made to produce anything except <tt>^H</tt>. On
+ these terminals Emacs help will be unavailable on
+ <tt>^H</tt> (assuming that the <tt>stty erase</tt>
+ character takes precedence in Emacs, and has been set
+ correctly). <tt>M-x help</tt> or <tt>F1</tt> (if
+ available) can be used instead.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Some operating systems use <tt>^H</tt> for <tt>stty
+ erase</tt>. However, modern telnet versions and all
+ rlogin versions propagate <tt>stty</tt> settings, and
+ almost all UNIX versions honour <tt>stty erase</tt>.
+ Where the <tt>stty</tt> settings are not propagated
+ correctly, things can be made to work by using
+ <tt>stty</tt> manually.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Some systems (including previous Debian versions) use
+ <prgn>xmodmap</prgn> to arrange for both
+ <tt><--</tt> and <tt>Delete</tt> to generate
+ <tt>KB_Delete</tt>. We can change the behavior of
+ their X clients using the same X resources that we use
+ to do it for our own clients, or configure our clients
+ using their resources when things are the other way
+ around. On displays configured like this
+ <tt>Delete</tt> will not work, but <tt><--</tt>
+ will.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Some operating systems have different <tt>kdch1</tt>
+ settings in their <tt>terminfo</tt> database for
+ <tt>xterm</tt> and others. On these systems the
+ <tt>Delete</tt> key will not work correctly when you
+ log in from a system conforming to our policy, but
+ <tt><--</tt> will.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Environment variables</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ A program must not depend on environment variables to get
+ reasonable defaults. (That's because these environment
+ variables would have to be set in a system-wide
+ configuration file like <file>/etc/profile</file>, which is not
+ supported by all shells.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a program usually depends on environment variables for its
+ configuration, the program should be changed to fall back to
+ a reasonable default configuration if these environment
+ variables are not present. If this cannot be done easily
+ (e.g., if the source code of a non-free program is not
+ available), the program must be replaced by a small
+ "wrapper" shell script which sets the environment variables
+ if they are not already defined, and calls the original program.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Here is an example of a wrapper script for this purpose:
+
+ <example compact="compact">
+#!/bin/sh
+BAR=${BAR:-/var/lib/fubar}
+export BAR
+exec /usr/lib/foo/foo "$@"
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Furthermore, as <file>/etc/profile</file> is a configuration
+ file of the <prgn>base-files</prgn> package, other packages must not
+ put any environment variables or other commands into that
+ file.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ </chapt>
+
+
+ <chapt id="files">
+ <heading>Files</heading>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Binaries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Two different packages must not install programs with
+ different functionality but with the same filenames. (The
+ case of two programs having the same functionality but
+ different implementations is handled via "alternatives" or
+ the "Conflicts" mechanism. See <ref id="maintscripts"> and
+ <ref id="conflicts"> respectively.) If this case happens,
+ one of the programs must be renamed. The maintainers should
+ report this to the <tt>debian-devel</tt> mailing list and
+ try to find a consensus about which program will have to be
+ renamed. If a consensus cannot be reached, <em>both</em>
+ programs must be renamed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ By default, when a package is being built, any binaries
+ created should include debugging information, as well as
+ being compiled with optimization. You should also turn on
+ as many reasonable compilation warnings as possible; this
+ makes life easier for porters, who can then look at build
+ logs for possible problems. For the C programming language,
+ this means the following compilation parameters should be
+ used:
+ <example compact="compact">
+CC = gcc
+CFLAGS = -O2 -g -Wall # sane warning options vary between programs
+LDFLAGS = # none
+install -s # (or use strip on the files in debian/tmp)
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that by default all installed binaries should be stripped,
+ either by using the <tt>-s</tt> flag to
+ <prgn>install</prgn>, or by calling <prgn>strip</prgn> on
+ the binaries after they have been copied into
+ <file>debian/tmp</file> but before the tree is made into a
+ package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Although binaries in the build tree should be compiled with
+ debugging information by default, it can often be difficult
+ to debug programs if they are also subjected to compiler
+ optimization. For this reason, it is recommended to support
+ the standardized environment
+ variable <tt>DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS</tt>. This variable can
+ contain several flags to change how a package is compiled
+ and built.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <taglist>
+ <tag>noopt</tag>
+ <item>
+ The presence of this string means that the package
+ should be complied with a minimum of optimization.
+ For C programs, it is best to add <tt>-O0</tt>
+ to <tt>CFLAGS</tt> (although this is usually the
+ default). Some programs might fail to build or run at
+ this level of optimization; it may be necessary to
+ use <tt>-O1</tt>, for example.
+ </item>
+ <tag>nostrip</tag>
+ <item>
+ This string means that the debugging symbols should
+ not be stripped from the binary during installation,
+ so that debugging information may be included in the package.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The following makefile snippet is an example of how one may
+ implement the build options; you will probably have to
+ massage this example in order to make it work for your
+ package.
+ <example compact="compact">
+CFLAGS = -Wall -g
+INSTALL = install
+INSTALL_FILE = $(INSTALL) -p -o root -g root -m 644
+INSTALL_PROGRAM = $(INSTALL) -p -o root -g root -m 755
+INSTALL_SCRIPT = $(INSTALL) -p -o root -g root -m 755
+INSTALL_DIR = $(INSTALL) -p -d -o root -g root -m 755
+
+ifneq (,$(findstring noopt,$(DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS)))
+CFLAGS += -O0
+else
+CFLAGS += -O2
+endif
+ifeq (,$(findstring nostrip,$(DEB_BUILD_OPTIONS)))
+INSTALL_PROGRAM += -s
+endif
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is up to the package maintainer to decide what
+ compilation options are best for the package. Certain
+ binaries (such as computationally-intensive programs) will
+ function better with certain flags (<tt>-O3</tt>, for
+ example); feel free to use them. Please use good judgment
+ here. Don't use flags for the sake of it; only use them
+ if there is good reason to do so. Feel free to override
+ the upstream author's ideas about which compilation
+ options are best: they are often inappropriate for our
+ environment.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect id="libraries">
+ <heading>Libraries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The shared version of a library must be compiled with
+ <tt>-fPIC</tt>, and the static version must not be. In other
+ words, each source unit (<tt>*.c</tt>, for example, for C files)
+ will need to be compiled twice.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You must specify the gcc option <tt>-D_REENTRANT</tt>
+ when building a library (either static or shared) to make
+ the library compatible with LinuxThreads.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All installed shared libraries should be stripped with
+ <example compact="compact">
+strip --strip-unneeded <var>your-lib</var>
+ </example>
+ (The option <tt>--strip-unneeded</tt> makes
+ <prgn>strip</prgn> remove only the symbols which aren't
+ needed for relocation processing.) Shared libraries can
+ function perfectly well when stripped, since the symbols for
+ dynamic linking are in a separate part of the ELF object
+ file.<footnote>
+ You might also want to use the options
+ <tt>--remove-section=.comment</tt> and
+ <tt>--remove-section=.note</tt> on both shared libraries
+ and executables, and <tt>--strip-debug</tt> on static
+ libraries.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that under some circumstances it may be useful to
+ install a shared library unstripped, for example when
+ building a separate package to support debugging.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Shared object files (often <file>.so</file> files) that are not
+ public libraries, that is, they are not meant to be linked
+ to by third party executables (binaries of other packages),
+ should be installed in subdirectories of the
+ <file>/usr/lib</file> directory. Such files are exempt from the
+ rules that govern ordinary shared libraries, except that
+ they must not be installed executable and should be
+ stripped.<footnote>
+ A common example are the so-called "plug-ins",
+ internal shared objects that are dynamically loaded by
+ programs using <manref name="dlopen" section="3">.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages containing shared libraries that may be linked to
+ by other packages' binaries, but which for some
+ <em>compelling</em> reason can not be installed in
+ <file>/usr/lib</file> directory, may install the shared library
+ files in subdirectories of the <file>/usr/lib</file> directory,
+ in which case they should arrange to add that directory in
+ <file>/etc/ld.so.conf</file> in the package's post-installation
+ script, and remove it in the package's post-removal script.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ An ever increasing number of packages are using
+ <prgn>libtool</prgn> to do their linking. The latest GNU
+ libtools (>= 1.3a) can take advantage of the metadata in the
+ installed <prgn>libtool</prgn> archive files (<file>*.la</file>
+ files). The main advantage of <prgn>libtool</prgn>'s
+ <file>.la</file> files is that it allows <prgn>libtool</prgn> to
+ store and subsequently access metadata with respect to the
+ libraries it builds. <prgn>libtool</prgn> will search for
+ those files, which contain a lot of useful information about
+ a library (such as library dependency information for static
+ linking). Also, they're <em>essential</em> for programs
+ using <tt>libltdl</tt>.<footnote>
+ Although <prgn>libtool</prgn> is fully capable of
+ linking against shared libraries which don't have
+ <tt>.la</tt> files, as it is a mere shell script it can
+ add considerably to the build time of a
+ <prgn>libtool</prgn>-using package if that shell script
+ has to derive all this information from first principles
+ for each library every time it is linked. With the
+ advent of <prgn>libtool</prgn> version 1.4 (and to a
+ lesser extent <prgn>libtool</prgn> version 1.3), the
+ <file>.la</file> files also store information about
+ inter-library dependencies which cannot necessarily be
+ derived after the <file>.la</file> file is deleted.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that use <prgn>libtool</prgn> to create shared
+ libraries should include the <file>.la</file> files in the
+ <tt>-dev</tt> package, unless the package relies on
+ <tt>libtool</tt>'s <tt>libltdl</tt> library, in which case
+ the <tt>.la</tt> files must go in the run-time library
+ package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You must make sure that you use only released versions of
+ shared libraries to build your packages; otherwise other
+ users will not be able to run your binaries
+ properly. Producing source packages that depend on
+ unreleased compilers is also usually a bad
+ idea.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Shared libraries</heading>
+ <p>
+ This section has moved to <ref id="sharedlibs">.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect id="scripts">
+ <heading>Scripts</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ All command scripts, including the package maintainer
+ scripts inside the package and used by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>,
+ should have a <tt>#!</tt> line naming the shell to be used
+ to interpret them.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the case of Perl scripts this should be
+ <tt>#!/usr/bin/perl</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Shell scripts (<prgn>sh</prgn> and <prgn>bash</prgn>)
+ should almost certainly start with <tt>set -e</tt> so that
+ errors are detected. Every script should use
+ <tt>set -e</tt> or check the exit status of <em>every</em>
+ command.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The standard shell interpreter <file>/bin/sh</file> can be a
+ symbolic link to any POSIX compatible shell, if <tt>echo
+ -n</tt> does not generate a newline.<footnote>
+ Debian policy specifies POSIX behavior for
+ <file>/bin/sh</file>, but <tt>echo -n</tt> has widespread
+ use in the Linux community (in particular including this
+ policy, the Linux kernel source, many Debian scripts,
+ etc.). This <tt>echo -n</tt> mechanism is valid but not
+ required under POSIX, hence this explicit addition.
+ Also, rumour has it that this shall be mandated under
+ the LSB anyway.
+ </footnote>
+ Thus, shell scripts specifying <file>/bin/sh</file> as
+ interpreter should only use POSIX features. If a script
+ requires non-POSIX features from the shell interpreter, the
+ appropriate shell must be specified in the first line of the
+ script (e.g., <tt>#!/bin/bash</tt>) and the package must
+ depend on the package providing the shell (unless the shell
+ package is marked "Essential", as in the case of
+ <prgn>bash</prgn>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You may wish to restrict your script to POSIX features when
+ possible so that it may use <file>/bin/sh</file> as its
+ interpreter. If your script works with <prgn>dash</prgn>
+ (originally called <prgn>ash</prgn>), it's probably POSIX
+ compliant, but if you are in doubt, use
+ <file>/bin/bash</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Perl scripts should check for errors when making any
+ system calls, including <tt>open</tt>, <tt>print</tt>,
+ <tt>close</tt>, <tt>rename</tt> and <tt>system</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>csh</prgn> and <prgn>tcsh</prgn> should be avoided as
+ scripting languages. See <em>Csh Programming Considered
+ Harmful</em>, one of the <tt>comp.unix.*</tt> FAQs, which
+ can be found at <url
+ id="http://language.perl.com/versus/csh.whynot">.<footnote>
+ It can also be found on
+ <url id="http://www.cpan.org/doc/FMTEYEWTK/versus/csh.whynot">
+ or on the ftp site <ftpsite>ftp.cpan.org</ftpsite> as
+ <ftppath>/pub/perl/CPAN/doc/FMTEYEWTK/versus/csh.whynot</ftppath>.
+ </footnote>
+ If an upstream package comes with <prgn>csh</prgn> scripts
+ then you must make sure that they start with
+ <tt>#!/bin/csh</tt> and make your package depend on the
+ <prgn>c-shell</prgn> virtual package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Any scripts which create files in world-writeable
+ directories (e.g., in <file>/tmp</file>) must use a
+ mechanism which will fail if a file with the same name
+ already exists.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian base system provides the <prgn>tempfile</prgn>
+ and <prgn>mktemp</prgn> utilities for use by scripts for
+ this purpose.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Symbolic links</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ In general, symbolic links within a top-level directory
+ should be relative, and symbolic links pointing from one
+ top-level directory into another should be absolute. (A
+ top-level directory is a sub-directory of the root
+ directory <file>/</file>.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, symbolic links should be specified as short as
+ possible, i.e., link targets like <file>foo/../bar</file> are
+ deprecated.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that when creating a relative link using
+ <prgn>ln</prgn> it is not necessary for the target of the
+ link to exist relative to the working directory you're
+ running <prgn>ln</prgn> from, nor is it necessary to change
+ directory to the directory where the link is to be made.
+ Simply include the string that should appear as the target
+ of the link (this will be a pathname relative to the
+ directory in which the link resides) as the first argument
+ to <prgn>ln</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, in your <prgn>Makefile</prgn> or
+ <file>debian/rules</file>, you can do things like:
+ <example compact="compact">
+ln -fs gcc $(prefix)/bin/cc
+ln -fs gcc debian/tmp/usr/bin/cc
+ln -fs ../sbin/sendmail $(prefix)/bin/runq
+ln -fs ../sbin/sendmail debian/tmp/usr/bin/runq
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A symbolic link pointing to a compressed file should always
+ have the same file extension as the referenced file. (For
+ example, if a file <file>foo.gz</file> is referenced by a
+ symbolic link, the filename of the link has to end with
+ "<file>.gz</file>" too, as in <file>bar.gz</file>.)
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Device files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must not include device files in the package file
+ tree.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package needs any special device files that are not
+ included in the base system, it must call
+ <prgn>MAKEDEV</prgn> in the <prgn>postinst</prgn> script,
+ after notifying the user<footnote>
+ This notification could be done via a (low-priority)
+ debconf message, or an echo (printf) statement.
+ </footnote>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must not remove any device files in the
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> or any other script. This is left to the
+ system administrator.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Debian uses the serial devices
+ <file>/dev/ttyS*</file>. Programs using the old
+ <file>/dev/cu*</file> devices should be changed to use
+ <file>/dev/ttyS*</file>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="config-files">
+ <heading>Configuration files</heading>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Definitions</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <taglist>
+ <tag>configuration file</tag>
+ <item>
+ A file that affects the operation of a program, or
+ provides site- or host-specific information, or
+ otherwise customizes the behavior of a program.
+ Typically, configuration files are intended to be
+ modified by the system administrator (if needed or
+ desired) to conform to local policy or to provide
+ more useful site-specific behavior.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>conffile</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ A file listed in a package's <tt>conffiles</tt>
+ file, and is treated specially by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ (see <ref id="configdetails">).
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The distinction between these two is important; they are
+ not interchangeable concepts. Almost all
+ <tt>conffile</tt>s are configuration files, but many
+ configuration files are not <tt>conffiles</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that a script that embeds configuration information
+ (such as most of the files in <file>/etc/default</file> and
+ <file>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</file>) is de-facto a
+ configuration file and should be treated as such.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Location</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Any configuration files created or used by your package
+ must reside in <file>/etc</file>. If there are several,
+ consider creating a subdirectory of <file>/etc</file>
+ named after your package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If your package creates or uses configuration files
+ outside of <file>/etc</file>, and it is not feasible to modify
+ the package to use <file>/etc</file> directly, put the files
+ in <file>/etc</file> and create symbolic links to those files
+ from the location that the package requires.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Behavior</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Configuration file handling must conform to the following
+ behavior:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ local changes must be preserved during a package
+ upgrade, and
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ configuration files must be preserved when the
+ package is removed, and only deleted when the
+ package is purged.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The easy way to achieve this behavior is to make the
+ configuration file a <tt>conffile</tt>. This is
+ appropriate only if it is possible to distribute a default
+ version that will work for most installations, although
+ some system administrators may choose to modify it. This
+ implies that the default version will be part of the
+ package distribution, and must not be modified by the
+ maintainer scripts during installation (or at any other
+ time).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In order to ensure that local changes are preserved
+ correctly, no package may contain or make hard links to
+ conffiles.<footnote>
+ Rationale: There are two problems with hard links.
+ The first is that some editors break the link while
+ editing one of the files, so that the two files may
+ unwittingly become unlinked and different. The second
+ is that <prgn>dpkg</prgn> might break the hard link
+ while upgrading <tt>conffile</tt>s.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The other way to do it is via the maintainer scripts. In
+ this case, the configuration file must not be listed as a
+ <tt>conffile</tt> and must not be part of the package
+ distribution. If the existence of a file is required for
+ the package to be sensibly configured it is the
+ responsibility of the package maintainer to provide
+ maintainer scripts which correctly create, update and
+ maintain the file and remove it on purge. (See <ref
+ id="maintainerscripts"> for more information.) These
+ scripts must be idempotent (i.e., must work correctly if
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> needs to re-run them due to errors
+ during installation or removal), must cope with all the
+ variety of ways <prgn>dpkg</prgn> can call maintainer
+ scripts, must not overwrite or otherwise mangle the user's
+ configuration without asking, must not ask unnecessary
+ questions (particularly during upgrades), and otherwise be
+ good citizens.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The scripts are not required to configure every possible
+ option for the package, but only those necessary to get
+ the package running on a given system. Ideally the
+ sysadmin should not have to do any configuration other
+ than that done (semi-)automatically by the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> script.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A common practice is to create a script called
+ <file><var>package</var>-configure</file> and have the
+ package's <prgn>postinst</prgn> call it if and only if the
+ configuration file does not already exist. In certain
+ cases it is useful for there to be an example or template
+ file which the maintainer scripts use. Such files should
+ be in <file>/usr/share/<var>package</var></file> or
+ <file>/usr/lib/<var>package</var></file> (depending on whether
+ they are architecture-independent or not). There should
+ be symbolic links to them from
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/examples</file> if
+ they are examples, and should be perfectly ordinary
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>-handled files (<em>not</em>
+ configuration files).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These two styles of configuration file handling must
+ not be mixed, for that way lies madness:
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will ask about overwriting the file
+ every time the package is upgraded.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Sharing configuration files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages which specify the same file as a
+ <tt>conffile</tt> must be tagged as <em>conflicting</em>
+ with each other. (This is an instance of the general rule
+ about not sharing files. Note that neither alternatives
+ nor diversions are likely to be appropriate in this case;
+ in particular, <prgn>dpkg</prgn> does not handle diverted
+ <tt>conffile</tt>s well.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The maintainer scripts must not alter a <tt>conffile</tt>
+ of <em>any</em> package, including the one the scripts
+ belong to.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If two or more packages use the same configuration file
+ and it is reasonable for both to be installed at the same
+ time, one of these packages must be defined as
+ <em>owner</em> of the configuration file, i.e., it will be
+ the package which handles that file as a configuration
+ file. Other packages that use the configuration file must
+ depend on the owning package if they require the
+ configuration file to operate. If the other package will
+ use the configuration file if present, but is capable of
+ operating without it, no dependency need be declared.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If it is desirable for two or more related packages to
+ share a configuration file <em>and</em> for all of the
+ related packages to be able to modify that configuration
+ file, then the following should be done:
+ <enumlist compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ One of the related packages (the "owning" package)
+ will manage the configuration file with maintainer
+ scripts as described in the previous section.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The owning package should also provide a program
+ that the other packages may use to modify the
+ configuration file.
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ The related packages must use the provided program
+ to make any desired modifications to the
+ configuration file. They should either depend on
+ the core package to guarantee that the configuration
+ modifier program is available or accept gracefully
+ that they cannot modify the configuration file if it
+ is not. (This is in addition to the fact that the
+ configuration file may not even be present in the
+ latter scenario.)
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Sometimes it's appropriate to create a new package which
+ provides the basic infrastructure for the other packages
+ and which manages the shared configuration files. (The
+ <tt>sgml-base</tt> package is a good example.)
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>User configuration files ("dotfiles")</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The files in <file>/etc/skel</file> will automatically be
+ copied into new user accounts by <prgn>adduser</prgn>.
+ No other program should reference the files in
+ <file>/etc/skel</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Therefore, if a program needs a dotfile to exist in
+ advance in <file>$HOME</file> to work sensibly, that dotfile
+ should be installed in <file>/etc/skel</file> and treated as a
+ configuration file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ However, programs that require dotfiles in order to
+ operate sensibly are a bad thing, unless they do create
+ the dotfiles themselves automatically.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Furthermore, programs should be configured by the Debian
+ default installation to behave as closely to the upstream
+ default behaviour as possible.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Therefore, if a program in a Debian package needs to be
+ configured in some way in order to operate sensibly, that
+ should be done using a site-wide configuration file placed
+ in <file>/etc</file>. Only if the program doesn't support a
+ site-wide default configuration and the package maintainer
+ doesn't have time to add it may a default per-user file be
+ placed in <file>/etc/skel</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <file>/etc/skel</file> should be as empty as we can make it.
+ This is particularly true because there is no easy (or
+ necessarily desirable) mechanism for ensuring that the
+ appropriate dotfiles are copied into the accounts of
+ existing users when a package is installed.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Log files</heading>
+ <p>
+ Log files should usually be named
+ <file>/var/log/<var>package</var>.log</file>. If you have many
+ log files, or need a separate directory for permission
+ reasons (<file>/var/log</file> is writable only by
+ <file>root</file>), you should usually create a directory named
+ <file>/var/log/<var>package</var></file> and place your log
+ files there.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Log files must be rotated occasionally so that they don't
+ grow indefinitely; the best way to do this is to drop a log
+ rotation configuration file into the directory
+ <file>/etc/logrotate.d</file> and use the facilities provided by
+ logrotate.<footnote>
+ <p>
+ The traditional approach to log files has been to set up
+ <em>ad hoc</em> log rotation schemes using simple shell
+ scripts and cron. While this approach is highly
+ customizable, it requires quite a lot of sysadmin work.
+ Even though the original Debian system helped a little
+ by automatically installing a system which can be used
+ as a template, this was deemed not enough.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The use of <prgn>logrotate</prgn>, a program developed
+ by Red Hat, is better, as it centralizes log management.
+ It has both a configuration file
+ (<file>/etc/logrotate.conf</file>) and a directory where
+ packages can drop their individual log rotation
+ configurations (<file>/etc/logrotate.d</file>).
+ </p>
+ </footnote>
+ Here is a good example for a logrotate config
+ file (for more information see <manref name="logrotate"
+ section="8">):
+ <example compact="compact">
+/var/log/foo/*.log {
+rotate 12
+weekly
+compress
+postrotate
+/etc/init.d/foo force-reload
+endscript
+}
+ </example>
+ This rotates all files under <file>/var/log/foo</file>, saves 12
+ compressed generations, and forces the daemon to reload its
+ configuration information after the log rotation.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Log files should be removed when the package is
+ purged (but not when it is only removed). This should be
+ done by the <prgn>postrm</prgn> script when it is called
+ with the argument <tt>purge</tt> (see <ref
+ id="removedetails">).
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Permissions and owners</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The rules in this section are guidelines for general use.
+ If necessary you may deviate from the details below.
+ However, if you do so you must make sure that what is done
+ is secure and you should try to be as consistent as possible
+ with the rest of the system. You should probably also
+ discuss it on <prgn>debian-devel</prgn> first.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Files should be owned by <tt>root.root</tt>, and made
+ writable only by the owner and universally readable (and
+ executable, if appropriate), that is mode 644 or 755.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Directories should be mode 755 or (for group-writability)
+ mode 2775. The ownership of the directory should be
+ consistent with its mode: if a directory is mode 2775, it
+ should be owned by the group that needs write access to
+ it.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Setuid and setgid executables should be mode 4755 or 2755
+ respectively, and owned by the appropriate user or group.
+ They should not be made unreadable (modes like 4711 or
+ 2711 or even 4111); doing so achieves no extra security,
+ because anyone can find the binary in the freely available
+ Debian package; it is merely inconvenient. For the same
+ reason you should not restrict read or execute permissions
+ on non-set-id executables.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Some setuid programs need to be restricted to particular
+ sets of users, using file permissions. In this case they
+ should be owned by the uid to which they are set-id, and by
+ the group which should be allowed to execute them. They
+ should have mode 4754; again there is no point in making
+ them unreadable to those users who must not be allowed to
+ execute them.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to arrange that the system administrator can
+ reconfigure the package to correspond to their local
+ security policy by changing the permissions on a binary:
+ they can do this by using <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn>, as
+ described below.<footnote>
+ Ordinary files installed by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> (as
+ opposed to <tt>conffile</tt>s and other similar objects)
+ normally have their permissions reset to the distributed
+ permissions when the package is reinstalled. However,
+ the use of <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> overrides this
+ default behaviour. If you use this method, you should
+ remember to describe <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> in
+ the package documentation; being a relatively new
+ addition to Debian, it is probably not yet well-known.
+ </footnote>
+ Another method you should consider is to create a group for
+ people allowed to use the program(s) and make any setuid
+ executables executable only by that group.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you need to create a new user or group for your package
+ there are two possibilities. Firstly, you may need to
+ make some files in the binary package be owned by this
+ user or group, or you may need to compile the user or
+ group id (rather than just the name) into the binary
+ (though this latter should be avoided if possible, as in
+ this case you need a statically allocated id).</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you need a statically allocated id, you must ask for a
+ user or group id from the <tt>base-passwd</tt> maintainer,
+ and must not release the package until you have been
+ allocated one. Once you have been allocated one you must
+ either make the package depend on a version of the
+ <tt>base-passwd</tt> package with the id present in
+ <file>/etc/passwd</file> or <file>/etc/group</file>, or arrange for
+ your package to create the user or group itself with the
+ correct id (using <tt>adduser</tt>) in its
+ <prgn>preinst</prgn> or <prgn>postinst</prgn>. (Doing it in
+ the <prgn>postinst</prgn> is to be preferred if it is
+ possible, otherwise a pre-dependency will be needed on the
+ <tt>adduser</tt> package.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ On the other hand, the program might be able to determine
+ the uid or gid from the user or group name at runtime, so
+ that a dynamically allocated id can be used. In this case
+ you should choose an appropriate user or group name,
+ discussing this on <prgn>debian-devel</prgn> and checking
+ with the <package/base-passwd/ maintainer that it is unique and that
+ they do not wish you to use a statically allocated id
+ instead. When this has been checked you must arrange for
+ your package to create the user or group if necessary using
+ <prgn>adduser</prgn> in the <prgn>preinst</prgn> or
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> script (again, the latter is to be
+ preferred if it is possible).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that changing the numeric value of an id associated
+ with a name is very difficult, and involves searching the
+ file system for all appropriate files. You need to think
+ carefully whether a static or dynamic id is required, since
+ changing your mind later will cause problems.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1><heading>The use of <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn></heading>
+ <p>
+ This section is not intended as policy, but as a
+ description of the use of <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> is a replacement for the
+ deprecated <tt>suidmanager</tt> package. Packages which
+ previously used <tt>suidmanager</tt> should have a
+ <tt>Conflicts: suidmanager (<< 0.50)</tt> entry (or even
+ <tt>(<< 0.52)</tt>), and calls to <tt>suidregister</tt>
+ and <tt>suidunregister</tt> should now be simply removed
+ from the maintainer scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a system administrator wishes to have a file (or
+ directory or other such thing) installed with owner and
+ permissions different from those in the distributed Debian
+ package, he can use the <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn>
+ program to instruct <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to use the different
+ settings every time the file is installed. Thus the
+ package maintainer should distribute the files with their
+ normal permissions, and leave it for the system
+ administrator to make any desired changes. For example, a
+ daemon which is normally required to be setuid root, but
+ in certain situations could be used without being setuid,
+ should be installed setuid in the <tt>.deb</tt>. Then the
+ local system administrator can change this if they wish.
+ If there are two standard ways of doing it, the package
+ maintainer can use <tt>debconf</tt> to find out the
+ preference, and call <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> in the
+ maintainer script if necessary to accommodate the system
+ administrator's choice.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Given the above, <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> is
+ essentially a tool for system administrators and would not
+ normally be needed in the maintainer scripts. There is
+ one type of situation, though, where calls to
+ <prgn>dpkg-statoverride</prgn> would be needed in the
+ maintainer scripts, and that involves packages which use
+ dynamically allocated user or group ids. In such a
+ situation, something like the following idiom can be very
+ helpful in the package's <prgn>postinst</prgn>, where
+ <tt>sysuser</tt> is a dynamically allocated id:
+ <example>
+for i in /usr/bin/foo /usr/sbin/bar
+do
+ if ! dpkg-statoverride --list $i >/dev/null
+ then
+ dpkg-statoverride --update --add sysuser root 4755 $i
+ fi
+done
+ </example>
+ The corresponding <tt>dpkg-statoverride --remove</tt>
+ calls can then be made unconditionally when the package is
+ purged.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+ </chapt>
+
+ <chapt id="customized-programs">
+ <heading>Customized programs</heading>
+
+ <sect id="arch-spec">
+ <heading>Architecture specification strings</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ If a program needs to specify an <em>architecture specification
+ string</em> in some place, the following format should be
+ used: <var>arch</var>-<var>os</var><footnote>
+ The following architectures and operating systems are
+ currently recognised by <prgn>dpkg-archictecture</prgn>.
+ The architecture, <tt><var>arch</var></tt>, is one of
+ the following: <tt>alpha</tt>, <tt>arm</tt>,
+ <tt>hppa</tt>, <tt>i386</tt>, <tt>ia64</tt>,
+ <tt>m68k</tt>, <tt>mips</tt>, <tt>mipsel</tt>,
+ <tt>powerpc</tt>, <tt>s390</tt>, <tt>sh</tt>,
+ <tt>sheb</tt>, <tt>sparc</tt> and <tt>sparc64</tt>. The
+ operating system, <tt><var>os</var></tt>, is one of:
+ <tt>linux</tt>, <tt>gnu</tt>, <tt>freebsd</tt> and
+ <tt>openbsd</tt>. Use of <tt>gnu</tt> in this string is
+ reserved for the GNU/Hurd operating system.
+ </footnote>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Note that we don't want to use
+ <tt><var>arch</var>-debian-linux</tt> to apply to the rule
+ <tt><var>architecture</var>-<var>vendor</var>-<var>os</var></tt>
+ since this would make our programs incompatible with other
+ Linux distributions. We also don't use something like
+ <tt><var>arch</var>-unknown-linux</tt>, since the
+ <tt>unknown</tt> does not look very good.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Daemons</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The configuration files <file>/etc/services</file>,
+ <file>/etc/protocols</file>, and <file>/etc/rpc</file> are managed
+ by the <prgn>netbase</prgn> package and must not be modified
+ by other packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package requires a new entry in one of these files, the
+ maintainer should get in contact with the
+ <prgn>netbase</prgn> maintainer, who will add the entries
+ and release a new version of the <prgn>netbase</prgn>
+ package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The configuration file <file>/etc/inetd.conf</file> must not be
+ modified by the package's scripts except via the
+ <prgn>update-inetd</prgn> script or the
+ <file>DebianNet.pm</file> Perl module. See their documentation
+ for details on how to add entries.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package wants to install an example entry into
+ <file>/etc/inetd.conf</file>, the entry must be preceded with
+ exactly one hash character (<tt>#</tt>). Such lines are
+ treated as "commented out by user" by the
+ <prgn>update-inetd</prgn> script and are not changed or
+ activated during package updates.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Using pseudo-ttys and modifying wtmp, utmp and
+ lastlog</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Some programs need to create pseudo-ttys. This should be done
+ using Unix98 ptys if the C library supports it. The resulting
+ program must not be installed setuid root, unless that
+ is required for other functionality.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The files <file>/var/run/utmp</file>, <file>/var/log/wtmp</file> and
+ <file>/var/log/lastlog</file> must be installed writeable by
+ group <tt>utmp</tt>. Programs which need to modify those
+ files must be installed setgid <tt>utmp</tt>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Editors and pagers</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Some programs have the ability to launch an editor or pager
+ program to edit or display a text document. Since there are
+ lots of different editors and pagers available in the Debian
+ distribution, the system administrator and each user should
+ have the possibility to choose his/her preferred editor and
+ pager.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, every program should choose a good default
+ editor/pager if none is selected by the user or system
+ administrator.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Thus, every program that launches an editor or pager must
+ use the EDITOR or PAGER environment variable to determine
+ the editor or pager the user wishes to use. If these
+ variables are not set, the programs <file>/usr/bin/editor</file>
+ and <file>/usr/bin/pager</file> should be used, respectively.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These two files are managed through the <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ "alternatives" mechanism. Thus every package providing an
+ editor or pager must call the
+ <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> script to register these
+ programs.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If it is very hard to adapt a program to make use of the
+ EDITOR or PAGER variables, that program may be configured to
+ use <file>/usr/bin/sensible-editor</file> and
+ <file>/usr/bin/sensible-pager</file> as the editor or pager
+ program respectively. These are two scripts provided in the
+ Debian base system that check the EDITOR and PAGER variables
+ and launch the appropriate program, and fall back to
+ <file>/usr/bin/editor</file> and <file>/usr/bin/pager</file> if the
+ variable is not set.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A program may also use the VISUAL environment variable to
+ determine the user's choice of editor. If it exists, it
+ should take precedence over EDITOR. This is in fact what
+ <file>/usr/bin/sensible-editor</file> does.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is not required for a package to depend on
+ <tt>editor</tt> and <tt>pager</tt>, nor is it required for a
+ package to provide such virtual packages.<footnote>
+ The Debian base system already provides an editor and a
+ pager program.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="web-appl">
+ <heading>Web servers and applications</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This section describes the locations and URLs that should
+ be used by all web servers and web applications in the
+ Debian system.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ Cgi-bin executable files are installed in the
+ directory
+ <example compact="compact">
+/usr/lib/cgi-bin/<var>cgi-bin-name</var>
+ </example>
+ and should be referred to as
+ <example compact="compact">
+http://localhost/cgi-bin/<var>cgi-bin-name</var>
+ </example>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>Access to HTML documents</p>
+
+ <p>
+ HTML documents for a package are stored in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>
+ and can be referred to as
+ <example compact="compact">
+http://localhost/doc/<var>package</var>/<var>filename</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The web server should restrict access to the document
+ tree so that only clients on the same host can read
+ the documents. If the web server does not support such
+ access controls, then it should not provide access at
+ all, or ask about providing access during installation.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <p>Web Document Root</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Web Applications should try to avoid storing files in
+ the Web Document Root. Instead they should use the
+ /usr/share/doc/<var>package</var> directory for
+ documents and register the Web Application via the
+ menu package. If access to the web document root is
+ unavoidable then use
+ <example compact="compact">
+/var/www
+ </example>
+ as the Document Root. This might be just a symbolic
+ link to the location where the system administrator
+ has put the real document root.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="mail-transport-agents">
+ <heading>Mail transport, delivery and user agents</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Debian packages which process electronic mail, whether mail
+ user agents (MUAs) or mail transport agents (MTAs), must
+ ensure that they are compatible with the configuration
+ decisions below. Failure to do this may result in lost
+ mail, broken <tt>From:</tt> lines, and other serious brain
+ damage!
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The mail spool is <file>/var/mail</file> and the interface to
+ send a mail message is <file>/usr/sbin/sendmail</file> (as per
+ the FHS). On older systems, the mail spool may be
+ physically located in <file>/var/spool/mail</file>, but all
+ access to the mail spool should be via the
+ <file>/var/mail</file> symlink. The mail spool is part of the
+ base system and not part of the MTA package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All Debian MUAs, MTAs, MDAs and other mailbox accessing
+ programs (such as IMAP daemons) must lock the mailbox in an
+ NFS-safe way. This means that <tt>fcntl()</tt> locking must
+ be combined with dot locking. To avoid deadlocks, a program
+ should use <tt>fcntl()</tt> first and dot locking after
+ this, or alternatively implement the two locking methods in
+ a non blocking way<footnote>
+ If it is not possible to establish both locks, the
+ system shouldn't wait for the second lock to be
+ established, but remove the first lock, wait a (random)
+ time, and start over locking again.
+ </footnote>. Using the functions <tt>maillock</tt> and
+ <tt>mailunlock</tt> provided by the
+ <tt>liblockfile*</tt><footnote>
+ <p>
+ You will need to depend on <tt>liblockfile1
+ (>>1.01)</tt> to use these functions.
+ </p>
+ </footnote> packages is the recommended way to realize this.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Mailboxes are generally mode 660
+ <tt><var>user</var>.mail</tt> unless the system
+ administrator has chosen otherwise. A MUA may remove a
+ mailbox (unless it has nonstandard permissions) in which
+ case the MTA or another MUA must recreate it if needed.
+ Mailboxes must be writable by group mail.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The mail spool is 2775 <tt>root.mail</tt>, and MUAs should
+ be setgid mail to do the locking mentioned above (and
+ must obviously avoid accessing other users' mailboxes
+ using this privilege).</p>
+
+ <p>
+ <file>/etc/aliases</file> is the source file for the system mail
+ aliases (e.g., postmaster, usenet, etc.), it is the one
+ which the sysadmin and <prgn>postinst</prgn> scripts may
+ edit. After <file>/etc/aliases</file> is edited the program or
+ human editing it must call <prgn>newaliases</prgn>. All MTA
+ packages must come with a <prgn>newaliases</prgn> program,
+ even if it does nothing, but older MTA packages did not do
+ this so programs should not fail if <prgn>newaliases</prgn>
+ cannot be found. Note that because of this, all MTA
+ packages must have <tt>Provides</tt>, <tt>Conflicts</tt> and
+ <tt>Replaces: mail-transport-agent</tt> control file
+ fields.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The convention of writing <tt>forward to
+ <var>address</var></tt> in the mailbox itself is not
+ supported. Use a <tt>.forward</tt> file instead.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <prgn>rmail</prgn> program used by UUCP
+ for incoming mail should be <file>/usr/sbin/rmail</file>.
+ Likewise, <prgn>rsmtp</prgn>, for receiving
+ batch-SMTP-over-UUCP, should be <file>/usr/sbin/rsmtp</file> if it
+ is supported.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If your package needs to know what hostname to use on (for
+ example) outgoing news and mail messages which are generated
+ locally, you should use the file <file>/etc/mailname</file>. It
+ will contain the portion after the username and <tt>@</tt>
+ (at) sign for email addresses of users on the machine
+ (followed by a newline).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Such package should check for the existence of this file
+ when it is being configured. If it exists, it should be
+ used without comment, although an MTA's configuration script
+ may wish to prompt the user even if it finds that this file
+ exists. If the file does not exist, the package should
+ prompt the user for the value (preferably using
+ <prgn>debconf</prgn>) and store it in <file>/etc/mailname</file>
+ as well as using it in the package's configuration. The
+ prompt should make it clear that the name will not just be
+ used by that package. For example, in this situation the
+ <tt>inn</tt> package could say something like:
+ <example compact="compact">
+Please enter the "mail name" of your system. This is the
+hostname portion of the address to be shown on outgoing
+news and mail messages. The default is
+<var>syshostname</var>, your system's host name. Mail
+name ["<var>syshostname</var>"]:
+ </example>
+ where <var>syshostname</var> is the output of <tt>hostname
+ --fqdn</tt>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>News system configuration</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ All the configuration files related to the NNTP (news)
+ servers and clients should be located under
+ <file>/etc/news</file>.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ There are some configuration issues that apply to a number
+ of news clients and server packages on the machine. These
+ are:
+
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><file>/etc/news/organization</file></tag>
+ <item>
+ A string which should appear as the
+ organization header for all messages posted
+ by NNTP clients on the machine
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><file>/etc/news/server</file></tag>
+ <item>
+ Contains the FQDN of the upstream NNTP
+ server, or localhost if the local machine is
+ an NNTP server.
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ Other global files may be added as required for cross-package news
+ configuration.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Programs for the X Window System</heading>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Providing X support and package priorities</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Programs that can be configured with support for the X
+ Window System must be configured to do so and must declare
+ any package dependencies necessary to satisfy their
+ runtime requirements when using the X Window System. If
+ such a package is of higher priority than the X packages
+ on which it depends, it is required that either the
+ X-specific components be split into a separate package, or
+ that an alternative version of the package, which includes
+ X support, be provided, or that the package's priority be
+ lowered.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Packages providing an X server</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that provide an X server that, directly or
+ indirectly, communicates with real input and display
+ hardware should declare in their control data that they
+ provide the virtual package <tt>xserver</tt>.<footnote>
+ This implements current practice, and provides an
+ actual policy for usage of the <tt>xserver</tt>
+ virtual package which appears in the virtual packages
+ list. In a nutshell, X servers that interface
+ directly with the display and input hardware or via
+ another subsystem (e.g., GGI) should provide
+ <tt>xserver</tt>. Things like <tt>Xvfb</tt>,
+ <tt>Xnest</tt>, and <tt>Xprt</tt> should not.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Packages providing a terminal emulator</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that provide a terminal emulator for the X Window
+ System which meet the criteria listed below should declare
+ in their control data that they provide the virtual
+ package <tt>x-terminal-emulator</tt>. They should also
+ register themselves as an alternative for
+ <file>/usr/bin/x-terminal-emulator</file>, with a priority of
+ 20.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ To be an <tt>x-terminal-emulator</tt>, a program must:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ Be able to emulate a DEC VT100 terminal, or a
+ compatible terminal.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Support the command-line option <tt>-e
+ <var>command</var></tt>, which creates a new
+ terminal window<footnote>
+ "New terminal window" does not necessarily mean
+ a new top-level X window directly parented by
+ the window manager; it could, if the terminal
+ emulator application were so coded, be a new
+ "view" in a multiple-document interface (MDI).
+ </footnote>
+ and runs the specified <var>command</var>,
+ interpreting the entirity of the rest of the command
+ line as a command to pass straight to exec, in the
+ manner that <tt>xterm</tt> does.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Support the command-line option <tt>-T
+ <var>title</var></tt>, which creates a new terminal
+ window with the window title <var>title</var>.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Packages providing a window manager</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that provide a window manager should declare in
+ their control data that they provide the virtual package
+ <tt>x-window-manager</tt>. They should also register
+ themselves as an alternative for
+ <file>/usr/bin/x-window-manager</file>, with a priority
+ calculated as follows:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ Start with a priority of 20.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If the window manager supports the Debian menu
+ system, add 20 points if this support is available
+ in the package's default configuration (i.e., no
+ configuration files belonging to the system or user
+ have to be edited to activate the feature); if
+ configuration files must be modified, add only 10
+ points.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If the window manager complies with <url
+ id="http://www.freedesktop.org/standards/wm-spec.html"
+ name="The Window Manager Specification Project">,
+ written by the <url id="http://www.freedesktop.org"
+ name="Free Desktop Group">, add 40 points.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ If the window manager permits the X session to be
+ restarted using a <em>different</em> window manager
+ (without killing the X server) in its default
+ configuration, add 10 points; otherwise add none.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Packages providing fonts</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that provide fonts for the X Window
+ System<footnote>
+ For the purposes of Debian Policy, a "font for the X
+ Window System" is one which is accessed via X protocol
+ requests. Fonts for the Linux console, for PostScript
+ renderers, or any other purpose, do not fit this
+ definition. Any tool which makes such fonts available
+ to the X Window System, however, must abide by this
+ font policy.
+ </footnote>
+ must do a number of things to ensure that they are both
+ available without modification of the X or font server
+ configuration, and that they do not corrupt files used by
+ other font packages to register information about
+ themselves.
+ <enumlist>
+ <item>
+ Fonts of any type supported by the X Window System
+ must be in a separate binary package from any
+ executables, libraries, or documentation (except
+ that specific to the fonts shipped, such as their
+ license information). If one or more of the fonts
+ so packaged are necessary for proper operation of
+ the package with which they are associated the font
+ package may be Recommended; if the fonts merely
+ provide an enhancement, a Suggests relationship may
+ be used. Packages must not Depend on font
+ packages.<footnote>
+ This is because the X server may retrieve fonts
+ from the local filesystem or over the network
+ from an X font server; the Debian package system
+ is empowered to deal only with the local
+ filesystem.
+ </footnote>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ BDF fonts must be converted to PCF fonts with the
+ <prgn>bdftopcf</prgn> utility (available in the
+ <tt>xutils</tt> package, <prgn>gzip</prgn>ped, and
+ placed in a directory that corresponds to their
+ resolution:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ 100 dpi fonts must be placed in
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/100dpi/</file>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ 75 dpi fonts must be placed in
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/75dpi/</file>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Character-cell fonts, cursor fonts, and other
+ low-resolution fonts must be placed in
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/misc/</file>.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Speedo fonts must be placed in
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Speedo/</file>.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Type 1 fonts must be placed in
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1/</file>. If font
+ metric files are available, they must be placed here
+ as well.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Subdirectories of <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/</file>
+ other than those listed above must be neither
+ created nor used. (The <file>PEX</file>, <file>CID</file>,
+ and <file>cyrillic</file> directories are excepted for
+ historical reasons, but installation of files into
+ these directories remains discouraged.)
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages may, instead of placing files directly
+ in the X font directories listed above, provide
+ symbolic links in that font directory pointing to
+ the files' actual location in the filesystem. Such
+ a location must comply with the FHS.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages should not contain both 75dpi and
+ 100dpi versions of a font. If both are available,
+ they should be provided in separate binary packages
+ with <tt>-75dpi</tt> or <tt>-100dpi</tt> appended to
+ the names of the packages containing the
+ corresponding fonts.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Fonts destined for the <file>misc</file> subdirectory
+ should not be included in the same package as 75dpi
+ or 100dpi fonts; instead, they should be provided in
+ a separate package with <tt>-misc</tt> appended to
+ its name.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages must not provide the files
+ <file>fonts.dir</file>, <file>fonts.alias</file>, or
+ <file>fonts.scale</file> in a font directory:
+ <list>
+ <item>
+ <file>fonts.dir</file> files must not be provided at all.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ <file>fonts.alias</file> and <file>fonts.scale</file>
+ files, if needed, should be provided in the
+ directory
+ <file>/etc/X11/fonts/<var>fontdir</var>/<var>package</var>.<var>extension</var></file>,
+ where <var>fontdir</var> is the name of the
+ subdirectory of
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/</file> where the
+ package's corresponding fonts are stored
+ (e.g., <tt>75dpi</tt> or <tt>misc</tt>),
+ <var>package</var> is the name of the package
+ that provides these fonts, and
+ <var>extension</var> is either <tt>scale</tt>
+ or <tt>alias</tt>, whichever corresponds to
+ the file contents.
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages must declare a dependency on
+ <tt>xutils (>> 4.0.3)</tt> in their control
+ data.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages that provide one or more
+ <file>fonts.scale</file> files as described above must
+ invoke <prgn>update-fonts-scale</prgn> on each
+ directory into which they installed fonts
+ <em>before</em> invoking
+ <prgn>update-fonts-dir</prgn> on that directory.
+ This invocation must occur in both the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> (for all arguments) and
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> (for all arguments except
+ <tt>upgrade</tt>) scripts.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages that provide one or more
+ <file>fonts.alias</file> files as described above must
+ invoke <prgn>update-fonts-alias</prgn> on each
+ directory into which they installed fonts. This
+ invocation must occur in both the
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> (for all arguments) and
+ <prgn>postrm</prgn> (for all arguments except
+ <tt>upgrade</tt>) scripts.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages must invoke
+ <prgn>update-fonts-dir</prgn> on each directory into
+ which they installed fonts. This invocation must
+ occur in both the <prgn>postinst</prgn> (for all
+ arguments) and <prgn>postrm</prgn> (for all
+ arguments except <tt>upgrade</tt>) scripts.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages must not provide alias names for the
+ fonts they include which collide with alias names
+ already in use by fonts already packaged.
+ </item>
+
+ <item>
+ Font packages must not provide fonts with the same
+ XLFD registry name as another font already packaged.
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Application defaults files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Application defaults files must be installed in the
+ directory <file>/etc/X11/app-defaults/</file> (use of a
+ localized subdirectory of <file>/etc/X11/</file> as described
+ in the <em>X Toolkit Intrinsics - C Language
+ Interface</em> manual is also permitted). They must be
+ registered as <tt>conffile</tt>s or handled as
+ configuration files. Packages must not provide the
+ directory <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/app-defaults/</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Customization of programs' X resources may also be
+ supported with the provision of a file with the same name
+ as that of the package placed in the
+ <file>/etc/X11/Xresources/</file> directory, which must
+ registered as a <tt>conffile</tt> or handled as a
+ configuration file.<footnote>
+ Note that this mechanism is not the same as using
+ app-defaults; app-defaults are tied to the client
+ binary on the local filesystem, whereas X resources
+ are stored in the X server and affect all connecting
+ clients.
+ </footnote>
+ <em>Important:</em> packages that install files into the
+ <file>/etc/X11/Xresources/</file> directory must conflict with
+ <tt>xbase (<< 3.3.2.3a-2)</tt>; if this is not done
+ it is possible for the installing package to destroy a
+ previously-existing <file>/etc/X11/Xresources</file> file
+ which had been customized by the system administrator.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Installation directory issues</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages using the X Window System should not be
+ configured to install files under the <file>/usr/X11R6/</file>
+ directory unless they use <prgn>imake</prgn>. The
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/</file> directory hierarchy should be
+ regarded as deprecated for all packages except the X
+ Window System itself, and those which use the
+ <prgn>imake</prgn> program it provides, in which case the
+ packages may transition out of the <file>/usr/X11R6/</file>
+ directory at the maintainer's discretion.<footnote>
+ <prgn>Imake</prgn>-using programs are exempt because,
+ as long as they are written correctly, the pathnames
+ they use to locate resources and install themselves
+ are derived wholly from the X Window System
+ configuration. Thus, in the event that the X Window
+ System moves to <file>/usr/X11R7/</file>,
+ <file>/usr/X12/</file>, or just plain <file>/usr/</file>, all
+ that is required for these programs is a recompile
+ against the corresponding X Window System library
+ development packages.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Programs that use GNU <prgn>autoconf</prgn> and
+ <prgn>automake</prgn> are usually easily configured at
+ compile time to use <file>/usr/</file> instead of
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/</file>, and this should be done whenever
+ possible. Configuration files for window managers and
+ display managers should be placed in a subdirectory of
+ <file>/etc/X11/</file> corresponding to the package name due
+ to these programs' tight integration with the mechanisms
+ of the X Window System. Application-level programs should
+ use the <file>/etc/</file> directory unless otherwise mandated
+ by policy.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The installation of files into subdirectories
+ of <file>/usr/X11R6/include/X11/</file> and
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/</file> is permitted but discouraged;
+ package maintainers should determine if subdirectories of
+ <file>/usr/lib/</file> and <file>/usr/share/</file> can be used
+ instead. (The use of symbolic links from the
+ <file>X11R6</file> directories to other FHS-compliant
+ locations is encouraged if the program is not easily
+ configured to look elsewhere for its files.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must not provide or install files into the directories
+ <file>/usr/bin/X11/</file>, <file>/usr/include/X11/</file> or
+ <file>/usr/lib/X11/</file>. Files within a package should,
+ however, make reference to these directories, rather than
+ their <tt>X11R6</tt>-named counterparts
+ <file>/usr/X11R6/bin/</file>, <file>/usr/X11R6/include/X11/</file>
+ and <file>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/</file>, if the resources being
+ referred to have not been moved to other FHS-compliant
+ locations.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>The OSF/Motif and OpenMotif libraries</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <em>Programs that require the non-DFSG-compliant OSF/Motif or
+ OpenMotif libraries</em><footnote>
+ OSF/Motif and OpenMotif are collectively referred to as
+ "Motif" in this policy document.
+ </footnote>
+ should be compiled against and tested with LessTif (a free
+ re-implementation of Motif) instead. If the maintainer
+ judges that the program or programs do not work
+ sufficiently well with LessTif to be distributed and
+ supported, but do so when compiled against Motif, then two
+ versions of the package should be created; one linked
+ statically against Motif and with <tt>-smotif</tt>
+ appended to the package name, and one linked dynamically
+ against Motif and with <tt>-dmotif</tt> appended to the
+ package name.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Both Motif-linked versions are dependent
+ upon non-DFSG-compliant software and thus cannot be
+ uploaded to the <em>main</em> distribution; if the
+ software is itself DFSG-compliant it may be uploaded to
+ the <em>contrib</em> distribution. While known existing
+ versions of Motif permit unlimited redistribution of
+ binaries linked against the library (whether statically or
+ dynamically), it is the package maintainer's
+ responsibility to determine whether this is permitted by
+ the license of the copy of Motif in his or her possession.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="perl">
+ <heading>Perl programs and modules</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Perl programs and modules should follow the current Perl policy.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Perl policy can be found in the <tt>perl-policy</tt>
+ files in the <tt>debian-policy</tt> package.
+ They are also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/perl-policy/"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/perl-policy/"></tt>
+ and from the Debian archive mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/package-developer/perl-policy.txt.gz"
+ id="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/doc/package-developer/perl-policy.txt.gz"></tt>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="emacs">
+ <heading>Emacs lisp programs</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Please refer to the "Debian Emacs Policy" for details of how to
+ package emacs lisp programs.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Emacs policy is available in
+ <file>debian-emacs-policy.gz</file> of the
+ <package>emacsen-common</package> package.
+ It is also available from the Debian web mirrors at
+ <tt><url name="/doc/packaging-manuals/debian-emacs-policy"
+ id="http://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/debian-emacs-policy"></tt>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Games</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The permissions on <file>/var/games</file> are mode 755, owner
+ <tt>root</tt> and group <tt>root</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each game decides on its own security policy.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Games which require protected, privileged access to
+ high-score files, savegames, etc., may be made
+ set-<em>group</em>-id (mode 2755) and owned by
+ <tt>root.games</tt>, and use files and directories with
+ appropriate permissions (770 <tt>root.games</tt>, for
+ example). They must not be made
+ set-<em>user</em>-id, as this causes security problems. (If
+ an attacker can subvert any set-user-id game they can
+ overwrite the executable of any other, causing other players
+ of these games to run a Trojan horse program. With a
+ set-group-id game the attacker only gets access to less
+ important game data, and if they can get at the other
+ players' accounts at all it will take considerably more
+ effort.)</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Some packages, for example some fortune cookie programs, are
+ configured by the upstream authors to install with their
+ data files or other static information made unreadable so
+ that they can only be accessed through set-id programs
+ provided. You should not do this in a Debian package: anyone can
+ download the <file>.deb</file> file and read the data from it,
+ so there is no point making the files unreadable. Not
+ making the files unreadable also means that you don't have
+ to make so many programs set-id, which reduces the risk of a
+ security hole.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ As described in the FHS, binaries of games should be
+ installed in the directory <file>/usr/games</file>. This also
+ applies to games that use the X Window System. Manual pages
+ for games (X and non-X games) should be installed in
+ <file>/usr/share/man/man6</file>.</p>
+ </sect>
+ </chapt>
+
+ <chapt id="docs"><heading>Documentation</heading>
+
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Manual pages</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ You should install manual pages in <prgn>nroff</prgn> source
+ form, in appropriate places under <file>/usr/share/man</file>.
+ You should only use sections 1 to 9 (see the FHS for more
+ details). You must not install a preformatted "cat page".
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each program, utility, and function should have an
+ associated manual page included in the same package. It is
+ suggested that all configuration files also have a manual
+ page included as well. Manual pages for protocols and other
+ auxiliary things are optional.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If no manual page is available, this is considered as a bug
+ and should be reported to the Debian Bug Tracking System (the
+ maintainer of the package is allowed to write this bug report
+ themselves, if they so desire). Do not close the bug report
+ until a proper manpage is available.<footnote>
+ It is not very hard to write a man page. See the
+ <url id="http://www.schweikhardt.net/man_page_howto.html"
+ name="Man-Page-HOWTO">,
+ <manref name="man" section="7">, the examples
+ created by <prgn>debmake</prgn> or <prgn>dh_make</prgn>,
+ the helper programs <prgn>help2man</prgn>, or the
+ directory <file>/usr/share/doc/man-db/examples</file>.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You may forward a complaint about a missing manpage to the
+ upstream authors, and mark the bug as forwarded in the
+ Debian bug tracking system. Even though the GNU Project do
+ not in general consider the lack of a manpage to be a bug,
+ we do; if they tell you that they don't consider it a bug
+ you should leave the bug in our bug tracking system open
+ anyway.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Manual pages should be installed compressed using <tt>gzip -9</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If one manpage needs to be accessible via several names it
+ is better to use a symbolic link than the <file>.so</file>
+ feature, but there is no need to fiddle with the relevant
+ parts of the upstream source to change from <file>.so</file> to
+ symlinks: don't do it unless it's easy. You should not
+ create hard links in the manual page directories, nor put
+ absolute filenames in <file>.so</file> directives. The filename
+ in a <file>.so</file> in a manpage should be relative to the
+ base of the manpage tree (usually
+ <file>/usr/share/man</file>). If you do not create any links
+ (whether symlinks, hard links, or <tt>.so</tt> directives)
+ in the filesystem to the alternate names of the manpage,
+ then you should not rely on <prgn>man</prgn> finding your
+ manpage under those names based solely on the information in
+ the manpage's header.<footnote>
+ Supporting this in <prgn>man</prgn> often requires
+ unreasonable processing time to find a manual page or to
+ report that none exists, and moves knowledge into man's
+ database that would be better left in the filesystem.
+ This support is therefore deprecated and will cease to
+ be present in the future.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Info documents</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Info documents should be installed in <file>/usr/share/info</file>.
+ They should be compressed with <tt>gzip -9</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Your package should call <prgn>install-info</prgn> to update
+ the Info <file>dir</file> file in its <prgn>postinst</prgn>
+ script when called with a <tt>configure</tt> argument, for
+ example:
+ <example compact="compact">
+install-info --quiet --section Development Development \
+ /usr/share/info/foobar.info
+ </example></p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is a good idea to specify a section for the location of
+ your program; this is done with the <tt>--section</tt>
+ switch. To determine which section to use, you should look
+ at <file>/usr/share/info/dir</file> on your system and choose the most
+ relevant (or create a new section if none of the current
+ sections are relevant). Note that the <tt>--section</tt>
+ flag takes two arguments; the first is a regular expression
+ to match (case-insensitively) against an existing section,
+ the second is used when creating a new one.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should remove the entries in the <prgn>prerm</prgn>
+ script when called with a <tt>remove</tt> argument:
+ <example compact="compact">
+install-info --quiet --remove /usr/share/info/foobar.info
+ </example></p>
+
+ <p>
+ If <prgn>install-info</prgn> cannot find a description entry
+ in the Info file you must supply one. See <manref
+ name="install-info" section="8"> for details.</p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Additional documentation</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Any additional documentation that comes with the package may
+ be installed at the discretion of the package maintainer.
+ Text documentation should be installed in the directory
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>, where
+ <var>package</var> is the name of the package, and
+ compressed with <tt>gzip -9</tt> unless it is small.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package comes with large amounts of documentation which
+ many users of the package will not require you should create
+ a separate binary package to contain it, so that it does not
+ take up disk space on the machines of users who do not need
+ or want it installed.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is often a good idea to put text information files
+ (<file>README</file>s, changelogs, and so forth) that come with
+ the source package in <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>
+ in the binary package. However, you don't need to install
+ the instructions for building and installing the package, of
+ course!</p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages must not require the existance of any files in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/</file> in order to function
+ <footnote>
+ The system administrator should be able to
+ delete files in <file>/usr/share/doc/</file> without causing
+ any programs to break.
+ </footnote>.
+ Any files that are referenced by programs but are also
+ useful as standalone documentation should be installed under
+ <file>/usr/share/<var>package</var>/</file> with symbolic links from
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file> may be a symbolic
+ link to another directory in <file>/usr/share/doc</file> only if
+ the two packages both come from the same source and the
+ first package Depends on the second.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Former Debian releases placed all additional documentation
+ in <file>/usr/doc/<var>package</var></file>. This has been
+ changed to <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>,
+ and packages must not put documentation in the directory
+ <file>/usr/doc/<var>package</var></file>. <footnote>
+ At this phase of the transition, we no longer require a
+ symbolic link in <file>/usr/doc/</file>. At a later point,
+ policy shall change to make the symbolic links a bug.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Preferred documentation formats</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The unification of Debian documentation is being carried out
+ via HTML.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ If your package comes with extensive documentation in a
+ markup format that can be converted to various other formats
+ you should if possible ship HTML versions in a binary
+ package, in the directory
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>appropriate-package</var></file> or
+ its subdirectories.<footnote>
+ The rationale: The important thing here is that HTML
+ docs should be available in <em>some</em> package, not
+ necessarily in the main binary package.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Other formats such as PostScript may be provided at the
+ package maintainer's discretion.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="copyrightfile">
+ <heading>Copyright information</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Every package must be accompanied by a verbatim copy of its
+ copyright and distribution license in the file
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</file>. This
+ file must neither be compressed nor be a symbolic link.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In addition, the copyright file must say where the upstream
+ sources (if any) were obtained. It should name the original
+ authors of the package and the Debian maintainer(s) who were
+ involved with its creation.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ A copy of the file which will be installed in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/copyright</file> should
+ be in <file>debian/copyright</file> in the source package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file> may be a symbolic
+ link to another directory in <file>/usr/share/doc</file> only if
+ the two packages both come from the same source and the
+ first package Depends on the second. These rules are
+ important because copyrights must be extractable by
+ mechanical means.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages distributed under the UCB BSD license, the Artistic
+ license, the GNU GPL, and the GNU LGPL should refer to the
+ files <file>/usr/share/common-licenses/BSD</file>,
+ <file>/usr/share/common-licenses/Artistic</file>,
+ <file>/usr/share/common-licenses/GPL</file>, and
+ <file>/usr/share/common-licenses/LGPL</file> respectively,
+ rather than quoting them in the copyright file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You should not use the copyright file as a general <file>README</file>
+ file. If your package has such a file it should be
+ installed in <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/README</file> or
+ <file>README.Debian</file> or some other appropriate place.</p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Examples</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Any examples (configurations, source files, whatever),
+ should be installed in a directory
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/examples</file>. These
+ files should not be referenced by any program: they're there
+ for the benefit of the system administrator and users as
+ documentation only. Architecture-specific example files
+ should be installed in a directory
+ <file>/usr/lib/<var>package</var>/examples</file> with symbolic
+ links to them from
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/examples</file>, or the
+ latter directory itself may be a symbolic link to the
+ former.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the purpose of a package is to provide examples, then the
+ example files may be installed into
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="changelogs">
+ <heading>Changelog files</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian changelog file (<file>debian/changelog</file>) should
+ explain briefly what modifications were made in the Debian version
+ of the package compared to the upstream one. Other changes and
+ updates to the package should also be documented in this file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Mistakes in changelogs are usually best rectified by
+ making a new changelog entry rather than "rewriting history"
+ by editing old changelog entries.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The format of the <file>debian/changelog</file> file is described
+ in <ref id="dpkgchangelog">. In non-experimental packages you must
+ use a format for <file>debian/changelog</file> which is supported
+ by the most recent released version of <prgn>dpkg</prgn>.<footnote>
+ If you wish to use an alternative format, you may do so as
+ long as you include a parser for it in your source package.
+ The parser must have an API compatible with that expected by
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> and <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>.
+ If there is general interest in the new format, you should
+ contact the <package>dpkg</package> maintainer to have the
+ parser script for it included in the <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ package. (You will need to agree that the parser and its
+ manpage may be distributed under the GNU GPL, just as the rest
+ of <prgn>dpkg</prgn> is.)
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Packages that are not Debian-native must contain a
+ compressed copy of the <file>debian/changelog</file> file from
+ the Debian source tree in
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></file> with the name
+ <file>changelog.Debian.gz</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If an upstream changelog is available, it should be accessible as
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.gz</file> in
+ plain text. If the upstream changelog is distributed in
+ HTML, it should be made available in that form as
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.html.gz</file>
+ and a plain text <file>changelog.gz</file> should be generated
+ from it using, for example, <tt>lynx -dump -nolist</tt>. If
+ the upstream changelog files do not already conform to this
+ naming convention, then this may be achieved either by
+ renaming the files, or by adding a symbolic link, at the
+ maintainer's discretion.<footnote>
+ Rationale: People should not have to look in places for
+ upstream changelogs merely because they are given
+ different names or are distributed in HTML format.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All of these files should be installed compressed using
+ <tt>gzip -9</tt>, as they will become large with time even
+ if they start out small.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the package has only one changelog which is used both as
+ the Debian changelog and the upstream one because there is
+ no separate upstream maintainer then that changelog should
+ usually be installed as
+ <file>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.gz</file>; if
+ there is a separate upstream maintainer, but no upstream
+ changelog, then the Debian changelog should still be called
+ <file>changelog.Debian.gz</file>.</p>
+
+ </sect>
+ </chapt>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-scope">
+ <heading>Introduction and scope of these appendices</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ These appendices are taken essentially verbatim from the
+ now-deprecated Packaging Manual, version 3.2.1.0. They are
+ the chapters which are likely to be of use to package
+ maintainers and which have not already been included in the
+ policy document itself. Most of these sections are very likely
+ not relevant to policy; they should be treated as
+ documentation for the packaging system. Please note that these
+ appendices are included for convenience, and for historical
+ reasons: they used to be part of policy package, and they have
+ not yet been incorporated into dpkg documentation. However,
+ they still have value, and hence they are presented here.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ They have not yet been checked to ensure that they are
+ compatible with the contents of policy, and if there are any
+ contradictions, the version in the main policy document takes
+ precedence. The remaining chapters of the old Packaging
+ Manual have also not been read in detail to ensure that there
+ are not parts which have been left out. Both of these will be
+ done in due course.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> is a suite of programs for creating binary
+ package files and installing and removing them on Unix
+ systems.<footnote>
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> is targetted primarily at Debian
+ GNU/Linux, but may work on or be ported to other
+ systems.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The binary packages are designed for the management of
+ installed executable programs (usually compiled binaries) and
+ their associated data, though source code examples and
+ documentation are provided as part of some packages.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ This manual describes the technical aspects of creating Debian
+ binary packages (<file>.deb</file> files). It documents the
+ behaviour of the package management programs
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>, <prgn>dselect</prgn> et al. and the way
+ they interact with packages.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ It also documents the interaction between
+ <prgn>dselect</prgn>'s core and the access method scripts it
+ uses to actually install the selected packages, and describes
+ how to create a new access method.</p>
+
+ <p>
+ This manual does not go into detail about the options and
+ usage of the package building and installation tools. It
+ should therefore be read in conjuction with those programs'
+ manpages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The utility programs which are provided with <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ for managing various system configuration and similar issues,
+ such as <prgn>update-rc.d</prgn> and
+ <prgn>install-info</prgn>, are not described in detail here -
+ please see their manpages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is assumed that the reader is reasonably familiar with the
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> System Administrators' manual.
+ Unfortunately this manual does not yet exist.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian version of the FSF's GNU hello program is provided
+ as an example for people wishing to create Debian
+ packages. The Debian <prgn>debmake</prgn> package is
+ recommended as a very helpful tool in creating and maintaining
+ Debian packages. However, while the tools and examples are
+ helpful, they do not replace the need to read and follow the
+ Policy and Programmer's Manual.</p>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-binarypkg"><heading>Binary packages (from old
+ Packaging Manual)
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The binary package has two main sections. The first part
+ consists of various control information files and scripts used
+ by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> when installing and removing. See <ref
+ id="pkg-controlarea">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The second part is an archive containing the files and
+ directories to be installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the future binary packages may also contain other
+ components, such as checksums and digital signatures. The
+ format for the archive is described in full in the
+ <file>deb(5)</file> manpage.
+ </p>
+
+
+ <sect id="pkg-bincreating"><heading>Creating package files -
+ <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ All manipulation of binary package files is done by
+ <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn>; it's the only program that has
+ knowledge of the format. (<prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> may be
+ invoked by calling <prgn>dpkg</prgn>, as <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ will spot that the options requested are appropriate to
+ <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> and invoke that instead with the same
+ arguments.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In order to create a binary package you must make a
+ directory tree which contains all the files and directories
+ you want to have in the filesystem data part of the package.
+ In Debian-format source packages this directory is usually
+ <file>debian/tmp</file>, relative to the top of the package's
+ source tree.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ They should have the locations (relative to the root of the
+ directory tree you're constructing) ownerships and
+ permissions which you want them to have on the system when
+ they are installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ With current versions of <prgn>dpkg</prgn> the uid/username
+ and gid/groupname mappings for the users and groups being
+ used should be the same on the system where the package is
+ built and the one where it is installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ You need to add one special directory to the root of the
+ miniature filesystem tree you're creating:
+ <prgn>DEBIAN</prgn>. It should contain the control
+ information files, notably the binary package control file
+ (see <ref id="pkg-controlfile">).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <prgn>DEBIAN</prgn> directory will not appear in the
+ filesystem archive of the package, and so won't be installed
+ by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> when the package is installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When you've prepared the package, you should invoke:
+ <example>
+ dpkg --build <var>directory</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This will build the package in
+ <file><var>directory</var>.deb</file>. (<prgn>dpkg</prgn> knows
+ that <tt>--build</tt> is a <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> option, so
+ it invokes <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> with the same arguments to
+ build the package.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See the manpage <manref name="dpkg-deb" section="8"> for details of how
+ to examine the contents of this newly-created file. You may find the
+ output of following commands enlightening:
+ <example>
+ dpkg-deb --info <var>filename</var>.deb
+ dpkg-deb --contents <var>filename</var>.deb
+ dpkg --contents <var>filename</var>.deb
+ </example>
+ To view the copyright file for a package you could use this command:
+ <example>
+ dpkg --fsys-tarfile <var>filename</var>.deb | tar xof usr/share/doc/<var>\*</var>copyright | less
+ </example>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="pkg-controlarea">
+ <heading>
+ Package control information files
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The control information portion of a binary package is a
+ collection of files with names known to <prgn>dpkg</prgn>.
+ It will treat the contents of these files specially - some
+ of them contain information used by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> when
+ installing or removing the package; others are scripts which
+ the package maintainer wants <prgn>dpkg</prgn> to run.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to put other files in the package control
+ area, but this is not generally a good idea (though they
+ will largely be ignored).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Here is a brief list of the control info files supported by
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> and a summary of what they're used for.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>control</tt>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This is the key description file used by
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>. It specifies the package's name
+ and version, gives its description for the user,
+ states its relationships with other packages, and so
+ forth. See <ref id="pkg-controlfile">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is usually generated automatically from information
+ in the source package by the
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> program, and with
+ assistance from <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn>. See <ref
+ id="pkg-sourcetools">.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>postinst</tt>, <tt>preinst</tt>, <tt>postrm</tt>,
+ <tt>prerm</tt>
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ These are exectuable files (usually scripts) which
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> runs during installation, upgrade
+ and removal of packages. They allow the package to
+ deal with matters which are particular to that package
+ or require more complicated processing than that
+ provided by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>. Details of when and
+ how they are called are in <ref
+ id="maintainerscripts">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is very important to make these scripts
+ idempotent.
+ <footnote>
+ That means that if it runs successfully or fails
+ and then you call it again it doesn't bomb out,
+ but just ensures that everything is the way it
+ ought to be.
+ </footnote> This is so that if an error occurs, the
+ user interrupts <prgn>dpkg</prgn> or some other
+ unforeseen circumstance happens you don't leave the
+ user with a badly-broken package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The maintainer scripts are guaranteed to run with a
+ controlling terminal and can interact with the user.
+ If they need to prompt for passwords, do full-screen
+ interaction or something similar you should do these
+ things to and from <file>/dev/tty</file>, since
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will at some point redirect scripts'
+ standard input and output so that it can log the
+ installation process. Likewise, because these scripts
+ may be executed with standard output redirected into a
+ pipe for logging purposes, Perl scripts should set
+ unbuffered output by setting <tt>$|=1</tt> so that the
+ output is printed immediately rather than being
+ buffered.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each script should return a zero exit status for
+ success, or a nonzero one for failure.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>conffiles</tt>
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This file contains a list of configuration files which
+ are to be handled automatically by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ (see <ref id="pkg-conffiles">). Note that not necessarily
+ every configuration file should be listed here.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>shlibs</tt>
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This file contains a list of the shared libraries
+ supplied by the package, with dependency details for
+ each. This is used by <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn>
+ when it determines what dependencies are required in a
+ package control file. The <tt>shlibs</tt> file format
+ is described on <ref id="shlibs">.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+
+ <sect id="pkg-controlfile">
+ <heading>
+ The main control information file: <tt>control</tt>
+ </heading>
+ <p>
+ The most important control information file used by
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> when it installs a package is
+ <tt>control</tt>. It contains all the package"s "vital
+ statistics".
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The binary package control files of packages built from
+ Debian sources are made by a special tool,
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>, which reads
+ <file>debian/control</file> and <file>debian/changelog</file> to
+ find the information it needs. See <ref id="pkg-sourcepkg"> for
+ more details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The fields in binary package control files are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Package"><tt>Package</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="versions"><tt>Version</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p><qref id="pkg-f-Architecture"><tt>Architecture</tt></qref>
+ (mandatory)
+ <footnote>
+ This field should appear in all packages, though
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> doesn't require it yet so that
+ old packages can still be installed.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="relationships"><tt>Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Provides</tt> et al.</qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Essential"><tt>Essential</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Maintainer"><tt>Maintainer</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-classification"><tt>Section</tt>,
+ <tt>Priority</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Source"><tt>Source</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="descriptions"><tt>Description</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Installed-Size"><tt>Installed-Size</tt></qref>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ A description of the syntax of control files and the purpose
+ of these fields is available in <ref id="pkg-controlfields">.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect>
+ <heading>Time Stamps</heading>
+ <p>
+ Maintainers are encouraged to preserve the modification
+ times of the upstream source files in a package, as far as
+ is reasonably possible.
+ <footnote>
+ The rationale is that there is some information conveyed
+ by knowing the age of the file, for example, you could
+ recognize that some documentation is very old by looking
+ at the modification time, so it would be nice if the
+ modification time of the upstream source would be
+ preserved.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-sourcepkg">
+ <heading>Source packages (from old Packaging Manual) </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The Debian binary packages in the distribution are generated
+ from Debian sources, which are in a special format to assist
+ the easy and automatic building of binaries.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect id="pkg-sourcetools">
+ <heading>Tools for processing source packages</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Various tools are provided for manipulating source packages;
+ they pack and unpack sources and help build of binary
+ packages and help manage the distribution of new versions.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ They are introduced and typical uses described here; see
+ <manref name="dpkg-source" section="1"> for full
+ documentation about their arguments and operation.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For examples of how to construct a Debian source package,
+ and how to use those utilities that are used by Debian
+ source packages, please see the <prgn>hello</prgn> example
+ package.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> - packs and unpacks Debian source
+ packages
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program is frequently used by hand, and is also
+ called from package-independent automated building scripts
+ such as <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ To unpack a package it is typically invoked with
+ <example>
+ dpkg-source -x <var>.../path/to/filename</var>.dsc
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ with the <file><var>filename</var>.tar.gz</file> and
+ <file><var>filename</var>.diff.gz</file> (if applicable) in
+ the same directory. It unpacks into
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>version</var></file>, and if
+ applicable
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>version</var>.orig</file>, in
+ the current directory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ To create a packed source archive it is typically invoked:
+ <example>
+ dpkg-source -b <var>package</var>-<var>version</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This will create the <file>.dsc</file>, <file>.tar.gz</file> and
+ <file>.diff.gz</file> (if appropriate) in the current
+ directory. <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> does not clean the
+ source tree first - this must be done separately if it is
+ required.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See also <ref id="pkg-sourcearchives">.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>
+ <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn> - overall package-building
+ control script
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn> is a script which invokes
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>, the <file>debian/rules</file>
+ targets <tt>clean</tt>, <tt>build</tt> and
+ <tt>binary</tt>, <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> and
+ <prgn>pgp</prgn> to build a signed source and binary
+ package upload.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is usually invoked by hand from the top level of the
+ built or unbuilt source directory. It may be invoked with
+ no arguments; useful arguments include:
+ <taglist compact="compact">
+ <tag><tt>-uc</tt>, <tt>-us</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Do not PGP-sign the <tt>.changes</tt> file or the
+ source package <tt>.dsc</tt> file, respectively.</p>
+ </item>
+ <tag><tt>-p<var>pgp-command</var></tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Invoke <var>pgp-command</var> instead of finding
+ <tt>pgp</tt> on the <prgn>PATH</prgn>.
+ <var>pgp-command</var> must behave just like
+ <prgn>pgp</prgn>.</p>
+ </item>
+ <tag><tt>-r<var>root-command</var></tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ When root privilege is required, invoke the command
+ <var>root-command</var>. <var>root-command</var>
+ should invoke its first argument as a command, from
+ the <prgn>PATH</prgn> if necessary, and pass its
+ second and subsequent arguments to the command it
+ calls. If no <var>root-command</var> is supplied
+ then <var>dpkg-buildpackage</var> will take no
+ special action to gain root privilege, so that for
+ most packages it will have to be invoked as root to
+ start with.</p>
+ </item>
+ <tag><tt>-b</tt>, <tt>-B</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Two types of binary-only build and upload - see
+ <manref name="dpkg-source" section="1">.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> - generates binary package
+ control files
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program is usually called from <file>debian/rules</file>
+ (see <ref id="pkg-sourcetree">) in the top level of the source
+ tree.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This is usually done just before the files and directories in the
+ temporary directory tree where the package is being built have their
+ permissions and ownerships set and the package is constructed using
+ <prgn>dpkg-deb/</prgn>
+ <footnote>
+ This is so that the control file which is produced has
+ the right permissions
+ </footnote>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> must be called after all the
+ files which are to go into the package have been placed in
+ the temporary build directory, so that its calculation of
+ the installed size of a package is correct.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is also necessary for <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> to
+ be run after <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> so that the
+ variable substitutions created by
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> in <file>debian/substvars</file>
+ are available.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For a package which generates only one binary package, and
+ which builds it in <file>debian/tmp</file> relative to the top
+ of the source package, it is usually sufficient to call
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Sources which build several binaries will typically need
+ something like:
+ <example>
+ dpkg-gencontrol -Pdebian/tmp-<var>pkg</var> -p<var>package</var>
+ </example> The <tt>-P</tt> tells
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> that the package is being
+ built in a non-default directory, and the <tt>-p</tt>
+ tells it which package's control file should be generated.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> also adds information to the
+ list of files in <file>debian/files</file>, for the benefit of
+ (for example) a future invocation of
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn>.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> - calculates shared library
+ dependencies
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program is usually called from <file>debian/rules</file>
+ just before <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> (see <ref
+ id="pkg-sourcetree">), in the top level of the source tree.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Its arguments are executables.
+ <footnote>
+ <p>
+ In a forthcoming dpkg version,
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> would be required to be
+ called on shared libraries as well.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ They may be specified either in the locations in the
+ source tree where they are created or in the locations
+ in the temporary build tree where they are installed
+ prior to binary package creation.
+ </p>
+ </footnote> for which shared library dependencies should
+ be included in the binary package's control file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If some of the found shared libraries should only
+ warrant a <tt>Recommends</tt> or <tt>Suggests</tt>, or if
+ some warrant a <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>, this can be achieved
+ by using the <tt>-d<var>dependency-field</var></tt> option
+ before those executable(s). (Each <tt>-d</tt> option
+ takes effect until the next <tt>-d</tt>.)
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> does not directly cause the
+ output control file to be modified. Instead by default it
+ adds to the <file>debian/substvars</file> file variable
+ settings like <tt>shlibs:Depends</tt>. These variable
+ settings must be referenced in dependency fields in the
+ appropriate per-binary-package sections of the source
+ control file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, the <prgn>procps</prgn> package generates two
+ kinds of binaries, simple C binaries like <prgn>ps</prgn>
+ which require a predependency and full-screen ncurses
+ binaries like <prgn>top</prgn> which require only a
+ recommendation. It can say in its <file>debian/rules</file>:
+ <example>
+ dpkg-shlibdeps -dPre-Depends ps -dRecommends top
+ </example>
+ and then in its main control file <file>debian/control</file>:
+ <example>
+ <var>...</var>
+ Package: procps
+ Pre-Depends: ${shlibs:Pre-Depends}
+ Recommends: ${shlibs:Recommends}
+ <var>...</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Sources which produce several binary packages with
+ different shared library dependency requirements can use
+ the <tt>-p<var>varnameprefix</var></tt> option to override
+ the default <tt>shlibs:</tt> prefix (one invocation of
+ <prgn>dpkg-shlibdeps</prgn> per setting of this option).
+ They can thus produce several sets of dependency
+ variables, each of the form
+ <tt><var>varnameprefix</var>:<var>dependencyfield</var></tt>,
+ which can be referred to in the appropriate parts of the
+ binary package control files.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>
+ <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> - adds a file to
+ <file>debian/files</file>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Some packages' uploads need to include files other than
+ the source and binary package files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> adds a file to the
+ <file>debian/files</file> file so that it will be included in
+ the <file>.changes</file> file when
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> is run.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is usually invoked from the <tt>binary</tt> target of
+ <file>debian/rules</file>:
+ <example>
+ dpkg-distaddfile <var>filename</var> <var>section</var> <var>priority</var>
+ </example>
+ The <var>filename</var> is relative to the directory where
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> will expect to find it - this
+ is usually the directory above the top level of the source
+ tree. The <file>debian/rules</file> target should put the
+ file there just before or just after calling
+ <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <var>section</var> and <var>priority</var> are passed
+ unchanged into the resulting <file>.changes</file> file. See
+ <ref id="pkg-f-classification">.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1><heading><prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> - generates a <file>.changes</file> upload
+ control file
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program is usually called by package-independent
+ automatic building scripts such as
+ <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn>, but it may also be called
+ by hand.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is usually called in the top level of a built source
+ tree, and when invoked with no arguments will print out a
+ straightforward <file>.changes</file> file based on the
+ information in the source package's changelog and control
+ file and the binary and source packages which should have
+ been built.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1><heading><prgn>dpkg-parsechangelog</prgn> - produces parsed representation of
+ a changelog
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program is used internally by
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> et al. It may also occasionally
+ be useful in <file>debian/rules</file> and elsewhere. It
+ parses a changelog, <file>debian/changelog</file> by default,
+ and prints a control-file format representation of the
+ information in it to standard output.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-dpkgarch"><heading><prgn>dpkg-architecture</prgn> -
+ information about the build and host system
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This program can be used manually, but is also invoked by
+ <tt>dpkg-buildpackage</tt> or <file>debian/rules</file> to set
+ to set environment or make variables which specify the build and
+ host architecture for the package building process.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect id="pkg-sourcetree"><heading>The Debianised source tree
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The source archive scheme described later is intended to
+ allow a Debianised source tree with some associated control
+ information to be reproduced and transported easily. The
+ Debianised source tree is a version of the original program
+ with certain files added for the benefit of the
+ Debianisation process, and with any other changes required
+ made to the rest of the source code and installation
+ scripts.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The extra files created for Debian are in the subdirectory
+ <file>debian</file> of the top level of the Debianised source
+ tree. They are described below.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-debianrules"><heading><file>debian/rules</file> - the main building
+ script
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file is an executable makefile, and contains the
+ package-specific recipies for compiling the package and
+ building binary package(s) out of the source.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It must start with the line <tt>#!/usr/bin/make -f</tt>,
+ so that it can be invoked by saying its name rather than
+ invoking <prgn>make</prgn> explicitly.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Since an interactive <file>debian/rules</file> script makes it
+ impossible to autocompile that package and also makes it
+ hard for other people to reproduce the same binary
+ package, all <strong>required targets</strong> have to be
+ non-interactive. At a minimul, required targets are the
+ ones called by <prgn>dpkg-buildpackage</prgn>, namely,
+ <em>clean</em>, <em>binary</em>, <em>binary-arch</em>, and
+ <em>build</em>. It also follows that any target that these
+ targets depend on must also be non-interactive.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The targets which are required to be present are:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><tt>build</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This should perform all non-interactive
+ configuration and compilation of the package. If a
+ package has an interactive pre-build configuration
+ routine, the Debianised source package should be
+ built after this has taken place, so that it can be
+ built without rerunning the configuration.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A package may also provide both of the targets
+ <tt>build-arch</tt> and <tt>build-indep</tt>. The
+ <tt>build-arch</tt> target, if provided, should
+ perform all non-interactive configuration and
+ compilation required for producing all
+ architecture-dependant binary packages (those packages
+ for which the body of the <tt>Architecture</tt> field
+ in <tt>debian/control</tt> is not <tt>all</tt>).
+ Similarly, the <tt>build-indep</tt> target, if
+ provided, should perform all non-interactive
+ configuration and compilation required for producing
+ all architecture-independent binary packages (those
+ packages for which the body of the
+ <tt>Architecture</tt> field in <tt>debian/control</tt>
+ is <tt>all</tt>). The <tt>build</tt> target should
+ depend on those of the targets <tt>build-arch</tt> and
+ <tt>build-indep</tt> that are provided in the rules
+ file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If one or both of the targets <tt>build-arch</tt> and
+ <tt>build-indep</tt> are not provided, then invoking
+ <file>debian/rules</file> with one of the not-provided
+ targets as arguments should produce a exit status code
+ of 2. Usually this is provided automatically by make
+ if the target is missing.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For some packages, notably ones where the same
+ source tree is compiled in different ways to produce
+ two binary packages, the <tt>build</tt> target does
+ not make much sense. For these packages it is good
+ enough to provide two (or more) targets
+ (<tt>build-a</tt> and <tt>build-b</tt> or whatever)
+ for each of the ways of building the package, and a
+ <tt>build</tt> target that does nothing. The
+ <tt>binary</tt> target will have to build the
+ package in each of the possible ways and make the
+ binary package out of each.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The targets <tt>build</tt>, <tt>build-arch</tt>
+ and <tt>build-indep</tt> target must not do
+ anything that might require root privilege.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>build</tt> target may need to run
+ <tt>clean</tt> first - see below.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When a package has a configuration routine that takes
+ a long time, or when the makefiles are poorly
+ designed, or when <tt>build</tt> needs to run
+ <tt>clean</tt> first, it is a good idea to <tt>touch
+ build</tt> when the build process is complete. This
+ will ensure that if <tt>debian/rules build</tt> is run
+ again it will not rebuild the whole program.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>binary</tt>, <tt>binary-arch</tt>,
+ <tt>binary-indep</tt>
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ The <tt>binary</tt> target should be all that is
+ necessary for the user to build the binary
+ package. All these targets are required to be
+ non-interactive. It is split into two parts:
+ <tt>binary-arch</tt> builds the packages' output
+ files which are specific to a particular
+ architecture, and <tt>binary-indep</tt> builds
+ those which are not.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <tt>binary</tt> should usually be a target with
+ no commands which simply depends on
+ <prgn>binary-arch</prgn> and
+ <prgn>binary-indep</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Both <prgn>binary-*</prgn> targets should depend on
+ the <tt>build</tt> target, above, so that the
+ package is built if it has not been already. It
+ should then create the relevant binary package(s),
+ using <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> to make their
+ control files and <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> to build
+ them and place them in the parent of the top level
+ directory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If one of the <prgn>binary-*</prgn> targets has
+ nothing to do (this will be always be the case if
+ the source generates only a single binary package,
+ whether architecture-dependent or not) it
+ <em>must</em> still exist, but should always
+ succeed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <ref id="pkg-binarypkg"> describes how to construct
+ binary packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>binary</tt> targets must be invoked as
+ root.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>clean</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This should undo any effects that the
+ <tt>build</tt> and <tt>binary</tt> targets
+ may have had, except that it should leave alone any
+ output files created in the parent directory by a
+ run of <tt>binary</tt>. This target is required
+ to be non-interactive.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a <tt>build</tt> file is touched at the end
+ of the <tt>build</tt> target, as suggested
+ above, it must be removed as the first thing that
+ <tt>clean</tt> does, so that running
+ <tt>build</tt> again after an interrupted
+ <tt>clean</tt> doesn't think that everything is
+ already done.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>clean</tt> target must be invoked as
+ root if <tt>binary</tt> has been invoked since
+ the last <tt>clean</tt>, or if
+ <tt>build</tt> has been invoked as root (since
+ <tt>build</tt> may create directories, for
+ example).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>get-orig-source</tt> (optional)</tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This target fetches the most recent version of the
+ original source package from a canonical archive
+ site (via FTP or WWW, for example), does any
+ necessary rearrangement to turn it into the original
+ source tarfile format described below, and leaves it
+ in the current directory.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This target may be invoked in any directory, and
+ should take care to clean up any temporary files it
+ may have left.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This target is optional, but providing it if
+ possible is a good idea.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist>
+
+ <p>
+ The <tt>build</tt>, <tt>binary</tt> and
+ <tt>clean</tt> targets must be invoked with a current
+ directory of the package's top-level directory.
+ </p>
+
+
+ <p>
+ Additional targets may exist in <file>debian/rules</file>,
+ either as published or undocumented interfaces or for the
+ package's internal use.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The architecture we build on and build for is determined by make
+ variables via dpkg-architecture (see <ref id="pkg-dpkgarch">). You can
+ get the Debian architecture and the GNU style architecture
+ specification string for the build machine as well as the host
+ machine. Here is a list of supported make variables:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><tt>DEB_*_ARCH</tt> (the Debian architecture)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><tt>DEB_*_GNU_TYPE</tt> (the GNU style architecture
+ specification string)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><tt>DEB_*_GNU_CPU</tt> (the CPU part of DEB_*_GNU_TYPE)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><tt>DEB_*_GNU_SYSTEM</tt> (the System part of
+ DEB_*_GNU_TYPE)</p>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ where <tt>*</tt> is either <tt>BUILD</tt> for specification of
+ the build machine or <tt>HOST</tt> for specification of the machine
+ we build for.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Backward compatibility can be provided in the rules file
+ by setting the needed variables to suitable default
+ values, please refer to the documentation of
+ dpkg-architecture for details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is important to understand that the <tt>DEB_*_ARCH</tt>
+ string does only determine which Debian architecture we
+ build on resp. for. It should not be used to get the CPU
+ or System information, the GNU style variables should be
+ used for that.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+ <sect1><heading><file>debian/control</file>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file contains version-independent details about the
+ source package and about the binary packages it creates.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is a series of sets of control fields, each
+ syntactically similar to a binary package control file.
+ The sets are separated by one or more blank lines. The
+ first set is information about the source package in
+ general; each subsequent set describes one binary package
+ that the source tree builds.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The syntax and semantics of the fields are described below
+ in <ref id="pkg-controlfields">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The general (binary-package-independent) fields are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Source"><tt>Source</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Maintainer"><tt>Maintainer</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-classification"><tt>Section</tt> and
+ <tt>Priority</tt></qref>
+ (classification, mandatory)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="relationships"><tt>Build-Depends</tt> et
+ al.</qref> (source package interrelationships)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Standards-Version"><tt>Standards-Version</tt></qref>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ The per-binary-package fields are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Package"><tt>Package</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Architecture"><tt>Architecture</tt></qref>
+ (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="descriptions"><tt>Description</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-classification"><tt>Section</tt> and
+ <tt>Priority</tt></qref> (classification)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Essential"><tt>Essential</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="relationships"><tt>Depends</tt> et
+ al.</qref> (binary package interrelationships)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ These fields are used by <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> to
+ generate control files for binary packages (see below), by
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> to generate the
+ <tt>.changes</tt> file to accompany the upload, and by
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> when it creates the <file>.dsc</file>
+ source control file as part of a source archive.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The fields here may contain variable references - their
+ values will be substituted by
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>, <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn>
+ or <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> when they generate output
+ control files. See <ref id="pkg-srcsubstvars"> for details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p> <sect2><heading>User-defined fields
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Additional user-defined fields may be added to the
+ source package control file. Such fields will be
+ ignored, and not copied to (for example) binary or
+ source package control files or upload control files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If you wish to add additional unsupported fields to
+ these output files you should use the mechanism
+ described here.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Fields in the main source control information file with
+ names starting <tt>X</tt>, followed by one or more of
+ the letters <tt>BCS</tt> and a hyphen <tt>-</tt>, will
+ be copied to the output files. Only the part of the
+ field name after the hyphen will be used in the output
+ file. Where the letter <tt>B</tt> is used the field
+ will appear in binary package control files, where the
+ letter <tt>S</tt> is used in source package control
+ files and where <tt>C</tt> is used in upload control
+ (<tt>.changes</tt>) files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, if the main source information control file
+ contains the field
+ <example>
+ XBS-Comment: I stand between the candle and the star.
+ </example>
+ then the binary and source package control files will contain the
+ field
+ <example>
+ Comment: I stand between the candle and the star.
+ </example>
+ </p>
+ </sect2>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-dpkgchangelog"><heading><file>debian/changelog</file>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file records the changes to the Debian-specific parts of the
+ package
+ <footnote>
+ Though there is nothing stopping an author who is also
+ the Debian maintainer from using it for all their
+ changes, it will have to be renamed if the Debian and
+ upstream maintainers become different
+ people.
+ </footnote>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It has a special format which allows the package building
+ tools to discover which version of the package is being
+ built and find out other release-specific information.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ That format is a series of entries like this:
+ <example>
+ <var>package</var> (<var>version</var>) <var>distribution(s)</var>; urgency=<var>urgency</var>
+
+ * <var>change details</var>
+ <var>more change details</var>
+ * <var>even more change details</var>
+
+ -- <var>maintainer name and email address</var> <var>date</var>
+ </example>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>package</var> and <var>version</var> are the source
+ package name and version number.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>distribution(s)</var> lists the distributions where
+ this version should be installed when it is uploaded - it
+ is copied to the <tt>Distribution</tt> field in the
+ <tt>.changes</tt> file. See <ref id="pkg-f-Distribution">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <var>urgency</var> is the value for the <tt>Urgency</tt>
+ field in the <file>.changes</file> file for the upload. See
+ <ref id="pkg-f-Urgency">. It is not possible to specify an
+ urgency containing commas; commas are used to separate
+ <tt><var>keyword</var>=<var>value</var></tt> settings in
+ the <prgn>dpkg</prgn> changelog format (though there is
+ currently only one useful <var>keyword</var>,
+ <tt>urgency</tt>).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The change details may in fact be any series of lines
+ starting with at least two spaces, but conventionally each
+ change starts with an asterisk and a separating space and
+ continuation lines are indented so as to bring them in
+ line with the start of the text above. Blank lines may be
+ used here to separate groups of changes, if desired.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The maintainer name and email address should <em>not</em>
+ necessarily be those of the usual package maintainer.
+ They should be the details of the person doing
+ <em>this</em> version. The information here will be
+ copied to the <file>.changes</file> file, and then later used
+ to send an acknowledgement when the upload has been
+ installed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <var>date</var> should be in RFC822 format
+ <footnote>
+ This is generated by the <prgn>822-date</prgn>
+ program.
+ </footnote>; it should include the timezone specified
+ numerically, with the timezone name or abbreviation
+ optionally present as a comment.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The first "title" line with the package name should start
+ at the left hand margin; the "trailer" line with the
+ maintainer and date details should be preceded by exactly
+ one space. The maintainer details and the date must be
+ separated by exactly two spaces.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ An Emacs mode for editing this format is available: it is
+ called <tt>debian-changelog-mode</tt>. You can have this
+ mode selected automatically when you edit a Debian
+ changelog by adding a local variables clause to the end of
+ the changelog.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect2><heading>Defining alternative changelog formats
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to use a different format to the standard
+ one, by providing a parser for the format you wish to
+ use.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In order to have <tt>dpkg-parsechangelog</tt> run your
+ parser, you must include a line within the last 40 lines
+ of your file matching the Perl regular expression:
+ <tt>\schangelog-format:\s+([0-9a-z]+)\W</tt> The part in
+ parentheses should be the name of the format. For
+ example, you might say:
+ <example>
+ @@@ changelog-format: joebloggs @@@
+ </example>
+ Changelog format names are non-empty strings of alphanumerics.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If such a line exists then <tt>dpkg-parsechangelog</tt>
+ will look for the parser as
+ <file>/usr/lib/dpkg/parsechangelog/<var>format-name</var></file>
+ or
+ <file>/usr/local/lib/dpkg/parsechangelog/<var>format-name</var></file>;
+ it is an error for it not to find it, or for it not to
+ be an executable program. The default changelog format
+ is <tt>dpkg</tt>, and a parser for it is provided with
+ the <tt>dpkg</tt> package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The parser will be invoked with the changelog open on
+ standard input at the start of the file. It should read
+ the file (it may seek if it wishes) to determine the
+ information required and return the parsed information
+ to standard output in the form of a series of control
+ fields in the standard format. By default it should
+ return information about only the most recent version in
+ the changelog; it should accept a
+ <tt>-v<var>version</var></tt> option to return changes
+ information from all versions present <em>strictly
+ after</em> <var>version</var>, and it should then be an
+ error for <var>version</var> not to be present in the
+ changelog.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The fields are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Source"><tt>Source</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="versions"><tt>Version</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Distribution"><tt>Distribution</tt></qref>
+ (mandatory)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Urgency"><tt>Urgency</tt></qref> (mandatory)</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Maintainer"><tt>Maintainer</tt></qref>
+ (mandatory)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Date"><tt>Date</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Changes"><tt>Changes</tt></qref>
+ (mandatory)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ If several versions are being returned (due to the use
+ of <tt>-v</tt>), the urgency value should be of the
+ highest urgency code listed at the start of any of the
+ versions requested followed by the concatenated
+ (space-separated) comments from all the versions
+ requested; the maintainer, version, distribution and
+ date should always be from the most recent version.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For the format of the <tt>Changes</tt> field see <ref
+ id="pkg-f-Changes">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the changelog format which is being parsed always or
+ almost always leaves a blank line between individual
+ change notes these blank lines should be stripped out,
+ so as to make the resulting output compact.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the changelog format does not contain date or package
+ name information this information should be omitted from
+ the output. The parser should not attempt to synthesise
+ it or find it from other sources.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the changelog does not have the expected format the
+ parser should exit with a nonzero exit status, rather
+ than trying to muddle through and possibly generating
+ incorrect output.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ A changelog parser may not interact with the user at
+ all.</p></sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+<!-- FIXME: section pkg-srcsubstvars is the same as srcsubstvars -->
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-srcsubstvars"><heading><file>debian/substvars</file>
+ and variable substitutions
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ When <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>,
+ <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> and <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>
+ generate control files they do variable substitutions on
+ their output just before writing it. Variable
+ substitutions have the form
+ <tt>${<var>variable-name</var>}</tt>. The optional file
+ <file>debian/substvars</file> contains variable substitutions
+ to be used; variables can also be set directly from
+ <file>debian/rules</file> using the <tt>-V</tt> option to the
+ source packaging commands, and certain predefined
+ variables are available.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This file is usually generated and modified dynamically by
+ <file>debian/rules</file> targets, in which case it must be
+ removed by the <tt>clean</tt> target.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See <manref name="dpkg-source" section="1"> for full
+ details about source variable substitutions, including the
+ format of <file>debian/substvars</file>.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1><heading><file>debian/files</file>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This file is not a permanent part of the source tree; it
+ is used while building packages to record which files are
+ being generated. <prgn>dpkg-genchanges</prgn> uses it
+ when it generates a <file>.changes</file> file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It should not exist in a shipped source package, and so it
+ (and any backup files or temporary files such as
+ <file>files.new</file>
+ <footnote>
+ <file>files.new</file> is used as a temporary file by
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> and
+ <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> - they write a new
+ version of <file>files</file> here before renaming it,
+ to avoid leaving a corrupted copy if an error
+ occurs
+ </footnote>) should be removed by the
+ <tt>clean</tt> target. It may also be wise to
+ ensure a fresh start by emptying or removing it at the
+ start of the <tt>binary</tt> target.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> adds an entry to this file
+ for the <file>.deb</file> file that will be created by
+ <prgn>dpkg-deb</prgn> from the control file that it
+ generates, so for most packages all that needs to be done
+ with this file is to delete it in <tt>clean</tt>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If a package upload includes files besides the source
+ package and any binary packages whose control files were
+ made with <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> then they should be
+ placed in the parent of the package's top-level directory
+ and <prgn>dpkg-distaddfile</prgn> should be called to add
+ the file to the list in <file>debian/files</file>.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1><heading><file>debian/tmp</file>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This is the canonical temporary location for the
+ construction of binary packages by the <tt>binary</tt>
+ target. The directory <file>tmp</file> serves as the root of
+ the filesystem tree as it is being constructed (for
+ example, by using the package's upstream makefiles install
+ targets and redirecting the output there), and it also
+ contains the <tt>DEBIAN</tt> subdirectory. See <ref
+ id="pkg-bincreating">.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If several binary packages are generated from the same
+ source tree it is usual to use several
+ <file>debian/tmp<var>something</var></file> directories, for
+ example <file>tmp-a</file> or <file>tmp-doc</file>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Whatever <file>tmp</file> directories are created and used by
+ <tt>binary</tt> must of course be removed by the
+ <tt>clean</tt> target.</p></sect1>
+ </sect>
+
+
+ <sect id="pkg-sourcearchives"><heading>Source packages as archives
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ As it exists on the FTP site, a Debian source package
+ consists of three related files. You must have the right
+ versions of all three to be able to use them.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <taglist>
+ <tag>Debian source control file - <tt>.dsc</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This file contains a series of fields, identified and
+ separated just like the fields in the control file of
+ a binary package. The fields are listed below; their
+ syntax is described above, in <ref id="pkg-controlfields">.
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Source"><tt>Source</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="versions"><tt>Version</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Maintainer"><tt>Maintainer</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Binary"><tt>Binary</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Architecture"><tt>Architecture</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="relationships"><tt>Build-Depends</tt> et
+ al.</qref> (source package interrelationships)
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Standards-Version"><tt>Standards-Version</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p><qref id="pkg-f-Files"><tt>Files</tt></qref></p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+
+ <p>
+ The source package control file is generated by
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> when it builds the source
+ archive, from other files in the source package,
+ described above. When unpacking it is checked against
+ the files and directories in the other parts of the
+ source package, as described below.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>
+ Original source archive -
+ <file>
+ <var>package</var>_<var>upstream-version</var>.orig.tar.gz
+ </file>
+ </tag>
+
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This is a compressed (with <tt>gzip -9</tt>)
+ <prgn>tar</prgn> file containing the source code from
+ the upstream authors of the program. The tarfile
+ unpacks into a directory
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>upstream-version</var>.orig</file>,
+ and does not contain files anywhere other than in
+ there or in its subdirectories.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag>
+ Debianisation diff -
+ <file>
+ <var>package</var>_<var>upstream_version-revision</var>.diff.gz
+ </file>
+ </tag>
+ <item>
+
+ <p>
+ This is a unified context diff (<tt>diff -u</tt>)
+ giving the changes which are required to turn the
+ original source into the Debian source. These changes
+ may only include editing and creating plain files.
+ The permissions of files, the targets of symbolic
+ links and the characteristics of special files or
+ pipes may not be changed and no files may be removed
+ or renamed.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ All the directories in the diff must exist, except the
+ <file>debian</file> subdirectory of the top of the source
+ tree, which will be created by
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> if necessary when unpacking.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> program will
+ automatically make the <file>debian/rules</file> file
+ executable (see below).</p></item>
+ </taglist>
+
+
+ <p>
+ If there is no original source code - for example, if the
+ package is specially prepared for Debian or the Debian
+ maintainer is the same as the upstream maintainer - the
+ format is slightly different: then there is no diff, and the
+ tarfile is named
+ <file><var>package</var>_<var>version</var>.tar.gz</file> and
+ contains a directory
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>version</var></file>.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect><heading>Unpacking a Debian source package without
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <tt>dpkg-source -x</tt> is the recommended way to unpack a
+ Debian source package. However, if it is not available it
+ is possible to unpack a Debian source archive as follows:
+ <enumlist compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Untar the tarfile, which will create a <file>.orig</file>
+ directory.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>Rename the <file>.orig</file> directory to
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>version</var></file>.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Create the subdirectory <file>debian</file> at the top of
+ the source tree.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p>Apply the diff using <tt>patch -p0</tt>.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p>Untar the tarfile again if you want a copy of the original
+ source code alongside the Debianised version.</p>
+ </item>
+ </enumlist>
+
+ <p>
+ It is not possible to generate a valid Debian source archive
+ without using <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>. In particular,
+ attempting to use <prgn>diff</prgn> directly to generate the
+ <file>.diff.gz</file> file will not work.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect1><heading>Restrictions on objects in source packages
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The source package may not contain any hard links
+ <footnote>
+ This is not currently detected when building source
+ packages, but only when extracting
+ them.
+ </footnote>
+ <footnote>
+ Hard links may be permitted at some point in the
+ future, but would require a fair amount of
+ work.
+ </footnote>, device special files, sockets or setuid or
+ setgid files.
+ <footnote>
+ Setgid directories are allowed.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The source packaging tools manage the changes between the
+ original and Debianised source using <prgn>diff</prgn> and
+ <prgn>patch</prgn>. Turning the original source tree as
+ included in the <file>.orig.tar.gz</file> into the debianised
+ source must not involve any changes which cannot be
+ handled by these tools. Problematic changes which cause
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> to halt with an error when
+ building the source package are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item><p>Adding or removing symbolic links, sockets or pipes.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p>Changing the targets of symbolic links.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p>Creating directories, other than <file>debian</file>.</p>
+ </item>
+ <item><p>Changes to the contents of binary files.</p></item>
+ </list> Changes which cause <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> to
+ print a warning but continue anyway are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Removing files, directories or symlinks.
+ <footnote>
+ Renaming a file is not treated specially - it is
+ seen as the removal of the old file (which
+ generates a warning, but is otherwise ignored),
+ and the creation of the new one.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Changed text files which are missing the usual final
+ newline (either in the original or the modified
+ source tree).
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </list>
+ Changes which are not represented, but which are not detected by
+ <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn>, are:
+ <list compact="compact">
+ <item><p>Changing the permissions of files (other than
+ <file>debian/rules</file>) and directories.</p></item>
+ </list>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The <file>debian</file> directory and <file>debian/rules</file>
+ are handled specially by <prgn>dpkg-source</prgn> - before
+ applying the changes it will create the <file>debian</file>
+ directory, and afterwards it will make
+ <file>debian/rules</file> world-exectuable.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+ </sect>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-controlfields"><heading>Control files and their
+ fields (from old Packaging Manual)
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ Many of the tools in the <prgn>dpkg</prgn> suite manipulate
+ data in a common format, known as control files. Binary and
+ source packages have control data as do the <file>.changes</file>
+ files which control the installation of uploaded files, and
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s internal databases are in a similar
+ format.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect><heading>Syntax of control files
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ A file consists of one or more paragraphs of fields. The
+ paragraphs are separated by blank lines. Some control files
+ only allow one paragraph; others allow several, in which
+ case each paragraph often refers to a different package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each paragraph is a series of fields and values; each field
+ consists of a name, followed by a colon and the value. It
+ ends at the end of the line. Horizontal whitespace (spaces
+ and tabs) may occur before or after the value and is ignored
+ there; it is conventional to put a single space after the
+ colon.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Some fields' values may span several lines; in this case
+ each continuation line <em>must</em> start with a space or
+ tab. Any trailing spaces or tabs at the end of individual
+ lines of a field value are ignored.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Except where otherwise stated only a single line of data is
+ allowed and whitespace is not significant in a field body.
+ Whitespace may never appear inside names (of packages,
+ architectures, files or anything else), version numbers or
+ in between the characters of multi-character version
+ relationships.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Field names are not case-sensitive, but it is usual to
+ capitalise the field names using mixed case as shown below.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Blank lines, or lines consisting only of spaces and tabs,
+ are not allowed within field values or between fields - that
+ would mean a new paragraph.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ It is important to note that there are several fields which
+ are optional as far as <prgn>dpkg</prgn> and the related
+ tools are concerned, but which must appear in every Debian
+ package, or whose omission may cause problems.
+ </p>
+ </sect>
+
+ <sect><heading>List of fields
+ </heading>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Package"><heading><tt>Package</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The name of the binary package. Package names consist of
+ the alphanumerics and <tt>+</tt> <tt>-</tt> <tt>.</tt>
+ (plus, minus and full stop).
+ <footnote>
+ The characters <tt>@</tt> <tt>:</tt> <tt>=</tt>
+ <tt>%</tt> <tt>_</tt> (at, colon, equals, percent
+ and underscore) used to be legal and are still
+ accepted when found in a package file, but may not be
+ used in new packages.
+ </footnote>
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ They must be at least two characters and must start with
+ an alphanumeric. In current versions of dpkg they are
+ sort of case-sensitive<footnote>
+ This is a bug.
+ </footnote>; use lowercase package names unless
+ the package you're building (or referring to, in other
+ fields) is already using uppercase.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Version"><heading><tt>Version</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This lists the source or binary package's version number -
+ see <ref id="versions">.
+ </p>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Architecture"><heading><tt>Architecture</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This is the architecture string; it is a single word for
+ the Debian architecture.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will check the declared architecture of
+ a binary package against its own compiled-in value before
+ it installs it.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The special value <tt>all</tt> indicates that the package
+ is architecture-independent.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the main <file>debian/control</file> file in the source
+ package, or in the source package control file
+ <file>.dsc</file>, a list of architectures (separated by
+ spaces) is also allowed, as is the special value
+ <tt>any</tt>. A list indicates that the source will build
+ an architecture-dependent package, and will only work
+ correctly on the listed architectures. <tt>any</tt>
+ indicates that though the source package isn't dependent
+ on any particular architecture and should compile fine on
+ any one, the binary package(s) produced are not
+ architecture-independent but will instead be specific to
+ whatever the current build architecture is.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file the <tt>Architecture</tt>
+ field lists the architecture(s) of the package(s)
+ currently being uploaded. This will be a list; if the
+ source for the package is being uploaded too the special
+ entry <tt>source</tt> is also present.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See <ref id="pkg-debianrules"> for information how to get the
+ architecture for the build process.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Maintainer"><heading><tt>Maintainer</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ The package maintainer's name and email address. The name
+ should come first, then the email address inside angle
+ brackets <tt><></tt> (in RFC822 format).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If the maintainer's name contains a full stop then the
+ whole field will not work directly as an email address due
+ to a misfeature in the syntax specified in RFC822; a
+ program using this field as an address must check for this
+ and correct the problem if necessary (for example by
+ putting the name in round brackets and moving it to the
+ end, and bringing the email address forward).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file or parsed changelog data this
+ contains the name and email address of the person
+ responsible for the particular version in question - this
+ may not be the package's usual maintainer.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ This field is usually optional in as far as the
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> are concerned, but its absence when
+ building packages usually generates a warning.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Source"><heading><tt>Source</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This field identifies the source package name.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In a main source control information or a
+ <file>.changes</file> or <file>.dsc</file> file or parsed
+ changelog data this may contain only the name of the
+ source package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In the control file of a binary package (or in a
+ <file>Packages</file> file) it may be followed by a version
+ number in parentheses.
+ <footnote>
+ It is usual to leave a space after the package name if
+ a version number is specified.
+ </footnote> This version number may be omitted (and is, by
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn>) if it has the same value as
+ the <tt>Version</tt> field of the binary package in
+ question. The field itself may be omitted from a binary
+ package control file when the source package has the same
+ name and version as the binary package.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1><heading>Package interrelationship fields:
+ <tt>Depends</tt>, <tt>Pre-Depends</tt>,
+ <tt>Recommends</tt> <tt>Suggests</tt>, <tt>Conflicts</tt>,
+ <tt>Provides</tt>, <tt>Replaces</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ These fields describe the package's relationships with
+ other packages. Their syntax and semantics are described
+ in <ref id="relationships">.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Description"><heading><tt>Description</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ In a binary package <tt>Packages</tt> file or main source
+ control file this field contains a description of the
+ binary package, in a special format. See <ref
+ id="descriptions"> for details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file it contains a summary of the
+ descriptions for the packages being uploaded. The part of
+ the field before the first newline is empty; thereafter
+ each line has the name of a binary package and the summary
+ description line from that binary package. Each line is
+ indented by one space.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Essential"><heading><tt>Essential</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This is a boolean field which may occur only in the
+ control file of a binary package (or in the
+ <file>Packages</file> file) or in a per-package fields
+ paragraph of a main source control data file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If set to <tt>yes</tt> then <prgn>dpkg</prgn> and
+ <prgn>dselect</prgn> will refuse to remove the package
+ (though it can be upgraded and/or replaced). The other
+ possible value is <tt>no</tt>, which is the same as not
+ having the field at all.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-classification"><heading><tt>Section</tt> and
+ <tt>Priority</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ These two fields classify the package. The
+ <tt>Priority</tt> represents how important that it is that
+ the user have it installed; the <tt>Section</tt>
+ represents an application area into which the package has
+ been classified.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When they appear in the <file>debian/control</file> file these
+ fields give values for the section and priority subfields
+ of the <tt>Files</tt> field of the <file>.changes</file> file,
+ and give defaults for the section and priority of the
+ binary packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The section and priority are represented, though not as
+ separate fields, in the information for each file in the
+ <qref id="pkg-f-Files"><tt>-File</tt></qref>field of a
+ <file>.changes</file> file. The section value in a
+ <file>.changes</file> file is used to decide where to install
+ a package in the FTP archive.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These fields are not used by by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> proper,
+ but by <prgn>dselect</prgn> when it sorts packages and
+ selects defaults.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ These fields can appear in binary package control files,
+ in which case they provide a default value in case the
+ <file>Packages</file> files are missing the information.
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> and <prgn>dselect</prgn> will only use
+ the value from a <file>.deb</file> file if they have no other
+ information; a value listed in a <file>Packages</file> file
+ will always take precedence. By default
+ <prgn>dpkg-gencontrol</prgn> does not include the section
+ and priority in the control file of a binary package - use
+ the <tt>-isp</tt>, <tt>-is</tt> or <tt>-ip</tt> options to
+ achieve this effect.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Binary"><heading><tt>Binary</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This field is a list of binary packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When it appears in the <file>.dsc</file> file it is the list
+ of binary packages which a source package can produce. It
+ does not necessarily produce all of these binary packages
+ for every architecture. The source control file doesn't
+ contain details of which architectures are appropriate for
+ which of the binary packages.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ When it appears in a <file>.changes</file> file it lists the
+ names of the binary packages actually being uploaded.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The syntax is a list of binary packages separated by
+ commas.
+ <footnote>
+ A space after each comma is conventional.
+ </footnote> Currently the packages must be separated using
+ only spaces in the <file>.changes</file> file.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Installed-Size"><heading><tt>Installed-Size</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This field appears in the control files of binary
+ packages, and in the <file>Packages</file> files. It gives
+ the total amount of disk space required to install the
+ named package.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The disk space is represented in kilobytes as a simple
+ decimal number.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Files"><heading><tt>Files</tt>
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ This field contains a list of files with information about
+ each one. The exact information and syntax varies with
+ the context. In all cases the part of the field
+ contents on the same line as the field name is empty. The
+ remainder of the field is one line per file, each line
+ being indented by one space and containing a number of
+ sub-fields separated by spaces.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- <taglist>
- <tag>configuration file</tag>
- <item><p>
- A file that affects the operation of program, or
- provides site- or host-specific information, or
- otherwise customizes the behavior of program.
- Typically, configuration files are intended to be
- modified by the system administrator (if needed or
- desired) to conform to local policy or provide more
- useful site-specific behavior.</p>
- </item>
+ In the <file>.dsc</file> (Debian source control) file each
+ line contains the MD5 checksum, size and filename of the
+ tarfile and (if applicable) diff file which make up the
+ remainder of the source package.
+ <footnote>
+ That is, the parts which are not the <tt>.dsc</tt>.
+ </footnote> The exact forms of the filenames are described
+ in <ref id="pkg-sourcearchives">.
+ </p>
- <tag><tt>conffile</tt></tag>
- <item><p>
- A file listed in a package's <tt>conffiles</tt>
- file, and is treated specially by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
- (see the <em>Debian Packaging Manual</em>).</p>
- </item>
- </taglist>
+ <p>
+ In the <file>.changes</file> file this contains one line per
+ file being uploaded. Each line contains the MD5 checksum,
+ size, section and priority and the filename. The section
+ and priority are the values of the corresponding fields in
+ the main source control file - see <ref
+ id="pkg-f-classification">. If no section or priority is
+ specified then <tt>-</tt> should be used, though section
+ and priority values must be specified for new packages to
+ be installed properly.
</p>
<p>
- The distinction between these two is important; they are
- not interchangeable concepts. Almost all
- <tt>conffiles</tt> are configuration files, but many
- configuration files are not <tt>conffiles</tt>.</p>
+ The special value <tt>byhand</tt> for the section in a
+ <tt>.changes</tt> file indicates that the file in question
+ is not an ordinary package file and must by installed by
+ hand by the distribution maintainers. If the section is
+ <tt>byhand</tt> the priority should be <tt>-</tt>.
+ </p>
<p>
- Note that a script that embeds configuration information
- (such as most of the files in <tt>/etc/init.d</tt> and
- <tt>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</tt>) is de-facto a
- configuration file and should be treated as such.</p>
+ If a new Debian revision of a package is being shipped and
+ no new original source archive is being distributed the
+ <tt>.dsc</tt> must still contain the <tt>Files</tt> field
+ entry for the original source archive
+ <file><var>package</var>-<var>upstream-version</var>.orig.tar.gz</file>,
+ but the <file>.changes</file> file should leave it out. In
+ this case the original source archive on the distribution
+ site must match exactly, byte-for-byte, the original
+ source archive which was used to generate the
+ <file>.dsc</file> file and diff which are being uploaded.</p>
</sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Location</heading>
+
+ <sect1
+ id="pkg-f-Standards-Version"><heading><tt>Standards-Version</tt>
+ </heading>
+
<p>
- Any configuration files created or used by your package
- should reside in <tt>/etc</tt>. If there are several you
- should consider creating a subdirectory of <tt>/etc</tt>
- named after your package.</p>
+ The most recent version of the standards (the Debian Policy
+ and associated texts) with which the package complies. This
+ is updated manually when editing the source package to
+ conform to newer standards; it can sometimes be used to
+ tell when a package needs attention.
+ </p>
<p>
- If your packages creates or uses configuration files
- outside of <tt>/etc</tt>, and it is not feasible to modify
- the package to use the <tt>/etc</tt>, you should still put
- the files in <tt>/etc</tt> and create symbolic links to
- those files from the location that the package
- requires.</p>
+ Its format is the same as that of a version number except
+ that no epoch or Debian revision is allowed - see <ref
+ id="versions">.</p>
</sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Behavior</heading>
- <p>
- Configuration file handling must conform to the following
- behavior:
- <list>
- <item>
- <p>local changes must be preserved during a package
- upgrade</p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>configuration files should be preserved when the
- package is removed, and only deleted when the
- package is purged.</p>
- </item>
- </list></p>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Distribution"><heading><tt>Distribution</tt>
+ </heading>
<p>
- The easy way to achieve this behavior is to make the
- configuration file a <tt>conffile</tt>. This is
- appropriate if it is possible to distribute a default
- version that will work for most installations, although
- some system administrators may choose to modify it. This
- implies that the default version will be part of the
- package distribution, and must not be modified by the
- maintainer scripts during installation (or at any other
- time).</p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file or parsed changelog output
+ this contains the (space-separated) name(s) of the
+ distribution(s) where this version of the package should
+ be or was installed. Distribution names follow the rules
+ for package names. (See <ref id="pkg-f-Package">).
+ </p>
<p>
- In order to ensure that local changes are preserved
- correctly, no package may contain or make hard links to
- conffiles.
- <footnote>
+ Current distribution values are:
+ <taglist>
+ <tag><em>stable</em></tag>
+ <item>
<p>
- Rationale: There are two problems with hard links.
- The first is that some editors break the link while
- editing one of the files, so that the two files may
- unwittingly become different. The second is that
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn> might break the hard link while
- upgrading <tt>conffile</tt>s.
+ This is the current "released" version of Debian
+ GNU/Linux. A new version is released approximately
+ every 3 months after the <em>development</em> code has
+ been <em>frozen</em> for a month of testing. Once the
+ distribution is <em>stable</em> only major bug fixes
+ are allowed. When changes are made to this
+ distribution, the release number is increased
+ (for example: 1.2r1 becomes 1.2r2 then 1.2r3, etc).
</p>
- </footnote>
+ </item>
- <p>
- The other way to do it is to via the maintainer scripts.
- In this case, the configuration file must not be listed as
- a <tt>conffile</tt> and must not be part of the package
- distribution. If the existence of a file is required for
- the package to be sensibly configured it is the
- responsibility of the package maintainer to write scripts
- which correctly create, update, maintain and
- remove-on-purge the file. These scripts must be idempotent
- (i.e. must work correctly if <prgn>dpkg</prgn> needs to
- re-run them due to errors during installation or removal),
- must cope with all the variety of ways <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
- can call maintainer scripts, must not overwrite or
- otherwise mangle the user's configuration without asking,
- must not ask unnecessary questions (particularly during
- upgrades), and otherwise be good citizens.</p>
+ <tag><em>unstable</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ This distribution value refers to the
+ <em>developmental</em> part of the Debian distribution
+ tree. New packages, new upstream versions of packages
+ and bug fixes go into the <em>unstable</em> directory
+ tree. Download from this distribution at your own
+ risk.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>contrib</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ The packages with this distribution value do not meet
+ the criteria for inclusion in the main Debian
+ distribution as defined by the Policy Manual, but meet
+ the criteria for the <em>contrib</em>
+ Distribution. There is currently no distinction
+ between stable and unstable packages in the
+ <em>contrib</em> or <em>non-free</em>
+ distributions. Use your best judgement in downloading
+ from this Distribution.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>non-free</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ Like the packages in the <em>contrib</em> seciton,
+ the packages in <em>non-free</em> do not meet the
+ criteria for inclusion in the main Debian distribution
+ as defined by the Policy Manual. Again, use your best
+ judgement in downloading from this Distribution.</p>
+
+ <tag><em>experimental</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ The packages with this distribution value are deemed
+ by their maintainers to be high risk. Oftentimes they
+ represent early beta or developmental packages from
+ various sources that the maintainers want people to
+ try, but are not ready to be a part of the other parts
+ of the Debian distribution tree. Download at your own
+ risk.</p>
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><em>frozen</em></tag>
+ <item>
+ <p>
+ From time to time, (currently, every 3 months) the
+ <em>unstable</em> distribution enters a state of
+ "code-freeze" in anticipation of release as a
+ <em>stable</em> version. During this period of testing
+ (usually 4 weeks) only fixes for existing or
+ newly-discovered bugs will be allowed.
+ </p>
+ </item>
+ </taglist> You should list <em>all</em> distributions that
+ the package should be installed into. Except in unusual
+ circumstances, installations to <em>stable</em> should also
+ go into <em>frozen</em> (if it exists) and
+ <em>unstable</em>. Likewise, installations into
+ <em>frozen</em> should also go into <em>unstable</em>.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Urgency"><heading><tt>Urgency</tt>
+ </heading>
<p>
- The scripts need not configure every possible option for
- the package, but only those necessary to get the package
- running on a given system. Ideally the sysadmin should not
- have to do any configuration other than that done
- (semi-)automatically by the <tt>postinst</tt> script.</p>
+ This is a description of how important it is to upgrade to
+ this version from previous ones. It consists of a single
+ keyword usually taking one of the values <tt>LOW</tt>,
+ <tt>MEDIUM</tt> or <tt>HIGH</tt>) followed by an optional
+ commentary (separated by a space) which is usually in
+ parentheses. For example:
+ <example>
+ Urgency: LOW (HIGH for diversions users)
+ </example>
+ </p>
<p>
- A common practice is to create a script called
- <tt><var>package</var>-configure</tt> and have the
- package's <tt>postinst</tt> call it if and only if the
- configuration file does not already exist. In certain
- cases it is useful for there to be an example or template
- file which the maintainer scripts use. Such files should
- be in <tt>/usr/share/doc</tt> if they are examples or
- <tt>/usr/lib</tt> if they are templates, and should be
- perfectly ordinary <prgn>dpkg</prgn>-handled files
- (<em>not</em> <tt>conffiles</tt>).</p>
+ This field appears in the <file>.changes</file> file and in
+ parsed changelogs; its value appears as the value of the
+ <tt>urgency</tt> attribute in a <prgn>dpkg</prgn>-style
+ changelog (see <ref id="pkg-dpkgchangelog">).
+ </p>
<p>
- These two styles of configuration file handling <em>must
- not be mixed</em>, for that way lies madness:
- <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will ask about overwriting the file
- every time the package is upgraded.</p>
+ Urgency keywords are not case-sensitive.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Date"><heading><tt>Date</tt>
+ </heading>
+ <p>
+ In <tt>.changes</tt> files and parsed changelogs, this
+ gives the date the package was built or last edited.</p>
</sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>Sharing configuration files</heading>
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Format"><heading><tt>Format</tt>
+ </heading>
+
<p>
- Only packages that are tagged <em>conflicting</em> with
- each other may specify the same file as
- <tt>conffile</tt>.</p>
+ This field occurs in <file>.changes</file> files, and
+ specifies a format revision for the file. The format
+ described here is version <tt>1.5</tt>. The syntax of the
+ format value is the same as that of a package version
+ number except that no epoch or Debian revision is allowed
+ - see <ref id="versions">.</p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Changes"><heading><tt>Changes</tt>
+ </heading>
<p>
- The maintainer scripts should not alter the conffile of
- <em>any</em> package, including the one the scripts belong
- to.</p>
+ In a <file>.changes</file> file or parsed changelog this field
+ contains the human-readable changes data, describing the
+ differences between the last version and the current one.
+ </p>
<p>
- If two or more packages use the same configuration file
- and it is reasonable for both to be installed at the same
- time, one of these packages must be defined as
- <em>owner</em> of the configuration file, i.e. it will be
- the package to list that distributes the file and lists it
- as a <tt>conffile</tt>. Other packages that use the
- configuration file should depend on the owning package if
- they require the configuration file to operate. If the
- other package will use the configuration file if present,
- but is capable of operating without it, no dependency need
- be declared.</p>
+ There should be nothing in this field before the first
+ newline; all the subsequent lines must be indented by at
+ least one space; blank lines must be represented by a line
+ consiting only of a space and a full stop.
+ </p>
<p>
- If it is desirable for two or more related packages to
- share a configuration file <em>and</em> for all of the
- related packages to be able to modify that configuration
- file, then the following should done:
- <enumlist>
- <item>
- <p>
- have one of the related packages (the "core"
- package) manage the configuration file with
- maintainer scripts as described in the previous
- section.</p>
- </item>
- <item><p>
- the core package should also provide a program that
- the other packages may use to modify the
- configuration file.</p>
- </item>
- <item>
- <p>
- the related packages must use the provided program
- to make any modifications to the configuration file.
- They should either depend on the core package to
- guarantee that the configuration modifier program is
- available or accept gracefully that they cannot
- modify the configuration file if it is not.</p>
- </item>
- </enumlist></p>
+ Each version's change information should be preceded by a
+ "title" line giving at least the version, distribution(s)
+ and urgency, in a human-readable way.
+ </p>
<p>
- Sometimes it's appropriate to create a new package which
- provides the basic infrastructure for the other packages
- and which manages the shared configuration files. (Check
- out the <tt>sgml-base</tt> package as an example.)</p>
+ If data from several versions is being returned the entry
+ for the most recent version should be returned first, and
+ entries should be separated by the representation of a
+ blank line (the "title" line may also be followed by the
+ representation of blank line).</p>
</sect1>
- <sect1>
- <heading>User configuration files ("dotfiles")</heading>
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Filename">
+ <heading><tt>Filename</tt> and <tt>MSDOS-Filename</tt></heading>
<p>
- Files in <tt>/etc/skel</tt> will automatically be copied
- into new user accounts by <prgn>adduser</prgn>. They
- should not be referenced there by any program.</p>
+ These fields in <tt>Packages</tt> files give the
+ filename(s) of (the parts of) a package in the
+ distribution directories, relative to the root of the
+ Debian hierarchy. If the package has been split into
+ several parts the parts are all listed in order, separated
+ by spaces.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Size">
+ <heading><tt>Size</tt> and <tt>MD5sum</tt></heading>
<p>
- Therefore, if a program needs a dotfile to exist in
- advance in <tt>$HOME</tt> to work sensibly that dotfile
- should be installed in <tt>/etc/skel</tt> (and listed in
- conffiles, if it is not generated and modified dynamically
- by the package's installation scripts).</p>
+ These fields in <file>Packages</file> files give the size (in
+ bytes, expressed in decimal) and MD5 checksum of the
+ file(s) which make(s) up a binary package in the
+ distribution. If the package is split into several parts
+ the values for the parts are listed in order, separated by
+ spaces.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Status">
+ <heading><tt>Status</tt></heading>
<p>
- However, programs that require dotfiles in order to
- operate sensibly (dotfiles that they do not create
- themselves automatically, that is) are a bad thing, and
- programs should be configured by the Debian default
- installation as close to normal as possible.</p>
+ This field in <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s status file records
+ whether the user wants a package installed, removed or
+ left alone, whether it is broken (requiring
+ reinstallation) or not and what its current state on the
+ system is. Each of these pieces of information is a
+ single word.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Config-Version">
+ <heading><tt>Config-Version</tt></heading>
<p>
- Therefore, if a program in a Debian package needs to be
- configured in some way in order to operate sensibly that
- configuration should be done in a site-wide global
- configuration file elsewhere in <tt>/etc</tt>. Only if the
- program doesn't support a site-wide default configuration
- and the package maintainer doesn't have time to add it
- should a default per-user file be placed in
- <tt>/etc/skel</tt>.</p>
+ If a package is not installed or not configured, this
+ field in <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s status file records the last
+ version of the package which was successfully
+ configured.
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="pkg-f-Conffiles">
+ <heading><tt>Conffiles</tt></heading>
<p>
- <tt>/etc/skel</tt> should be as empty as we can make it.
- This is particularly true because there is no easy
- mechanism for ensuring that the appropriate dotfiles are
- copied into the accounts of existing users when a package
- is installed.</p>
+ This field in <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s status file contains
+ information about the automatically-managed configuration
+ files held by a package. This field should <em>not</em>
+ appear anywhere in a package!
+ </p>
</sect1>
- </sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Log files</heading>
- <p>
- The traditional approach to log files has been to set up ad
- hoc log rotation schemes using simple shell scripts and
- cron. While this approach is highly customizable, it
- requires quite a lot of sysadmin work. Even though the
- original Debian system helped a little by automatically
- installing a system which can be used as a template, this
- was deemed not enough.
- </p>
- <p>
- A better scheme is to use logrotate, a GPL'd program
- developed by Red Hat, which centralizes log management. It
- has both a configuration file (<tt>/etc/logrotate.conf</tt>)
- and a directory where packages can drop logrotation info
- (<tt>/etc/logrotate.d</tt>).
- </p>
+ <sect1>
+ <heading>Obsolete fields</heading>
- <p>
- Log files should usually be named
- <tt>/var/log/<var>package</var>.log</tt>. If you have many
- log files, or need a separate directory for permissions
- reasons (<tt>/var/log</tt> is writable only by
- <tt>root</tt>), you should usually create a directory named
- <tt>/var/log/<var>package</var></tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Make sure that any log files are rotated occasionally so
- that they don't grow indefinitely; the best way to do this
- is to drop a script into the directory
- <tt>/etc/logrotate.d</tt> and use the facilities provided by
- logrotate. Here is a good example for a logrotate config
- file (for more information see <manref name="logrotate"
- section="8">):
- <example>
- /var/log/foo/* {
- rotate 12
- weekly
- compress
- postrotate
- /etc/init.d/foo force-reload
- endscript
- }
- </example>
- Which rotates all files under `/var/log/foo', saves 12
- compressed generations, and sends a HUP signal at the end of
- rotation.
-
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Make sure that any log files are removed when the package is
- purged (but not when it is only removed), by checking the
- argument to the <tt>postrm</tt> script (see the <em>Debian
- Packaging Manual</em> for details).</p>
- </sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Permissions and owners</heading>
-
- <p>
- The rules in this section are guidelines for general use.
- If necessary you may deviate from the details below.
- However, if you do so you must make sure that what is done
- is secure and you must try to be as consistent as possible
- with the rest of the system. You should probably also
- discuss it on <prgn>debian-devel</prgn> first.</p>
-
- <p>
- Files should be owned by <tt>root.root</tt>, and made
- writable only by the owner and universally readable (and
- executable, if appropriate).</p>
-
- <p>
- Directories should be mode 755 or (for group-writability)
- mode 2775. The ownership of the directory should be
- consistent with its mode--if a directory is mode 2775, it
- should be owned by the group that needs write access to
- it.</p>
-
- <p>
- Setuid and setgid executables should be mode 4755 or 2755
- respectively, and owned by the appropriate user or group.
- They should not be made unreadable (modes like 4711 or
- 2711 or even 4111); doing so achieves no extra security,
- because anyone can find the binary in the freely available
- Debian package--it is merely inconvenient. For the same
- reason you should not restrict read or execute permissions
- on non-set-id executables.</p>
-
- <p>
- Some setuid programs need to be restricted to particular
- sets of users, using file permissions. In this case they
- should be owned by the uid to which they are set-id, and
- by the group which should be allowed to execute them.
- They should have mode 4754; there is no point in making
- them unreadable to those users who must not be allowed to
- execute them.</p>
-
- <p>
- Do not arrange that the system administrator can only
- reconfigure the package to correspond to their local
- security policy by changing the permissions on a binary.
- Ordinary files installed by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> (as opposed
- to conffiles and other similar objects) have their
- permissions reset to the distributed permissions when the
- package is reinstalled. Instead you should consider (for
- example) creating a group for people allowed to use the
- program(s) and making any setuid executables executable
- only by that group.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you need to create a new user or group for your package
- there are two possibilities. Firstly, you may need to
- make some files in the binary package be owned by this
- user or group, or you may need to compile the user or
- group id (rather than just the name) into the binary
- (though this latter should be avoided if possible). In
- this case you need a statically allocated id.</p>
-
- <p>
- You must ask for a user or group id from the base system
- maintainer, and must not release the package until you
- have been allocated one. Once you have been allocated one
- you must make the package depend on a version of the base
- system with the id present in <tt>/etc/passwd</tt> or
- <tt>/etc/group</tt>, or alternatively arrange for your
- package to create the user or group itself with the
- correct id (using <tt>adduser</tt>) in its pre- or
- post-installation script (the latter is to be preferred if
- it is possible).</p>
-
- <p>
- On the other hand, the program may able to determine the
- uid or gid from the group name at runtime, so that a
- dynamic id can be used. In this case you must choose an
- appropriate user or group name, discussing this on
- <prgn>debian-devel</prgn> and checking with the base
- system maintainer that it is unique and that they do not
- wish you to use a statically allocated id instead. When
- this has been checked you must arrange for your package to
- create the user or group if necessary using
- <prgn>adduser</prgn> in the pre- or post-installation
- script (again, the latter is to be preferred if it is
- possible).</p>
-
- <p>
- Note that changing the numeric value of an id associated with a name
- is very difficult, and involves searching the file system for all
- appropriate files. You need to think carefully whether a static or
- dynamic id is required, since changing your mind later will cause
- problems.</p>
- </sect>
- </chapt>
+ <p>
+ These are still recognised by <prgn>dpkg</prgn> but should
+ not appear anywhere any more.
- <chapt>
- <heading>Customized programs</heading>
-
- <sect id="arch-spec">
- <heading>Architecture specification strings</heading>
-
- <p>
- If a program needs to specify an <em>architecture specification
- string</em> in some place, the following format has to be used:
- <example>
- <arch>-<os>
- </example>
- where `<arch>' is one of the following: i386, alpha, arm, m68k,
- powerpc, sparc and `<os>' is one of: linux, gnu. Use
- of <em>gnu</em> in this string is reserved for the GNU/Hurd
- operating system. .</p>
- <p>
- Note, that we don't want to use `<arch>-debian-linux'
- to apply to the rule `architecture-vendor-os' since this
- would make our programs incompatible to other Linux
- distributions. Also note, that we don't use
- `<arch>-unknown-linux', since the `unknown' does not
- look very good.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Daemons</heading>
-
- <p>
- The configuration files <tt>/etc/services</tt>,
- <tt>/etc/protocols</tt>, and <tt>/etc/rpc</tt> are managed
- by the <prgn>netbase</prgn> package and may not be modified
- by other packages.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a package requires a new entry in one of these files, the
- maintainer has to get in contact with the
- <prgn>netbase</prgn> maintainer, who will add the entries
- and release a new version of the <prgn>netbase</prgn>
- package.</p>
-
- <p>
- The configuration file <tt>/etc/inetd.conf</tt> may be
- modified by the package's scripts only via the
- <prgn>update-inetd</prgn> script or the
- <prgn>DebianNet.pm</prgn> Perl module.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a package wants to install an example entry into
- <tt>/etc/inetd.conf</tt>, the entry has to be preceded with
- exactly one hash character (<tt>#</tt>). Such lines are
- treated as `commented out by user' by the
- <prgn>update-inetd</prgn> script and are not changed or
- activated during a package updates.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Using pseudo-ttys and modifying wtmp, utmp and lastlog</heading>
-
- <p>
- Some programs need to create pseudo-ttys. This should be done
- using Unix98 ptys if the C library supports it. The resulting
- program must not be installed setuid root, unless that
- is required for other functionality.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- The files <tt>/var/run/utmp</tt>, <tt>/var/log/wtmp</tt> and
- <tt>/var/log/lastlog</tt> must be installed writeable by
- group utmp. Programs who need to modify those files must
- be installed install setgid utmp.
- </p>
+ <taglist compact="compact">
+
+ <tag><tt>Revision</tt></tag>
+ <tag><tt>Package-Revision</tt></tag>
+ <tag><tt>Package_Revision</tt></tag>
+ <item>
+ The Debian revision part of the package version was
+ at one point in a separate control file field. This
+ field went through several names.
+ </item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Recommended</tt></tag>
+ <item>Old name for <tt>Recommends</tt>.</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Optional</tt></tag>
+ <item>Old name for <tt>Suggests</tt>.</item>
+
+ <tag><tt>Class</tt></tag>
+ <item>Old name for <tt>Priority</tt>.</item>
+
+ </taglist>
+ </p>
+ </sect1>
</sect>
- <sect>
- <heading>Editors and pagers</heading>
-
- <p>
- Some programs have the ability to launch an editor or pager
- program to edit or display a text document. Since there are
- lots of different editors and pagers available in the Debian
- distribution, the system administrator and each user should
- have the possibility to choose his/her preferred editor and
- pager.</p>
-
- <p>
- In addition, every program should choose a good default
- editor/pager if none is selected by the user or system
- administrator.</p>
-
- <p>
- Thus, every program that launches an editor or pager has to
- use the EDITOR or PAGER environment variables to determine
- the editor/pager the user wants to get started. If these
- variables are not set, the programs <tt>/usr/bin/editor</tt>
- and <tt>/usr/bin/pager</tt> have to be used, respectively.</p>
-
- <p>
- These two files are managed through `alternatives.' That is,
- every package providing an editor or pager has to call the
- <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> script to register these
- programs.</p>
-
- <p>
- If it is very hard to adapt a program to make us of the
- EDITOR and PAGER variable, that program should be configured
- to use <tt>/usr/bin/sensible-editor</tt> and
- <tt>/usr/bin/sensible-pager</tt> as editor or pager program,
- respectively. These are two scripts provided in the Debian
- base system that check the EDITOR and PAGER variables and
- launches the appropriate program or falls back to
- <tt>/usr/bin/editor</tt> and <tt>/usr/bin/pager</tt>,
- automatically.</p>
-
- <p>
- A program may also use the VISUAL environment variable to
- determine the user's choice of editor. If it exists, it
- should take precedence over EDITOR. This is in fact what
- <tt>/usr/bin/sensible-editor</tt> does.</p>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-conffiles">
+ <heading>Configuration file handling (from old Packaging Manual)</heading>
+
+ <p>
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> can do a certain amount of automatic
+ handling of package configuration files.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Whether this mechanism is appropriate depends on a number of
+ factors, but basically there are two approaches to any
+ particular configuration file.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The easy method is to ship a best-effort configuration in the
+ package, and use <prgn>dpkg</prgn>'s conffile mechanism to
+ handle updates. If the user is unlikely to want to edit the
+ file, but you need them to be able to without losing their
+ changes, and a new package with a changed version of the file
+ is only released infrequently, this is a good approach.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ The hard method is to build the configuration file from
+ scratch in the <prgn>postinst</prgn> script, and to take the
+ responsibility for fixing any mistakes made in earlier
+ versions of the package automatically. This will be
+ appropriate if the file is likely to need to be different on
+ each system.
+ </p>
+
+ <sect><heading>Automatic handling of configuration files by
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>
+ </heading>
<p>
- Since the Debian base system already provides an editor and
- a pager program, there is no need for a package to depend on
- `editor' and `pager', nor is it necessary for a package to
- provide such virtual packages.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect id="web-appl">
- <heading>Web servers and applications</heading>
-
- <p>
- This section describes the locations and URLs that have to
- be used by all web servers and web application in the Debian
- system.</p>
-
- <p>
- <enumlist>
- <item>
- <p>Cgi-bin executable files are installed in the
- directory
- <example>
- /usr/lib/cgi-bin/<cgi-bin-name>
- </example>
- and can be referred to as
- <example>
- http://localhost/cgi-bin/<cgi-bin-name>
- </example></p></item>
-
-
- <item><p>Access to html documents</p>
-
- <p>
- Html documents for a package are stored in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt> but should
- be accessed via symlinks as
- <tt>/usr/doc/<var>package</var></tt><footnote> for
- backward compatibility, see <ref id="usrdoc"></footnote>
- and can be referred to as
- <example>
- http://localhost/doc/<package>/<filename>
- </example></p></item>
-
-
- <item><p>Web Document Root</p>
-
- <p>
- Web Applications should try to avoid storing files in
- the Web Document Root. Instead use the
- /usr/share/doc/<package> directory for documents and
- register the Web Application via the menu package. If
- access to the web-root is unavoidable then use
- <example>
- /var/www
- </example>
- as the Document Root. This might be just a
- symbolic link to the location where the sysadmin has
- put the real document root.</p>
- </item>
-
- </enumlist></p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Mail transport agents</heading>
-
- <p>
- Debian packages which process electronic mail, whether
- mail-user-agents (MUAs) or mail-transport-agents (MTAs),
- <em>must</em> make sure that they are compatible with the
- configuration decisions below. Failure to do this may
- result in lost mail, broken <tt>From:</tt> lines, and other
- serious brain damage!</p>
-
- <p>
- The mail spool is <tt>/var/spool/mail</tt> and the interface
- to send a mail message is <tt>/usr/sbin/sendmail</tt> (as
- per the FHS). The mail spool is part of the base system
- and not part of the MTA package.</p>
-
- <p>
- All Debian MUAs, MTAs, MDAs and other mailbox accessing
- programs (like IMAP daemons) have to lock the mailbox in a
- NFS-safe way. This means that <tt>fcntl()</tt> locking has
- to be combined with dot locking. To avoid dead locks, a
- program has to use <tt>fcntl()</tt> first and dot locking
- after this or alternatively implement the two locking
- methods in a non blocking way<footnote>
- <p>
- If it is not possible to establish both locks, the
- system shouldn't wait for the second lock to be
- established, but remove the first lock, wait a (random)
- time, and start over locking again.</p>
- </footnote>. Using the functions <tt>maillock</tt> and
- <tt>mailunlock</tt> provided by the
- <tt>liblockfile*</tt><footnote>
- <p>
- <tt>liblockfile</tt> version >>1.01</p>
- </footnote> packages is the recommended way to realize this.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- Mailboxes are generally 660 <tt><var>user</var>.mail</tt>
- unless the user has chosen otherwise. A MUA may remove a
- mailbox (unless it has nonstandard permissions) in which
- case the MTA or another MUA must recreate it if needed.
- Mailboxes must be writable by group mail.</p>
-
- <p>
- The mail spool is 2775 <tt>mail.mail</tt>, and MUAs need to
- be setgid mail to do the locking mentioned above (and
- obviously need to avoid accessing other users' mailboxes
- using this privilege).</p>
-
- <p>
- <tt>/etc/aliases</tt> is the source file for the system mail
- aliases (e.g., postmaster, usenet, etc.)--it is the one
- which the sysadmin and <tt>postinst</tt> scripts may edit.
- After <tt>/etc/aliases</tt> is edited the program or human
- editing it must call <prgn>newaliases</prgn>. All MTA
- packages should come with a <prgn>newaliases</prgn> program,
- even if it does nothing, but older MTA packages do not do
- this so programs should not fail if <prgn>newaliases</prgn>
- cannot be found.</p>
-
- <p>
- The convention of writing <tt>forward to
- <var>address</var></tt> in the mailbox itself is not
- supported. Use a <tt>.forward</tt> file instead.</p>
-
- <p>
- The location for the <prgn>rmail</prgn> program used by UUCP
- for incoming mail is <tt>/usr/sbin/rmail</tt>, as per the
- FHS. Likewise, <prgn>rsmtp</prgn>, for receiving
- batch-SMTP-over-UUCP, is in <tt>/usr/sbin/rsmtp</tt> if it
- is supported.</p>
-
- <p>
- If you need to know what name to use (for example) on
- outgoing news and mail messages which are generated locally,
- you should use the file <tt>/etc/mailname</tt>. It will
- contain the portion after the username and <tt>@</tt> (at)
- sign for email addresses of users on the machine (followed
- by a newline).</p>
-
- <p>
- A package should check for the existence of this file. If
- it exists it should use it without comment. (An MTA's
- prompting configuration script may wish to prompt the user
- even if it finds this file exists.) If it does not exist it
- should prompt the user for the value and store it in
- <tt>/etc/mailname</tt> as well as using it in the package's
- configuration. The prompt should make it clear that the
- name will not just be used by that package. For example, in
- this situation the INN package says:
- <example>
- Please enter the `mail name' of your system. This is the
- hostname portion of the address to be shown on outgoing
- news and mail messages. The default is
- <var>syshostname</var>, your system's host name. Mail
- name [`<var>syshostname</var>']:
- </example>
- where <var>syshostname</var> is the output of <tt>hostname
- --fqdn</tt>.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>News system configuration</heading>
-
- <p>
- All the configuration files related to the NNTP (news)
- servers and clients should be located under
- <tt>/etc/news</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- There are some configuration issues that apply to a number
- of news clients and server packages on the machine. These
- are:
-
- <taglist>
- <tag>/etc/news/organization</tag>
- <item><p>A string which shall appear as the
- organization header for all messages posted
- by NNTP clients on the machine</p></item>
-
- <tag>/etc/news/server</tag>
- <item><p>Contains the FQDN of the upstream NNTP
- server, or localhost if the local machine is
- an NNTP server.</p></item>
- </taglist>
-
- Other global files may be added as required for cross-package news
- configuration.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Programs for the X Window System</heading>
-
- <p>
- Some programs can be configured with or without support for the X
- Window System. Typically, binaries produced with support for X
- will need the X shared libraries to run.
+ A package may contain a control area file called
+ <tt>conffiles</tt>. This file should be a list of filenames
+ of configuration files needing automatic handling, separated
+ by newlines. The filenames should be absolute pathnames,
+ and the files referred to should actually exist in the
+ package.
</p>
-
+
<p>
- Such programs should be configured <em>with</em> X support,
- and should declare a dependency on <tt>xlib6g</tt> (which
- contains X shared libraries). Users who wish to use the
- program can install just the relatively small
- <tt>xfree86-common</tt> and <tt>xlib6g</tt> packages, and do
- not need to install the whole of X.
- <footnote>
- <p>Note: With the release of the new X window System
- version (4.X), there probably shall be a sweeping change
- in the X Window System Policy in the future.</p>
- </footnote>
+ When a package is upgraded <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will process
+ the configuration files during the configuration stage,
+ shortly before it runs the package's <prgn>postinst</prgn>
+ script,
</p>
-
- <p>
- Do not create two versions (one with X support and one
- without) of your package.</p>
-
- <p>
- <em>Packages which provide an X server</em> that, directly or
- indirectly, communicates with real input and display hardware
- should declare in their control data that they provide the
- virtual package <tt>xserver</tt>.
- <footnote>
- <p>
- Rationale: implement current practice, and provide an
- actual policy for usage of the "xserver" virtual package
- which appears in the virtual packages list.
- In a nutshell, X servers that interface directly with
- the display and input hardware or via another subsystem
- (e.g., GGI) should provide xserver. Things like Xvfb,
- Xnest, and Xprt should not.
- </p>
- </footnote>
- </p>
<p>
- <em>Packages that provide a terminal emulator</em> for the X
- Window System which support a terminal type with a terminfo
- description provided in the <tt>ncurses-base</tt> package
- should declare in their control data that they provide the
- virtual package <tt>x-terminal-emulator</tt>. They should
- also register themselves as an alternative for
- <tt>/usr/bin/x-terminal-emulator</tt>, with a priority of
- 20.
+ For each file it checks to see whether the version of the
+ file included in the package is the same as the one that was
+ included in the last version of the package (the one that is
+ being upgraded from); it also compares the version currently
+ installed on the system with the one shipped with the last
+ version.
</p>
- <p>
- <em>Packages that provide window managers</em> should declare in
- their control data that they provide the virtual package
- <tt>x-window-manager</tt>. They should also register themselves as an
- alternative for <tt>/usr/bin/x-window-manager</tt>, with a priority
- calculated as follows:
- <list>
- <item>Start with a priority of 20.</item>
- <item>If the window manager supports the Debian menu system,
- add 20 points if this support is available in the
- package's default configuration (i.e., no
- configuration files belonging to the system or user
- have to be edited to activate the feature); if
- configuration files must be modified, add only 10
- points.</item>
- <item>If the window manager permits the X session to be
- restarted using a <em>different</em> window manager
- (without killing the X server) in its default
- configuration, add 10 points; otherwise add
- none.</item>
- </list>
- </p>
-
- <p>
- <em>Packages that provide fonts for the X Window System</em>
- must do a number of things to ensure that they are both
- available without modification of the X or font server
- configuration, and that they do not corrupt files used by
- other font packages to register information about themselves.
- <enumlist>
- <item>
- Fonts of any type supported by the X Window System
- should be be in a separate binary package from any
- executables, libraries, or documentation (except that
- specific to the fonts shipped); if a program or
- library is <em>unusable</em> without one or more
- specific fonts, the package containing the program or
- library should declare a dependency on the package(s)
- containing the font(s) it requires.
- </item>
- <item>
- BDF fonts should be converted to PCF fonts with the
- <tt>bdftopcf</tt> utility (available in the
- <tt>xbase-clients</tt> package, <tt>gzip</tt>ped, and
- placed in a directory that corresponds to their
- resolution:
- <list>
- <item>
- 100 dpi fonts should be placed in
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/100dpi/</tt>.
- </item>
- <item>
- 75 dpi fonts should be placed in
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/75dpi/</tt>.
- </item>
- <item>
- Character-cell fonts, cursor fonts, and other
- low-resolution fonts should be placed in
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/misc/</tt>.
- </item>
- </list>
- </item>
- <item>
- Speedo fonts should be placed in
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Speedo/</tt>.
- </item>
- <item>
- Type 1 fonts should be placed in
- /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1/</tt>. If font metric files are
- available, they may be placed here as well.
- </item>
- <item>
- Subdirectories of <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/</tt>
- other than those listed above should be neither created nor
- used. (The <tt>PEX</tt> and <tt>cyrillic</tt> directories are
- excepted for historical reasons, but installation of files into
- these directories remains discouraged.)
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages may, instead of placing files directly in
- the X font directories listed above, provide symbolic links in
- the font directory which point to the files' actual location
- in the filesystem. Such a location should comply with the
- FHS.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages should not contain both 75dpi and 100dpi
- versions of a font. If both are available, they should be
- provided in separate binary packages with "-75dpi" or "-100dpi"
- appended to the names of the packages containing the
- corresponding fonts.
- </item>
- <item>
- Fonts destined for the <tt>misc</tt> subdirectory should
- not be included in the same package as 75dpi or 100dpi fonts;
- instead, they should be provided in a separate package with
- "-misc" appended to its name.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages <em>must not</em> provide the files
- <tt>fonts.dir</tt>, <tt>fonts.alias</tt>, or
- <tt>fonts.scale</tt> in a font directory.
- <list>
- <item>
- <tt>fonts.dir</tt> files must not be provided at
- all.
- </item>
- <item>
- <tt>fonts.alias</tt> and <tt>fonts.scale</tt>
- files, if needed, should be provided in the
- directory
- <tt>/etc/X11/fonts/<em>fontdir</em>/<em>package</em>.<em>extension</em></tt>,
- where <em>fontdir</em> is the name of the
- subdirectory of
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/</tt> where the
- package's corresponding fonts are stored (e.g.,
- <tt>75dpi</tt> or <tt>misc</tt>),
- <em>package</em> is the name of the package that
- provides these fonts, and <em>extension</em> is
- either <tt>scale</tt> or <tt>alias</tt>,
- whichever corresponds to the file
- contents.
- </item>
- </list>
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages must declare a dependency on
- <tt>xbase-clients</tt> and, in the package
- post-installation and post-removal scripts, invoke the
- <tt>mkfontdir</tt> command on each directory into
- which they installed fonts.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages that provide one or more
- <tt>fonts.scale</tt> files as described above must declare a
- versioned dependency on <tt>xbase-clients (>=
- 3.3.3.1-5)</tt> and invoke <tt>update-fonts-scale</tt> on each
- directory into which they installed fonts
- <em>before</em> invoking <tt>mkfontdir</tt> on that
- directory. This invocation must occur in both the
- post-installation and post-removal scripts.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages that provide one or more
- <tt>fonts.alias</tt> files as described above must
- declare a versioned dependency on <tt>xbase-clients
- (>= 3.3.3.1-5)</tt> and, in the package
- post-installation and post-removal scripts, invoke
- <tt>update-fonts-alias</tt> on each directory into
- which they installed fonts.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages must not provide alias names for the
- fonts they include which collide with alias names already in
- use by fonts already packaged.
- </item>
- <item>
- Font packages must not provide fonts with the same XLFD
- registry name as another font already packaged.
- </item>
- </enumlist>
+ <p>
+ If neither the user nor the package maintainer has changed
+ the file, it is left alone. If one or the other has changed
+ their version, then the changed version is preferred - i.e.,
+ if the user edits their file, but the package maintainer
+ doesn't ship a different version, the user's changes will
+ stay, silently, but if the maintainer ships a new version
+ and the user hasn't edited it the new version will be
+ installed (with an informative message). If both have
+ changed their version the user is prompted about the problem
+ and must resolve the differences themselves.
</p>
- <p>
- <em>Application defaults</em> files must be installed in the
- directory <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/app-defaults/</tt>. They should
- not be registered as <em>conffile</em>s or otherwise treated as
- configuration files. Customization of programs' X resources may
- be supported with the provision of a file with the same name as
- that of the package placed in the <tt>/etc/X11/Xresources/</tt>
- directory, which should be registered as a <em>conffile</em>.
- <em>Important:</em> packages that install files into the
- <tt>/etc/X11/Xresources/</tt> directory <em>must</em> declare a
- conflict with <tt>xbase (<< 3.3.2.3a-2)</tt>; if this is
- not done it is possible for the installing package to destroy a
- previously-existing <tt>/etc/X11/Xresources</tt> <em>file</em>
- which had been customized by the system administrator.
- <footnote>
- <p>Rationale: clarifies the language to properly
- address the package maintainer, not the system
- administrator, as to how to manage
- /etc/X11/Xresources.</p>
- </footnote>
- </p>
-
-
- <p>
- <em>Packages using the X Window System should abide by the FHS
- standard whenever possible</em>; they should install binaries,
- libraries, manual pages, and other files in FHS-mandated
- locations wherever possible. This means that files should
- not be installed into <tt>/usr/X11R6/bin/</tt>,
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/</tt>, or <tt>/usr/X11R6/man/</tt> unless
- this is necessary for the package to operate properly.
- Configuration files for window managers and display managers
- should be placed in a subdirectory of <tt>/etc/X11/</tt>
- corresponding to the package name due to these programs'
- tight integration with the mechanisms of the X Window
- System. Application-level programs should use the
- <tt>/etc/</tt> directory unless otherwise mandated by
- policy. The installation of files into subdirectories of
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/include/X11/</tt> and
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/</tt> is permitted but discouraged;
- package maintainers should determine if subdirectories of
- <tt>/usr/lib/</tt> and <tt>/usr/share/</tt> can be used
- instead (symlinks from the X11R6 directories to
- FHS-compliant locations is encouraged if the program is not
- easily configured to look elsewhere for its files).
- Packages must not provide -- or install files into -- the
- directories <tt>/usr/bin/X11/</tt>,
- <tt>/usr/include/X11/</tt>, or <tt>/usr/lib/X11/</tt>.
- Files within a package should, however, make reference to
- these directories, rather than their X11R6-named
- counterparts <tt>/usr/X11R6/bin/</tt>,
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/include/X11/</tt>, and
- <tt>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/</tt>, if the resources being
- referred to have not been moved to FHS-compliant locations.
- </p>
-
- <p>
- <em>Programs that require the non-DFSG-compliant OSF/Motif
- library</em> should be compiled against and tested with
- LessTif (a free re-implementation of Motif) instead. If the
- maintainer judges that the program or programs do not work
- sufficiently well with LessTif to be distributed and
- supported, but do so when compiled against Motif, then two
- versions of the package should be created; one linked
- statically against Motif and with <tt>-smotif</tt> appended
- to the package name, and one linked dynamically against
- Motif and with <tt>-dmotif</tt> appended to the package
- name. Both Motif-linked versions are dependent upon
- non-DFSG-compliant software and thus cannot be uploaded to
- the main distribution; if the software is itself
- DFSG-compliant it may be uploaded to the contrib
- distribution. While known existing versions of OSF/Motif
- permit unlimited redistribution of binaries linked against
- the library (whether statically or dynamically), it is the
- package maintainer's responsibility to determine whether
- this is permitted by the license of the copy of OSF/Motif in
- his or her possession.
- </p>
- </sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Emacs lisp programs</heading>
-
- <p>
- Please refer to the `Debian Emacs Policy' (documented in
- <tt>debian-emacs-policy.gz</tt> of the
- <prgn>emacsen-common</prgn> package) for details of how to
- package emacs lisp programs.</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Games</heading>
-
- <p>
- The permissions on /var/games are 755
- <tt>root.root</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Each game decides on its own security policy.</p>
-
- <p>
- Games which require protected, privileged access to
- high-score files, savegames, etc., must be made
- set-<em>group</em>-id (mode 2755) and owned by
- <tt>root.games</tt>, and use files and directories with
- appropriate permissions (770 <tt>root.games</tt>, for
- example). They must <em>not</em> be made
- set-<em>user</em>-id, as this causes security problems. (If
- an attacker can subvert any set-user-id game they can
- overwrite the executable of any other, causing other players
- of these games to run a Trojan horse program. With a
- set-group-id game the attacker only gets access to less
- important game data, and if they can get at the other
- players' accounts at all it will take considerably more
- effort.)</p>
-
- <p>
- Some packages, for example some fortune cookie programs, are
- configured by the upstream authors to install with their
- data files or other static information made unreadable so
- that they can only be accessed through set-id programs
- provided. Do not do this in a Debian package: anyone can
- download the <tt>.deb</tt> file and read the data from it,
- so there is no point making the files unreadable. Not
- making the files unreadable also means that you don't have
- to make so many programs set-id, which reduces the risk of a
- security hole.</p>
-
- <p>
- As described in the FHS, binaries of games should be
- installed in the directory <tt>/usr/games</tt>. This also
- applies to games that use the X Window System. Manual pages
- for games (X and non-X games) should be installed in
- <tt>/usr/share/man/man6</tt>.</p>
- </sect>
- </chapt>
-
- <chapt><heading>Documentation</heading>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Manual pages</heading>
-
- <p>
- You must install manual pages in <prgn>nroff</prgn> source
- form, in appropriate places under <tt>/usr/share/man</tt>. You
- should only use sections 1 to 9 (see the FHS for more
- details). You must <em>not</em> install a preformatted `cat
- page'.</p>
-
- <p>
- If no manual page is available for a particular program,
- utility or function and this is reported as a bug on
- debian-bugs, a symbolic link from the requested manual page
- to the <manref name="undocumented" section="7"> manual page
- should be provided. This symbolic link can be created from
- <tt>debian/rules</tt> like this:
- <example>
- ln -s ../man7/undocumented.7.gz \
- debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man[1-9]/the_requested_manpage.[1-9].gz
- </example>
- This manpage claims that the lack of a manpage has been
- reported as a bug, so you may only do this if it really has
- (you can report it yourself, if you like). Do not close the
- bug report until a proper manpage is available.</p>
-
- <p>
- You may forward a complaint about a missing manpage to the
- upstream authors, and mark the bug as forwarded in the
- Debian bug tracking system. Even though the GNU Project do
- not in general consider the lack of a manpage to be a bug,
- we do--if they tell you that they don't consider it a bug
- you should leave the bug in our bug tracking system open
- anyway.</p>
-
- <p>
- Manual pages should be installed compressed using <tt>gzip
- -9</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- If one manpage needs to be accessible via several names it
- is better to use a symbolic link than the <tt>.so</tt>
- feature, but there is no need to fiddle with the relevant
- parts of the upstream source to change from <tt>.so</tt> to
- symlinks--don't do it unless it's easy. Do not create hard
- links in the manual page directories, and do not put
- absolute filenames in <tt>.so</tt> directives. The filename
- in a <tt>.so</tt> in a manpage should be relative to the
- base of the manpage tree (usually
- <tt>/usr/share/man</tt>).</p></sect>
-
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Info documents</heading>
-
- <p>
- Info documents should be installed in <tt>/usr/share/info</tt>.
- They should be compressed with <tt>gzip -9</tt>.</p>
-
- <p>
- Your package must call <prgn>install-info</prgn> to update the Info
- <tt>dir</tt>
- file, in its post-installation script:
- <example>
- install-info --quiet --section Development Development \
- /usr/share/info/foobar.info
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- It is a good idea to specify a section for the location of
- your program; this is done with the <tt>--section</tt>
- switch. To determine which section to use, you should look
- at <tt>/usr/share/info/dir</tt> on your system and choose the most
- relevant (or create a new section if none of the current
- sections are relevant). Note that the <tt>--section</tt>
- flag takes two arguments; the first is a regular expression
- to match (case-insensitively) against an existing section,
- the second is used when creating a new one.</p>
-
- <p>
- You must remove the entries in the pre-removal script:
- <example>
- install-info --quiet --remove /usr/share/info/foobar.info
- </example></p>
-
- <p>
- If <prgn>install-info</prgn> cannot find a description entry
- in the Info file you will have to supply one. See <manref
- name="install-info" section="8"> for details.</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Additional documentation</heading>
-
- <p>
- Any additional documentation that comes with the package can
- be installed at the discretion of the package maintainer.
- Text documentation should be installed in a directory
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt>, where
- <var>package</var> is the name of the package, and
- compressed with <tt>gzip -9</tt> unless it is small.</p>
-
- <p>
- If a package comes with large amounts of documentation which
- many users of the package will not require you should create
- a separate binary package to contain it, so that it does not
- take up disk space on the machines of users who do not need
- or want it installed.</p>
-
<p>
- It is often a good idea to put text information files
- (<tt>README</tt>s, changelogs, and so forth) that come with
- the source package in <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt>
- in the binary package. However, you don't need to install
- the instructions for building and installing the package, of
- course!</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect id="usrdoc">
- <heading>Accessing the documentation</heading>
-
- <p>
- Former Debian releases placed all additional documentation
- in <tt>/usr/doc/<var>package</var></tt>. To realize a
- smooth migration to
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt>, each package
- must maintain a symlink <tt>/usr/doc/<var>package</var></tt>
- that points to the new location of its documentation in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt><footnote>These
- symlinks will be removed in the future, but they have to be
- there for compatibility reasons until all packages have
- moved and the policy is changed accordingly.</footnote>.
- The symlink must be created when the package is installed;
- it cannot be contained in the package itself due to problems
- with <prgn>dpkg</prgn>. One reasonable way to accomplish
- this is to put the following in the package's
- <prgn>postinst</prgn>:
- <example>
- if [ "$1" = "configure" ]; then
- if [ -d /usr/doc -a ! -e /usr/doc/#PACKAGE# \
- -a -d /usr/share/doc/#PACKAGE# ]; then
- ln -sf ../share/doc/#PACKAGE# /usr/doc/#PACKAGE#
- fi
- fi
- </example>
- And the following in the package's <prgn>prerm</prgn>:
- <example>
- if [ \( "$1" = "upgrade" -o "$1" = "remove" \) \
- -a -L /usr/doc/#PACKAGE# ]; then
- rm -f /usr/doc/#PACKAGE#
- fi
- </example>
+ The comparisons are done by calculating the MD5 message
+ digests of the files, and storing the MD5 of the file as it
+ was included in the most recent version of the package.
</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Preferred documentation formats</heading>
-
+
<p>
- The unification of Debian documentation is being carried out
- via HTML.</p>
-
+ When a package is installed for the first time
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will install the file that comes with it,
+ unless that would mean overwriting a file already on the
+ filesystem.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If your package comes with extensive documentation in a
- mark up format that can be converted to various other formats
- you should if possible ship HTML versions in a binary
- package, in the directory
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>appropriate package</var></tt> or its
- subdirectories.
- <footnote>
- <p>The rationale: The important thing here is that HTML
- docs should be available in <em>some</em> package, not
- necessarily in the main binary package, though. </p>
- </footnote>
+ However, note that <prgn>dpkg</prgn> will <em>not</em>
+ replace a conffile that was removed by the user (or by a
+ script). This is necessary because with some programs a
+ missing file produces an effect hard or impossible to
+ achieve in another way, so that a missing file needs to be
+ kept that way if the user did it.
</p>
-
+
<p>
- Other formats such as PostScript may be provided at your
- option.</p>
+ Note that a package should <em>not</em> modify a
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn>-handled conffile in its maintainer
+ scripts. Doing this will lead to <prgn>dpkg</prgn> giving
+ the user confusing and possibly dangerous options for
+ conffile update when the package is upgraded.</p>
</sect>
-
- <sect id="copyrightfile">
- <heading>Copyright information</heading>
-
- <p>
- Every package must be accompanied by a verbatim copy of its
- copyright and distribution license in the file
- /usr/share/doc/<package-name>/copyright. This file must
- neither be compressed nor be a symbolic link.</p>
-
- <p>
- In addition, the copyright file must say where the upstream
- sources (if any) were obtained, and explain briefly what
- modifications were made in the Debian version of the package
- compared to the upstream one. It must name the original
- authors of the package and the Debian maintainer(s) who were
- involved with its creation.</p>
-
- <p>
- /usr/share/doc/<package-name> may be a symbolic link to a
- directory in /usr/share/doc only if two packages both come from
- the same source and the first package has a "Depends"
- relationship on the second. These rules are important
- because copyrights must be extractable by mechanical
- means.</p>
-
+
+ <sect><heading>Fully-featured maintainer script configuration
+ handling
+ </heading>
+
<p>
- Packages distributed under the UCB BSD license, the Artistic
- license, the GNU GPL, and the GNU LGPL should refer to the
- files /usr/share/common-licenses/BSD,
- /usr/share/common-licenses/Artistic,
- /usr/share/common-licenses/GPL, and
- /usr/share/common-licenses/LGPL.
- <footnote>
- <p>
- Why "licenses" and not "copyright"? Because
- <tt>/usr/doc/copyright</tt> used to contain all the
- copyright files, plus the four common licenses GPL,
- LGPL, Artistic and BSD. Now individual copyright files
- for packages are no longer in a common directory. Once
- <tt>/usr/doc/copyright</tt> is almost empty it makes
- sense to rename "copyright" to "licenses"
- </p>
- <p>
- Why "common-licenses" and not "licenses"? Because if I
- put just "licenses" I'm sure I will receive a bug report
- saying "license foo is not included in the licenses
- directory. They are not all the licenses, just a few
- common ones. I could use /usr/share/doc/common-licenses
- but I think this is too long, and, after all, the GPL
- does not "document" anything, it is merely a license.
- </p>
- </footnote>
+ For files which contain site-specific information such as
+ the hostname and networking details and so forth, it is
+ better to create the file in the package's
+ <prgn>postinst</prgn> script.
</p>
-
+
<p>
- Do not use the copyright file as a general <tt>README</tt>
- file. If your package has such a file it should be
- installed in <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/README</tt> or
- <tt>README.Debian</tt> or some other appropriate place.</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect>
- <heading>Examples</heading>
-
+ This will typically involve examining the state of the rest
+ of the system to determine values and other information, and
+ may involve prompting the user for some information which
+ can't be obtained some other way.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- Any examples (configurations, source files, whatever),
- should be installed in a directory
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/examples</tt>. These
- files should not be referenced by any program--they're there
- for the benefit of the system administrator and users, as
- documentation only. Architecture-specific example files
- should be installed in a directory
- <tt>/usr/lib/<var>package</var>/examples</tt>, and files in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/examples</tt> symlink
- to files in it. Or the latter directory may be a symlink to
- the former.</p>
- </sect>
-
- <sect id="instchangelog">
- <heading>Changelog files</heading>
-
- <p>
- This installed file must contain a copy of the
- <tt>debian/changelog</tt> file from your Debian source tree,
- and a copy of the upstream changelog file if there is one.
- The debian/changelog file should be installed in
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var></tt> as
- <tt>changelog.Debian.gz</tt>. If the upstream changelog
- file is text formatted, it must be accessible as
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.gz</tt>. If
- the upstream changelog file is HTML formatted, it must be
- accessible as
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.html.gz</tt>.
- A plain text version of the changelog must be accessible as
- <tt>/usr/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.gz</tt> (this can
- be created by <tt>lynx -dump -nolist</tt>). If the upstream
- changelog files do not already conform to this naming
- convention, then this may be achieved by either renaming the
- files or adding a symbolic link at the packaging developer's
- discretion.
- <footnote>
- <p>
- Rationale: People should not have to look into two
- places ofr upstream changelogs merely because they are
- in HTML format.
- </p>
- </footnote>
+ When using this method there are a couple of important
+ issues which should be considered:
</p>
-
+
<p>
- Both should be installed compressed using <tt>gzip -9</tt>,
- as they will become large with time even if they start out
- small.</p>
-
+ If you discover a bug in the program which generates the
+ configuration file, or if the format of the file changes
+ from one version to the next, you will have to arrange for
+ the postinst script to do something sensible - usually this
+ will mean editing the installed configuration file to remove
+ the problem or change the syntax. You will have to do this
+ very carefully, since the user may have changed the file,
+ perhaps to fix the very problem that your script is trying
+ to deal with - you will have to detect these situations and
+ deal with them correctly.
+ </p>
+
<p>
- If the package has only one changelog which is used both as
- the Debian changelog and the upstream one because there is
- no separate upstream maintainer then that changelog should
- usually be installed as
- <tt>/usr/share/doc/<var>package</var>/changelog.gz</tt>; if
- there is a separate upstream maintainer, but no upstream
- changelog, then the Debian changelog should still be called
- <tt>changelog.Debian.gz</tt>.</p>
- </sect>
- </chapt>
- </book>
-</debiandoc>
+ If you do go down this route it's probably a good idea to
+ make the program that generates the configuration file(s) a
+ separate program in <file>/usr/sbin</file>, by convention called
+ <file><var>package</var>config</file> and then run that if
+ appropriate from the post-installation script. The
+ <tt><var>package</var>config</tt> program should not
+ unquestioningly overwrite an existing configuration - if its
+ mode of operation is geared towards setting up a package for
+ the first time (rather than any arbitrary reconfiguration
+ later) you should have it check whether the configuration
+ already exists, and require a <tt>--force</tt> flag to
+ overwrite it.</p></sect>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-alternatives"><heading>Alternative versions of
+ an interface - <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> (from old
+ Packaging Manual)
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ When several packages all provide different versions of the
+ same program or file it is useful to have the system select a
+ default, but to allow the system administrator to change it
+ and have their decisions respected.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ For example, there are several versions of the <prgn>vi</prgn>
+ editor, and there is no reason to prevent all of them from
+ being installed at once, each under their own name
+ (<prgn>nvi</prgn>, <prgn>vim</prgn> or whatever).
+ Nevertheless it is desirable to have the name <tt>vi</tt>
+ refer to something, at least by default.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If all the packages involved cooperate, this can be done with
+ <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn>.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Each package provides its own version under its own name, and
+ calls <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> in its postinst to
+ register its version (and again in its prerm to deregister
+ it).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ See the manpage <manref name="update-alternatives"
+ section="8"> for details.
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ If <prgn>update-alternatives</prgn> does not seem appropriate
+ you may wish to consider using diversions instead.</p>
+ </appendix>
+
+ <appendix id="pkg-diversions"><heading>Diversions - overriding a
+ package's version of a file (from old Packaging Manual)
+ </heading>
+
+ <p>
+ It is possible to have <prgn>dpkg</prgn> not overwrite a file
+ when it reinstalls the package it belongs to, and to have it
+ put the file from the package somewhere else instead.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ This can be used locally to override a package's version of a
+ file, or by one package to override another's version (or
+ provide a wrapper for it).
+ </p>
+
+ <p>
+ Before deciding to use a diversion, read <ref
+ id="pkg-alternatives"> to see if you really want a diversion
+ rather than several alternative versions of a program.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ There is a diversion list, which is read by <prgn>dpkg</prgn>,
+ and updated by a special program <prgn>dpkg-divert</prgn>.
+ Please see <manref name="dpkg-divert" section="8"> for full
+ details of its operation.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ When a package wishes to divert a file from another, it should
+ call <prgn>dpkg-divert</prgn> in its preinst to add the
+ diversion and rename the existing file. For example,
+ supposing that a <prgn>smailwrapper</prgn> package wishes to
+ install a wrapper around <file>/usr/sbin/smail</file>:
+ <example>
+ if [ install = "$1" ]; then
+ dpkg-divert --package smailwrapper --add --rename \
+ --divert /usr/sbin/smail.real /usr/sbin/smail
+ fi
+ </example> Testing <tt>$1</tt> is necessary so that the script
+ doesn't try to add the diversion again when
+ <prgn>smailwrapper</prgn> is upgraded. The <tt>--package
+ smailwrapper</tt> ensures that <prgn>smailwrapper</prgn>'s
+ copy of <file>/usr/sbin/smail</file> can bypass the diversion and
+ get installed as the true version.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The postrm has to do the reverse:
+ <example>
+ if [ remove = "$1" ]; then
+ dpkg-divert --package smailwrapper --remove --rename \
+ --divert /usr/sbin/smail.real /usr/sbin/smail
+ fi
+ </example>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Do not attempt to divert a file which is vitally important for
+ the system's operation - when using <prgn>dpkg-divert</prgn>
+ there is a time, after it has been diverted but before
+ <prgn>dpkg</prgn> has installed the new version, when the file
+ does not exist.</p>
+ </appendix>
+ </book>
+</debiandoc>
+<!-- vim:set ai et sts=2 sw=2 tw=76: -->
projects / debian / debian-policy.git / blobdiff